See all Online Master's Degrees in Health
See all Master's Degrees in Engineering
Most searched curriculums
Official qualification
Madrid
Be part of the best-prepared pool of professionals in the sports industry, with a faculty made up of leading professionals in the sector, and you will enjoy the most cutting-edge sports and health facilities in the country. You will stand out for your multisport and technological preparation, with up to 8 extra certifications and you will complete your experience by doing internships in TOP entities such as the Rafa Nadal Academy, LaLiga, Quirónsalud or national sports federations, thanks to more than 50 agreements with companies. Will you join us?
In collaboration with:
With the dual degree in Sport and Physiotherapy, you will be trained through a programme designed to meet the latest demands of the sport and health sectors, enabling you to develop a well-rounded and up-to-date skill set.
Furthermore, to boost your employability, you’ll benefit from the support of the UAX Rafa Nadal University School, a unique university programme aimed at enhancing your international prospects.
Take the plunge and become part of the next generation of highly qualified professionals in health and sport.
Why study at the UAX Rafa Nadal University College?
As part of the proposal of the UAX Rafa Nadal University School, our students will be able to learn first-hand the tennis techniques and values that have led Rafael Nadal to become the best tennis player in history on clay courts, in a day of training and face-to-face masterclass with the athlete.
Access to internships at the club and its Sports City, participation of Atlético de Madrid professionals in course delivery, an exclusive immersive experience, and the opportunity to boost your talent through Maker Projects and applied research lines focused on performance and health.
Focusing on topics of real application: specialities or master's degrees in football, tennis, etc., performance improvement and recovery in elite sportsmen and women, functional assessment of sports performance, biomechanics, sports planning and management, entrepreneurship, etc.
In addition to the prestigious teaching staff of UAX, you will learn alongside the professionals who make up the Rafa Nadal team (Gemma Bes, Domingo Rosselló, Lluc Bauza, Rafa Alzamora and Antonio Arenas), to acquire the key knowledge and skills for your profession.
Exclusive online training programme based on the values that have made Rafa Nadal successful: effort, cooperation, empathy, leadership, professional ethics, resilience, work discipline, among others.
Taught by prestigious experts and designed to provide you with advanced skills in: Neurological physiotherapy or sports physiotherapy (with the elite team of tennis player Rafa Nadal); oncological physiotherapy, cardiovascular physiotherapy or respiratory physiotherapy.
The only university where you can obtain one of the world's most prestigious certifications in the field of fitness and strength training.
Specialist in the use of technology for muscle recovery and activation.
Specialist certificate in training with pneumatic strength machines.
Oxygen therapy specialist, one of the most advanced and innovative technologies on the market in simulated altitude training.
Certification in non-invasive pain neuromodulation.
Certification in Electrophysiotherapy.
You will learn all the knowledge related to both the health and sports sectors. This programme is also designed to train you through mobility and student exchange programmes, to offer you a diverse and pluralistic education.
Degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences + Degree in Physiotherapy
First Year
ANNUAL SUBJECTS
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0130512 | Team sports I | OB | 8 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Team sports ICódigo: 0130512 Imprimir Year 1. Annual module. Compulsory. 8 credits. Profesores
Objectives - To gain an understanding of the basics of football, handball and rugby: structure, rules, basic techniques and their application to the educational setting and grassroots sport. - To acquire the skills to design sessions focused on both the educational setting and the early stages of sporting participation. - To enhance motor skills by practising the basic techniques of the sport Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set Learning outcomes - C.E.54. Understand and master the technical and tactical fundamentals, both individual and collective, in different sports. - C.E.55. Understand and apply the rules and regulations of different sports. - C.E.56. To understand and master, with an acceptable level of autonomy, specific technical elements and their application to the game and competition. Learning outcomes The criteria that may be used to assess the competences in terms of learning outcomes will include, amongst others, the following: - Demonstrate sufficient knowledge of the various content areas covered by answering theoretical questions. - Carry out practical work applying the concepts covered in class. -Apply what is covered in class at a theoretical level to real-life situations, using practical scenarios. -Reproducing the technical models developed in class, to an appropriate standard. - Compile a repertoire of exercises and games, knowing how to adapt them to various physical and sporting contexts. -Design learning situations based on the context and the characteristics of the target group. Description of the content FOOTBALL: THEORETICAL MODULE Topic 1: A Brief History of Football. Topic 2: Technique. Topic 3: Control. Topic 4: Skill and Dexterity. Topic 5: Dribbling. Topic 6: Shooting. Topic 7: Dribbling. Topic 8: Shooting. Topic 9: Passing. Topic 10: Passing and Combined Moves. Topic 11: Defensive Techniques. Topic 12: The goalkeeper. Topic 13: Tactics. Topic 14: Training Methodology. Topic 15: Laws of the Game. PRACTICAL SECTION Practical Session 1. Initial assessment of students’ procedural knowledge. Practical Session 2. General Methodology: Dribbling, Control, Passing. Practical Session 3. Heading, Dribbling, Technical Marking. Practical Session 4. Shooting. Practical Session 5. Dribbling, feinting and tackling. Session 6. Control, passing and interception. Session 7. Identifying technical actions in a real match. Session 8. Shooting. Defensive and offensive blocking. Session 9. Comprehensive Methodology: Dribbling, ball control, passing, feints and shooting. Session 10. Passing. Combined Moves and Play Patterns. Session 11. Defensive technical skills. Practical Session 12. The Goalkeeper: technique and tactics. 24/4/23, 13:53 Course programme for the Bachelor’s Degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences https://campus.uax.es/central/ 3/8 Practical Session 13. Different teaching methodologies in football. Practical Session 14. Tactics. 7-a-side and 11-a-side. Practical Session 15. Practical Assessment I. HANDBALL – THEORETICAL BLOCK Topic 0: History and development of handball worldwide and in Spain. Topic 1: Technical elements and their classification. Topic 2: Individual attacking and defensive techniques. Topic 3: Individual Offensive Techniques. Topic 4: Individual Defensive Techniques. Topic 5: Team Tactics and Playing Systems. Topic 6: The Goalkeeper. Topic 7: Laws of the Game. Basic Knowledge. HANDBALL – PRACTICAL MODULE Practice Session 1. Initial assessment and fundamental positions. Practice Session 2. Individual Offensive Technique: basic positions and ways of catching the ball. Practice 3. Individual Offensive Technique: Passes and Receives. Practice 4. Individual Offensive Technique: Dribbling and Shooting. Practical Session 5. Individual Offensive Technique: feints, changes of direction whilst dribbling and running off the ball. Session 6. Individual Defensive Techniques: marking, blocking and winning the ball back. Session 7. Team Tactics and Playing Systems. Session 8. The Goalkeeper. Session 9. Attacking and defensive systems. Session 10. Practical Assessment. RUGBY - Teaching methodology for tag rugby. - Theory and practice of the basic technical fundamentals of rugby. - Theory and practice of the basic rules of rugby. - Theory and practice of the basic tactical aspects of rugby. - History: the origins, development and current state of rugby. Training activities The training activities designed to enable students to acquire the intended competences during this module and to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: 1) Lectures on concepts relating to the fundamentals of human motor skills: sport, games, dance, physical expression, etc. (30 hours). 2) Practical sessions in laboratories or sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to solve problems and make decisions independently (60 hours). 3) Individual and group tutorials (10 hours). 4) Oral, written and practical assessment tests (7 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: Final knowledge assessments (50%). - Written examinations covering the full range of teaching activities. Practical activities (30%). - Practical assessments carried out within the specific context of each sport. Portfolio (20%). - Supplementary assignments involving the collection of information, such as a session log or similar. ONE-OFF ASSESSMENT (100%) - This will consist of two distinct parts: a theoretical component worth 60% and a practical component worth 40%. Students must achieve a mark of 5 out of 10 in the practical component to pass the module. This assessment model will only apply on official assessment dates, whether during the regular or supplementary examination periods. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
Bibliography Supplementary: 1. SANTIAGO VIEITEZ MENDEZ BASIC PRINCIPLES OF TECHNIQUE AND TACTICS FROM THE PERSPECTIVE OF A FOOTBALL ANALYST MURILLO SAIF (MCSPORTS. 2018. ISBN: 9788494857867 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0130513 | Individual sports | FB | 12 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Individual sportsCódigo: 0130513 Imprimir Year 1: Annual module. Foundation course. 12 credits. Profesores
Objectives The objectives of the degree programme are aligned with the competences/learning outcomes set out in the Resolution of 18 September 2018 of the General Secretariat for Universities, publishing the Agreement of the Council of Universities of 17 September 2018, which sets out recommendations for universities’ submission of verification reports for the official Bachelor’s degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences. In this regard, the following objectives are set out: • To understand, develop and be able to apply the procedures, strategies, activities, resources, techniques and methods involved in the teaching-learning process efficiently, carrying out all activities across all areas of professional practice in physical activity and sport (formal and informal physical and sporting education; physical and sports training; physical exercise for health; management of physical activity and sport). • To communicate and interact appropriately and effectively in the fields of physical activity and sport, across diverse contexts of practice, demonstrating teaching skills in a conscious, natural and sustained manner. • Design and implement a methodological process comprising observation, reflection, analysis, diagnosis, execution, technical and scientific evaluation and/or dissemination in different contexts and across all sectors of professional practice in physical activity and sport. • Adapt educational intervention to the individual characteristics and needs of the entire population, with an emphasis on specific groups such as: schoolchildren, older people (the elderly), people with reduced mobility, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking gender and diversity into account. • Be able to guide, design, implement and evaluate physical exercise and physical fitness at an advanced level, based on scientific evidence, across different fields, contexts and types of activities for the entire population, with an emphasis on special populations such as: older people (senior citizens), schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking gender and diversity into account. • To design and implement, with fluency, naturalness, awareness and consistency, physical exercise and physical conditioning programmes that are appropriate, efficient, systematic, varied and based on scientific evidence, for the development of processes of adaptation and improvement or rehabilitation of specific abilities in each individual in relation to human movement and its optimisation; with the aim of being able to solve unstructured, increasingly complex and unpredictable problems, with an emphasis on special populations. • To analyse, identify, diagnose, promote, guide and evaluate strategies, measures and activities that encourage adherence to an active lifestyle and the regular, healthy participation in and practice of physical activity, sport and exercise in an appropriate, efficient and safe manner by members of the public, with the aim of improving their overall health, well-being and quality of life, with a focus on specific population groups such as: older people (the elderly), schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking gender and diversity into account. • Be able to promote, advise on, design, implement and evaluate, from a technical and scientific perspective, appropriate and varied programmes of physical activity, exercise and sport, adapted to the needs, requirements and individual and group characteristics of the entire population, with an emphasis on older people (senior citizens), women and diversity, schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor). • Be able to fluently develop procedures and protocols to solve unstructured, unpredictable and increasingly complex problems, coordinating and demonstrating a command of the elements, methods, procedures, activities, resources, techniques and processes relating to physical fitness and physical exercise in an appropriate, efficient, systematic, diverse and methodologically integrated manner for the entire population, with an emphasis on specific groups such as: older people (the elderly), schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking into account gender and diversity, and across any sector of professional practice within physical activity and sport. • To identify, organise, direct, plan, coordinate, implement and carry out technical and scientific evaluation of the various types of physical and sporting activities adapted to the development, characteristics and needs of individuals and the nature of the activity, venue and organisation, across all types of physical activity and sport services, including sporting events, and within any type of organisation, population, context, setting and group, with an emphasis on specific populations such as: older people (the elderly), schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor) and in any sector of professional practice within physical activity and sport (formal and informal physical education and sport; physical and sports training; physical exercise for health; management of physical activity and sport), ensuring safety, efficiency and professionalism in the work carried out in compliance with current regulations. • To articulate and present, with rigour and a scientific approach, the rationale upon which to consistently and professionally develop, support, substantiate and justify all actions, decisions, processes, procedures, interventions, activities, tasks, conclusions, reports and professional performance. • Understand and be able to apply ethical and deontological principles and those of social justice in professional practice and engagement, whilst maintaining a commitment to scientific and professional rigour and a consistent attitude of service to the public in the exercise of their professional practice, with a view to achieving improvement, excellence, quality and efficiency. • Understand, develop and be able to apply the ethical and professional standards, structural and organisational frameworks, professional performance requirements and regulations governing the professional practice of graduates in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences, within any professional sector of physical activity and sport (formal and informal physical and sports education; physical and sports training; physical exercise for health; management of physical activity and sport); as well as being able to carry out multidisciplinary work. • To understand, explain and communicate the roles, responsibilities and importance of a competent graduate in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences, as well as to analyse, understand, identify and reflect critically and independently on their professional identity, training and performance in order to achieve the aims and benefits inherent in physical activity and sport in an appropriate, safe, healthy and efficient manner across all physical and sporting services offered and provided, and within any professional sector of physical activity and sport. Training activities: The training activities designed to enable students to acquire the intended competences during this module and to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: 1) Lectures on concepts relating to the fundamentals of human motor skills: sports, games, dance, physical expression, etc. 2) Practical sessions in laboratories or sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making 3) Seminars, workshops, etc. 4) Individual and group tutorials 5) Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work carried out both individually and in groups, etc. 6) Oral, written and practical assessments. Course content - ATHLETICS U.D.1. The sport of athletics. • Historical development. • Fundamental concepts and rules. Unit 2. Running events: sprinting, hurdles, middle-distance and long-distance running. • Description and technical analysis. • Rules. • Relays. • Teaching and methodology. Unit 3. Jumps. Long jump, triple jump, high jump and pole vault. • Description and technical analysis. • Rules. • Teaching and methodology. Unit 4. Throwing events. Shot put, discus throw, javelin throw and hammer throw. • Description and technical analysis. • Rules. • Teaching and methodology. Unit 5. Race walking and combined events. • Description and technical analysis. • Rules. • Teaching and methodology. GYMNASTICS – GYMNASTIC SKILLS. Topic 0: Conceptual and historical introduction to gymnastics. 0.1 Description and classification. 0.2 History of gymnastics. 0.3 General rules and regulations. Topic 1: Women’s Artistic Gymnastics (WAG). 1.1 Floor. Non-aerial acrobatic elements: Forward somersault, Backward somersault, Handstand, Five-count, Side roll. Technical analysis of the elements. Methodological progressions and corrections. 1.2 Vault. Technical analysis of the elements: Inward straddle, Outward straddle, Straight-arm vault. Methodological progressions and corrections. 1.3 Uneven Bars. Technical analysis of the elements: Twist, Take-off, Back flip, Forward swing, Swings, Sideways pass. Methodological progressions and corrections. 1.4 Balance beam. Technical analysis of the elements: Movements, Jumps, Non-flying acrobatics, Spins, Exits. Methodological progressions and corrections. Topic 2: Men’s Artistic Gymnastics (MAG) 2.1 Rings. Technical analysis of the elements. Methodological progressions and corrections. 2.2 Parallel bars. Technical analysis of the elements. Methodological progressions and corrections. Topic 3: Aids in gymnastics. 3.1 The assistant and the student gymnast. Topic 4: Physical preparation and conditioning in gymnastics. 4.1 Key principles. Basic physical training. Topic 5: Gymnastic skills applied to the educational setting. 5.1 Technical equipment and safety. Gyms, apparatus, and procedures for assistance and protection. 5.2 Characteristics and structure of training sessions. Topic 6: Other gymnastics disciplines. 6.1 Acrosport. Routines and choreography. SWIMMING. Block 1. Fundamentals of swimming Topic 1: History of swimming Topic 2: Biomechanical principles of swimming Block 2. Teaching swimming Topic 3: Stages of learning aquatic skills a. Familiarisation with the aquatic environment b. Breathing c. Floating d. Basic propulsion e. Basic skills and abilities for adapting to and mastering the aquatic environment Topic 4: Different approaches to aquatic activities Topic 5: Teaching styles in the aquatic environment Block 3. Technical fundamentals of swimming Topic 6: Starts and turns Topic 7: Technique for the front crawl and backstroke Topic 8: Technique for the breaststroke and butterfly strokes Topic 9: Technical assessment of swimming strokes Block 4: Other Olympic disciplines Topic 10: Other Olympic disciplines a. Water polo b. Synchronised swimming c. Diving d. Open-water swimming Training activities The training activities designed to enable students to acquire the intended competences during this module and to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: - Lectures on concepts relating to the fundamentals of human motor function: biological, mechanical, behavioural, social and scientific (30 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (14 hours). - Practical sessions in laboratories or sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making (90 hours). - Oral, written and practical assessment tests (7 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The final mark will be calculated as the average of the marks for each sport. In order to calculate this average, students must pass all sports with a minimum pass mark. For each sport, the general assessment criteria will be as follows: • CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: To be eligible for this type of assessment, attendance at practical classes must be at least 70 per cent, on the understanding that attendance is compulsory and essential for the best possible learning of the course content. o Final knowledge tests (50%) o Practical activities (30%) o Portfolio (20%) If a student fails any of the modules in the ordinary assessment period, they will sit the supplementary assessment for the failed modules • NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: All students who do not meet the attendance requirement or who opt for this type of assessment will sit a final examination in both the ordinary and supplementary examination periods, if necessary, with the following weightings: o Theoretical component: 60% o Practical component: 40% It is essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in the practical component in order for it to be averaged with the theoretical component. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
Reading list Core: 1. Cancela, J.M.; Pariente, S.; Camiña, F.; Lorenzo, R. A Treatise on Swimming: From Beginners to Advanced. Paidotribo. 2010. ISBN: 9788480199544 2. Elisa Estape GYMNASTIC AND ACROBATIC SKILLS IN THE EDUCATIONAL SETTING: THE JOY OF LEARNING INDE. 1999. ISBN: 9788487330841 3. Javier Brazo-Sayavera Teaching Manual for University Athletics Instruction University of the Republic. 2022. ISBN: 978-99-740-19 4. Maglischo, E. Swimming: Technique, Training and Competition Paidotribo. 2009. ISBN: 9788480190459 5. Navarro, F.; Díaz Ureña, G.; González Vegas, M.J. How to Swim Well editec@rec. 2012. ISBN: 9788493918064 6. Rius Sant, Joan Methodology and Techniques in Athletics Barcelona: Paidotribo, 2009. 2009. ISBN: 9788480198295 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0130603 | General Physiotherapy | OB | 15 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
General PhysiotherapyCódigo: 0130603 Imprimir Year 1. Annual module. Compulsory. 15 credits. Profesores
Objectives Students taking this module must be able to demonstrate an understanding of the general structure of the discipline of Physiotherapy in relation to the fundamentals of Physiotherapy and Physiotherapy Assessment. Prerequisites Not applicable Learning Outcomes Not applicable Learning outcomes RK1 To know and understand the morphology, physiology, pathology and behaviour of people, both healthy and unwell, in their natural and social environments RK9 To understand the physiological and structural changes that may occur as a result of the application of physiotherapy RK12 Identify the concept, development and principles of physiotherapy in its scientific and professional aspects RK13 To understand and apply the theoretical foundations and the development of physiotherapy methods and procedures RK14 Understand ergonomic and anthropometric principles RS1 Design a physiotherapy intervention plan in accordance with criteria of appropriateness, validity and efficiency RS2 Assess the progress of the results obtained from treatment in relation to the set objectives RS3 Prepare the discharge report for physiotherapy care once the proposed objectives have been met RS4 Acquire clinical management skills, including the efficient use of healthcare resources, and carry out planning, management and monitoring activities in healthcare units where physiotherapy is provided, taking into account their relationship with other healthcare services RS10 Understand and apply manual and instrumental assessment methods and procedures in physiotherapy and physical rehabilitation, as well as the scientific evaluation of their usefulness and effectiveness RC2 Assess the patient’s functional status, taking into account physical, psychological and social aspects RC3 Carry out diagnostic assessments for physiotherapy care in accordance with standards and using internationally recognised validation tools RC4 Implement, manage and coordinate the physiotherapy intervention plan, using appropriate therapeutic tools and taking into account the individual needs of the patient RC5 Provide effective physiotherapy care, delivering comprehensive support to patients RC6 Work in the areas of health promotion, prevention, protection and recovery RC8 Incorporate the ethical and legal principles of the profession into professional practice, whilst integrating social and community aspects into decision-making RC9 Participate in the development of evidence-based physiotherapy care protocols, promoting professional activities that stimulate research in physiotherapy RC10 Carry out physiotherapy interventions based on a holistic approach to healthcare, involving multi-professional cooperation, the integration of processes and continuity of care RC14 Understand the general theory of functioning, disability and health and their international classification, as well as models of intervention in physiotherapy and their application in clinical practice Description of the content 1. Core health sciences module covering compulsory core content on the fundamentals of physiotherapy and physiotherapy assessment. 2. Historical context of physiotherapy and its professional development within the European framework 3. Fundamentals of physiotherapy and functional assessment 4. Competency frameworks within the multi- and interdisciplinary model 5. Physiology of musculoskeletal assessment 6. Segmental and functional assessment of the human body 7. Functional assessment in paediatrics and gerontology: comparison of normative functional parameters 8. Joint angular and muscle dynamometric assessment Training activities Expressed in training hours and % of face-to-face teaching P1. – Lectures 60 hours 100% P2. – Interactive classes 14 hours 100% P3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities 90h 100% P4. – Preparation of assignments or projects and problem-solving 4 hours 0% P5. Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews 197 hours 0% P6. Tutorials 6 hours 100% P7.- Knowledge assessments 4 hours 100% Total: 375 hours of learning activities Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- Assessment system and criteria The assessment criteria will be weighted according to the teaching and learning methodology used and the teaching workload for each component, in accordance with the following criteria: 5%_ Class attendance 15%_ Seminar activities (TRAB) 40%_ Assessment of ‘practical’ concepts 40%_ Assessment of ‘theoretical’ concepts (sessions) The final mark for the module will be the sum of the components, weighted accordingly, with a score of 5 out of a possible 10 considered a pass. Each and every practical and theoretical component (including class attendance and seminars) must be passed separately in order to be eligible for the final mark to be calculated; otherwise, the mark published will be the lowest of the marks obtained.
a. Attendance. Overall attendance will be taken into account (lectures (sessions), workshops and seminars (TRAB)). 95–100 per cent _ 0.5 marks 90–95 per cent _ 0.4 marks 80–90 per cent _ 0.3 points 70–80 per cent _ 0.2 marks 60–70 per cent _ 0.1 marks below 60% _ 0 marks and the module is therefore failed b. Seminars (TRAB). Assessment will be based on assignments and presentations on topics proposed by the lecturer relating to the subject matter taught, aimed at broadening students’ knowledge of the course; primarily focusing on new technologies that reinforce the content covered in the lectures (Sessions). All students are required to present one or more of the assignments allocated to their group. They are obliged to present the required work in public; on occasion, the lecturer may require the presentation to be ‘uploaded’ to the portal prior to the presentation so that fellow students can study it and formulate their questions following the presentation. The TRABs are assessed at the end of the academic year, with 5% of the mark allocated to the completion of the required projects, 5% to the presentation of these projects, and 5% to responses to any questions or discussions that arise. The TRAB will be assessed at the end of the academic year, with a final mark awarded based on the criteria explained above. c. Lectures (theoretical content) Throughout the two semesters, a series of continuous assessment tests will be held on the subject matter covered up to that point. In order for continuous assessment to be taken into account and for material to be covered through assessments or even by semester, the arithmetic mean of all continuous assessment tests (to calculate the mean, the mark for each test must be 5 or above) must be 6 or above. If, at the end of the semester, the arithmetic mean of the continuous assessment tests is below 6, the student must sit an examination covering the entire syllabus taught during that semester in the February and/or June examination sessions. These February and ordinary examination sessions cover the entire syllabus taught during the semester, and a pass is achieved with a numerical mark of 5 or above. In order to be eligible for exemption from the syllabus in the first semester—either through continuous assessment by achieving an arithmetic mean of 6 or above (the average is calculated from 5 upwards), or by achieving a mark of 5 or above in the January examination—the following condition must be met: The student must have an attendance rate for the theoretical part (sessions) of 70 per cent or higher; otherwise, regardless of the marks obtained in the qualifying assessments or in the January exam, the student will fail the first semester and will be required to sit the entire module in the official ordinary examination session in May–June. The same criteria for continuous assessment tests (same characteristics) apply during the second semester; If, at any point during the course, a student’s attendance rate for the sessions falls below 70 per cent, none of the assessments carried out during the first semester’s continuous assessment, the final exam for the entire first semester, the second semester’s continuous assessment, or the final exam for the second semester will be taken into account. Consequently, the final mark will depend solely and exclusively on the mark obtained in the official May–June examination session for the entire module (first and second semesters). In the case of the May–June ordinary examination session, the student must sit the examinations for both semesters separately and pass each with a mark of 5 or higher; in which case an arithmetic mean of the two marks is calculated; if one is a fail, the student does not pass the module and is awarded the lower weighted mark for the relevant part. The official exam for the theoretical part (sessions) consists of 60 questions; regardless of their attendance rate for the course, students are entitled to sit the exam, which is passed with a numerical mark of 5 or above. For continuous assessment tests and all multiple-choice tests, there will be a test with four options, one of which is correct; incorrect answers will result in a deduction of 0.33%. Continuous assessment tests consist of 30 multiple-choice questions with the characteristics described above, whilst end-of-semester exams – both the standard and supplementary official sittings – consist of 60 multiple-choice questions with the same characteristics. d. Workshops (practical content) Each semester, there will be two continuous assessment tests, each accounting for 10 per cent of the total mark. In order to be eligible for the continuous assessment of practical content for each semester, students must provide evidence, using the method determined by the lecturer, that they have not been absent without valid reason from any practical session; failing this, they are not entitled to sit the continuous assessment tests and will be examined at the end of the semester. The attendance criteria for practical sessions to be taken into account are therefore as follows In the practical component, it is not possible to pass the module solely through continuous assessment. The final exam covering all the material taught during the semester accounts for 80%. In all practical examinations, students must answer all the questions; if a student fails to answer any of the questions set in any of the examination sessions, it is deemed that the student is unable to deal with that clinical situation; the same applies if they obtain a score of zero for any of the questions, which is treated as an unanswered question. In such cases, the exam cannot be passed based on the marks from the remaining questions. A question scored as zero or left unanswered means that the practical exam has not been passed. This applies to all types and sittings of the practical component of the module. Attendance at practical sessions is compulsory for 100 per cent of the sessions, and students must bring the necessary equipment – a goniometer and a tape measure – as well as white medical pyjamas and white clogs.
*QUARTERLY AND FINAL THEORETICAL EXAMS:
Assessment of both practical and theoretical concepts will take place via separate examinations at the end of each semester. Students will be required to sit the ordinary June examination session for any theoretical and/or practical components not passed during the academic year.
Failure to pass any theoretical and/or practical component in the ordinary June examination session will result in a fail for the ENTIRE theoretical and/or practical component of the module.
For the July examination session, any theory and/or practical mark of 5 or above will be retained, and students will only be required to sit examinations on all the theoretical and/or practical content not passed in the ordinary June examination session.
Therefore, the final mark is based on a variety of elements, corresponding to all your activities and work. It is an absolute requirement to pass all the components of the module with a mark of at least 5 in order for the final average to be calculated, in both the ordinary and supplementary examination sessions. SE1.— Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. – Final knowledge assessments 50 70 SE3. – Laboratory practical workbook 5 10 SE4. – Portfolio 5 10 Total 60 120 Bibliography Core: 1. David X Cifu Geriatric Rehabilitation Elsevier. 2019. ISBN: 9788491135036 2. Bryan Derrickson Human Physiology Pan-American Medical Publishing House. 2018. ISBN: 9786078546053 3. By Dale Avers, PT, DPT, PhD, FAPTA Daniels and Worthingham. Muscle Balance Techniques ELSEVIER. 2020. ISBN: 9788491135739 4. By Joshua Cleland, PT, PhD, Shane Koppenhaver, PT, PhD and Jonathan Su, PT, DPT, LMT Netter. Clinical Examination in Orthopaedics ELSEVIER. 2022. ISBN: 9788413821214 5. By Juan Antonio Díaz Mancha Manual Assessment ELSEVIER. 2021. ISBN: 9788491132523 6. By Juan Bautista Cabello López; Edited by Juan Bautista Cabello López Critical appraisal of clinical evidence ELSEVIER. 2022. ISBN: 9788491138839 7.- By Michelle H. Cameron, MD, PT, MCR; Edited by Michelle H. Cameron, MD, PT, MCR Physical Agents in Rehabilitation ELSEVIER. 2019. ISBN: 9788491133643 8. By Pedro Abizanda Soler Geriatric Medicine ELSEVIER. 2021. ISBN: 9788491135234 9. By Richard L. Drake, A. Wayne Vogl, PhD, and Adam M.W. Mitchell Gray’s Anatomy Flashcards ELSEVIER. 2022. ISBN: 9788413820187 10. By Thomas W. Myers; Edited by Thomas W. Myers Anatomical Pathways: Myofascial Meridians for Manual Therapists and Movement Professionals ELSEVIER. 2021. ISBN: 9788491137252 11. Collado Vázquez, S. Motor Skills: Fundamentals and Applications 1st ed. Madrid: Dykinson, 2004. 2004. ISBN: 8497723325 12. By David X. Cifu, MD Braddom. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation ELSEVIER. 2022. ISBN: 9788413820644 13. Díaz Mancha, Juan Antonio Clinical Diagnosis of the Upper Limb in Manual Therapy Elsevier, 2017. ISBN: 9788491130499 14. Edited by Fernando Marco Martínez Traumatology and Orthopaedics: Upper Limb ELSEVIER. 2022. ISBN: 9788491135012 15. Edited by Tomás Pérez Fernández and Álvaro Parra González Physiotherapy in temporomandibular disorder ELSEVIER. 2019. ISBN: 9788491132837 16. Edited by Walter F. Boron, MD, PhD and Emile L. Boulpaep, MD Boron and Boulpaep. Handbook of Medical Physiology ELSEVIER. 2022. ISBN: 9788413821313 17. Gallego Izquierdo, Tomás Theoretical Bases and Fundamentals of Physiotherapy Madrid: Panamericana, 2007. 2007. ISBN: 9788479039769 18. Jesús A. Fernández-Tresguerres Human Physiology 4th ed. McGraw-Hill. 2010. ISBN: 9786071503497 19. Klaus Buckup Clinical Tests for Bone, Joint and Muscle Disorders (6th ed.): Examinations, Signs and Symptoms Elsevier. 2019. ISBN: 8491134883 20. López Román, Antonio Fundamentals of General Physiotherapy Bellisco. 2009. ISBN: 9788495277022 21. Tixa, Serge Atlas of Osteopathic Joint Manipulation Techniques, Vol. 3, Spine and Barcelona: Masson, 2008. 2008. ISBN: 9788445817988 Supplementary: 22.- Michelle H. Cameron, Physical Agents in Rehabilitation: From Research to Practice Elsevier. 2013. ISBN: 9788490224373 23. Philippe Souchard Global Postural Re-education: RPG. The Method ELSEVIER. 2012. ISBN: 9788445821404 24. Andry Vleeming, PhD, PT Movement, Stability and Lumbopelvic Pain: Integrating Research with Treatment ELSEVIER. 2008. ISBN: 9788445819128 25. By Fernando López-Ríos Fernández Madrid. Museum of Medicine ELSEVIER. 2011. ISBN: 9788480866811 26. Calenti, Millán Gerontology and Geriatrics. Assessment and Intervention Panamericana. 2010. ISBN: 978-84-9835-2 27. Carolina Walker Chao Physiotherapy in Obstetrics and Urogynaecology Studentconsult in Spanish ELSEVIER. 2013. ISBN: 9788445821022 28. Francisco Javier Cudeiro Mazaira Functional rehabilitation in Parkinson’s disease ELSEVIER. 2014. ISBN: 9788490225318 29. Iñaki Pastor Pons Manual therapy for the oculomotor system: Advanced techniques for headaches and balance disorders ELSEVIER. 2012. ISBN: 9788445821183 30. Jari Juhani Ylinen, PhD Therapeutic Stretching in Sport and Manual Therapies ELSEVIER. 2009. ISBN: 9788445819500 31. Jerome E. Bickenbach Basic ICF Sets Elsevier. 2014. ISBN: 9788490225271 32. José Castillo Sánchez and Isabel Jiménez Martín Functional rehabilitation following a stroke online access ELSEVIER. 2014. ISBN: 9788490225929 33.- Juan A. Díaz Mancha Manual Assessment ELSEVIER. 2014. ISBN: 9788490225912 34. Julián Maya Martín and Manuel Albornoz Cabello Transcutaneous and Neuromuscular Electrical Stimulation ELSEVIER. 2010. ISBN: 9788480866460 35. Lesmes, Daza Clinical and functional assessment of human body movement Panamericana. 2007. ISBN: 958-9181-61-4 36. López Román, A Learning physiotherapy concepts through reasoning Bellisco. 2007. ISBN: 978-84-96486- 37. Maria Stokes Physiotherapy in neurological rehabilitation Elsevier. 2013. ISBN: 9788490223062 38.- José López Chicharro Physical Activity for Osteoporosis ELSEVIER. 2014. ISBN: 9788490225325 39. Porter, Stuart Dictionary of Physiotherapy Barcelona: Elsevier, 2007. 2007. ISBN: 9788481749922 40. Segovia, Juan Carlos Manual of Functional Assessment Elsevier. 2008. ISBN: 9788480862349 41. Sian Knight and Sona Biswas, BSc (Hons) Essentials of the Musculoskeletal System and Skin ELSEVIER. 2004. ISBN: 9788481747348 42. White, N. Goniometry (assessment of joint mobility) Marban. 2006. ISBN: 9788471014801 43.- Zambudio, R. Prostheses, Orthoses and Assistive Devices ELSEVIER. 2009. ISBN: 9788445821954 Others: 44. Macias Merlo, M. Lourdes Paediatric Physiotherapy 2nd ed. Madrid [etc.]: McGraw-Hill Interamericana, 2002. 2002. ISBN: 8448604679 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 35 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
FIRST FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0130517 | Applied Computer Science | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Applied Computer ScienceCódigo: 0130517 Imprimir Course 1: First-term module. Foundation course. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives To build a foundation of knowledge and skills based on the optimal use of resources and IT tools designed for academic, educational and professional purposes. • To foster information and knowledge management skills. • To provide a useful foundation for management and learning based on independent research using IT tools. • Ability to apply general knowledge of office automation and new information technologies in current practice and in future professional contexts. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been established. Competencies The main competences related to the subjects in this module that students will acquire upon completion are as follows: C.E.29. To understand and apply techniques for editing, layout, sharing and distribution of digital content, as well as the use of this content in a range of professional settings. C.E.30. Be able to work within a professional digital information processing environment that covers the most commonly required processing tasks in day-to-day use. C.E.31. Create presentations that enable the defence of ideas and projects. C.E.32. Create digital content that integrates various types of media. Learning outcomes The elements that may be used to assess competences in terms of learning outcomes will include, amongst others, the following: - Demonstrate sufficient knowledge of the various content modules covered by answering theoretical questions. Carry out practical assignments applying the concepts developed in class. - Apply what is covered in class at a theoretical level to real-life situations through practical scenarios. - Independently explore any topic through research and personal study. - Making appropriate use of ICT. - Produce reports with a professional layout that integrate content from different media. - Reports analysing information and data that enable the defence of an idea or project. Course content Information systems, data analysis and retrieval, etc. Document management. Document layout using software and the creation of templates and styles. Introduction to, handling, organisation and filtering of data. Types of charts, options and features of data charts. Creation and configuration of a complete presentation. Integration and manipulation of digital images. Training activities The training activities to be carried out to ensure that students acquire the intended competences during this module and are able to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: • Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). • Seminars, workshops, etc. (60 hours). • Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work, both individually and in groups, etc. (78 hours). • Oral, written and practical assessments (5 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- Continuous assessment The following actions or activities will be carried out to assess students on a continuous basis: • Final knowledge assessments (60%) • Practical activities (20%) • Portfolio (20%) Bearing in mind that attendance of over 70% is required and that the course syllabus is divided into 4–5 blocks or modules with the following percentage breakdown: Artificial Intelligence (10%), Spreadsheets with Excel (45%), Word Processing with Word (40%) and Presentations (5%). Regular examination The final exam in the ordinary examination period will consist of a theoretical and practical test with the following breakdown: theoretical section: 60 per cent and practical section: 40 per cent; it is essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in the practical section. Supplementary Examination In the supplementary examination session, students must be examined on the entire syllabus of the module. The final exam for the supplementary sitting will consist of a theoretical and practical test with the following weighting: theoretical part: 60 per cent and practical part: 40 per cent; it is essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in the practical part. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0130521 | Human Anatomy | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Human AnatomyCódigo: 0130521 Imprimir Course 1: First-term module. Foundation course. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The objectives of the Anatomy module are as follows: To understand the general elements that make up the macroscopic and microscopic anatomy of the human body. To understand the factors that influence human growth and development throughout the lifespan. To understand the general principles and theories of biology, physics and chemistry as they apply to human biology. To establish the general theoretical foundations of human morphology and its implications for other subjects within the degree programme. (These objectives are fundamental for future learning in subjects such as exercise physiology, sports training, sports nutrition and the assessment of physical and sporting performance.) Description of the course content The module will be delivered through the following learning activities, designed to enable students to acquire the required competences and achieve the intended learning outcomes: - Lectures: These will be delivered in person or online, covering concepts related to the fundamentals of human motor function, including biological, mechanical and scientific aspects. -Practical laboratory sessions: Conducted in small groups, with the aim of enabling students to develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making. -Seminars: Face-to-face sessions. -Tutorials: Individual and group tutorials will be offered. -Independent study: This includes self-study, e-learning (interactive via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and the completion of individual and group practical work, amongst other activities. -Assessment tests: Oral, written and practical tests will be held. Learning activities The teaching activities designed to enable students to acquire the intended competences during this module and to achieve the expected learning outcomes will be: - Lectures on concepts relating to the fundamentals of human motor function: biological, mechanical, behavioural, social and scientific. (45 hours) - Individual and group tutorials (7 hours) - Practical sessions in laboratories or sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making. (15 hours) - Seminars, workshops, etc. (7 hours) - Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work, both individually and in groups, etc. (70 hours) - Oral, written and practical assessments (5 hours). Assessment system and criteria Assessment system and criteria General attendance rule: Attendance at classes is compulsory. Unexcused absences exceeding 30 per cent per term will result in exclusion from continuous assessment. In this case, the examination held during the officially designated period will be the sole criterion for assessment. CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: To be eligible for continuous assessment, students must meet the attendance requirement. It will be assessed as follows: Final assessments (60% of the final mark): Tests will be held throughout the course (multiple-choice, short-answer questions, essay questions and/or oral examinations) to assess theoretical concepts. The type of examination will be specified prior to the examination session. Incorrect answers in multiple-choice tests will be marked down by a factor of 1/3. To pass these assessments, students must answer 50 per cent of the exam questions correctly, achieving a mark of 5.0. During the term, there will be a compulsory assessment to pass the module. To pass the module, students must achieve a mark of 6 or above. Practical activities (30% of the final mark). Portfolio: (10%) of the final mark. Attendance at practical classes is compulsory. More than 30 per cent of absences per term without valid reason will result in a fail for this part of the module. The lecturer will assess the practical component on a continuous basis, taking into account attendance, student participation, assessments and the submission of assigned work. This will account for 50 per cent of the final practical mark. At the end of each term, there will be an assessment of the practical content (multiple-choice, short-answer questions, essay questions and/or oral examinations), which will account for the remaining 50 per cent of the overall practical mark. Students must achieve a pass mark of 50% to be considered to have passed the practical component (grade of 5). If, at the end of the term, the practical course mark is below 5, the student must sit an examination covering the entire practical course content for that term during the February examination period. If the practical component is not passed, regardless of whether the theory has been passed or not, the published mark will be ‘NP’. NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: The final mark will consist of 60 per cent of the theory mark and 40 per cent of the practicals mark. Students must meet all assessment criteria and achieve an overall mark of over 5 in each part of the module to be considered to have passed. If any part of the module is not passed, these percentages will not apply, and the mark recorded will be the lowest mark obtained. Continuous assessment may contribute a maximum of 1 additional mark. Addendum Upon completing the Anatomy module, students will have acquired the following competences, which are essential to their degree programme: General Competencies of the Degree Programme (Related to the module): C.G.3. To know and understand the physiological and biomechanical factors that influence the practice of physical activity and sport. C.G.5. To know and understand the effects of physical exercise on the structure and function of the human body. G.C.2. Acquire basic scientific knowledge applied to physical activity and sport in their various forms. Module-Specific Competencies: S.C.15. To know and understand the different anatomical parts and the physiological responses and adaptations that the body undergoes when subjected to sessions of acute physical exercise and periods of chronic training. C.E.16. To study cardiovascular, respiratory, haematological, endocrine and neuromuscular responses and adaptations. SC.17. To study the body’s specific responses and adaptations to exercise in relation to gender, degree of biological maturity, environmental conditions and the presence or absence of pathology. C.E.18. To be familiar with and understand the various parameters related to physical performance and the quantification of physical abilities. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0130523 | Systematics and Exercise Kinesiology | OB | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Systematics and Exercise KinesiologyCódigo: 0130523 Imprimir Course 1: First-semester module. Compulsory. 4 credits. Profesores
Aims The aim of this module is to study the fundamentals, characteristics and potential of human movement, to develop an awareness of one’s own abilities, and to learn the ways to improve and refine them through systematic physical exercise or gymnastic exercise. The general objectives of the module are set out below. - To understand the characteristics of structured physical exercise, the criteria for its classification, specific terminology and graphical representation. - To analyse, understand and compare the various historical milestones that have driven the need for the systematisation of physical exercise. - To study the mechanical aspects of body movement, analysing it from the perspectives of the joints and muscles. - To understand the application of exercise with the aim of developing psychophysical qualities. - To develop ingenuity and imagination so that students, using any type of equipment, are able to devise exercises, whilst also understanding the effects they produce. Description of the course content The module consists of two distinct yet complementary parts: The first section covers the study of physical exercise and its characteristics, criteria for its classification, specific terminology and graphical representation. The second section focuses on understanding the mechanical aspects of movement, analysing it from the perspectives of the joints and muscles. The third section explains the fundamentals of physical exercise in relation to physical fitness, so that the student can identify exercises to develop the four basic physical abilities, recognising the effects of proper training during a session, including carrying out the correct warm-up and cool-down. To summarise, we will outline the content covered throughout the course: BLOCK I: SYSTEMATICS OF PHYSICAL EXERCISE - - - - TOPIC 1: DRAWING EXERCISES. Definitions and approaches to drawing. Starting . Planes and axes. Terms of orientation. Joint movements. Drawing the human figure. TOPIC 2: DESCRIPTION AND REPRESENTATION OF MOVEMENT IN CONTENT BLOCKS. Structure of the warm-up in the session. Analysis of the content. Exercise terminology. Concise notes by objective. Practical workshop on stretching exercises focused on the transcription of the exercise. TOPIC 3: INTRODUCTION TO THE SYSTEMATICS OF EXERCISE. Clarification of concepts. . Gymnastic exercise. Concept and characteristics. Structural aspects of physical exercise. Intent, location and intensity. Classification of gymnastic exercise. TOPIC 4: HISTORICAL EVOLUTION OF PHYSICAL ACTIVITY, PHYSICAL EXERCISE AND GYMNASTICS. Physical exercise in Prehistory, pre-Hellenic civilisations, the Middle Ages and the Renaissance. The era . BLOCK 2: MECHANICAL ANALYSIS OF EXERCISE - - TOPIC 5: MECHANICAL ANALYSIS OF EXERCISE. Joint complexes of the shoulder, elbow, spine, hip, knee and ankle. TOPIC 6: ANALYSIS OF POSITIONS AND MOVEMENTS. Joint and muscular perspectives. Types of contraction, phases of movement, motor muscles. Analysis of basic exercises for muscle toning. BLOCK 3: FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS OF EXERCISE. - - Topic 7: Functional and Structural Analysis of the Warm-up and Cool-down. Topic 8: Physical Qualities. Effects on the body. Strength, Endurance, Speed, Flexibility. Coordination, balance and agility. Training Activities The training activities designed to enable students to acquire the intended competences during this module and to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: - Lectures on concepts relating to the fundamentals of human motor function: biological, mechanical, behavioural, social and scientific (15 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). - Practical classes in laboratories or sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making (30 hours). - Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work carried out both individually and in groups, etc. (53 hours). - Oral, written and practical assessment tests (5 hours). Assessment system and criteria The assessment process will be carried out taking into account the various learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities, which will enable us to determine the extent to which each of the competencies listed. Given the nature of the subject, which is eminently practical, and the way it is taught , continuous assessment is the most appropriate method for evaluating the learning process experienced by each student. Physical activities will be set on a daily basis, designed educational in nature and requiring the student’s active participation. ASSESSMENT CRITERIA FOR STUDENTS UNDER CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: ▪ Assessments that follow the learning process and capture the skills the student acquires. ▪ Assessment of reports on various practical case studies set for resolution by applying the knowledge acquired in the various subjects. ▪ Submission of practical assignments and reports on their progress, as well as the student’s performance in the laboratory whilst carrying out the practicals. ▪ Practical examinations covering the full range of practical training activities carried out. ▪ Written examinations covering the full range of learning activities carried out in the classroom. For students on the Continuous Assessment scheme, the weighting of tasks according to the above percentages is as follows: ▪ 50% FINAL KNOWLEDGE ASSESSMENTS: theoretical knowledge tests (C.O). Multiple-choice exam (30–40 questions) covering theoretical and practical content. There is no cut-off exam; it takes place on the official ordinary examination session. Pass mark: 4 marks or above. ▪ 30% PRACTICAL ACTIVITIES: or 20% of the mark: practical test and assessment sheet. Exam taken prior to the ordinary examination period. If a fail, that part can be resat in the ordinary or extraordinary examination session. It is even possible to sit to improve your mark. (5% is for the worksheet (SEQUENCE OF 5 ‘EIGHTS’). It must be handed in before the exam; failure to do so means the practical must be completed on the day of the ordinary examination session). o 10% group stretching routine (5% for the group stretching routine and 5% for the individual stretching worksheet ) ▪ 20% PORTFOLIO: Live performance marks. Submission of exercises set during practical sessions, group presentations , transcription exercises, analyses, Kahoot quizzes completed in theory classes… ▪ Attendance at 70% of theoretical and practical classes. Students who have achieved a pass in continuous assessment but have not passed the theory exam may sit only that exam in the supplementary sitting; the marks relating to the practical component will continue to be recorded as part of their continuous assessment until the supplementary sitting of the same academic year. ASSESSMENT CRITERIA FOR STUDENTS WHO DO NOT OPT FOR CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: Students who choose to opt out of continuous assessment (those who do not attend classes , have more than 3 absences and lose their daily marks), in the ordinary January sitting and/or the extraordinary examination session in July, their mark will be determined by the final theoretical and practical examination for that examination period. 100 per cent of the final mark is based on a theoretical and practical examination, with the following breakdown: It will be essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in the practical section in order to average this with the theoretical part. • Theoretical part: 60% theoretical test • Practical part: 40%, comprising: - - 30% mark: Figure-of-eight sequence (4 figure-of-eights recorded on video, identical to the continuous assessment sequence + 1 individual figure-eight that does not repeat movements from the previous ones and that contains different arm and leg patterns throughout the exercise). The student must take the exam in appropriate attire: comfortable sportswear that allows the movements to be clearly seen, not . 10% of the mark: Transcription of the five ‘oches’ onto a worksheet. The publication and review of marks will be announced on the day of the exam and published under ‘notices’ on the course portal. To avoid any issues regarding potential appeals against practical marks, the exams will be video-recorded; if any student does not wish to be recorded, they must indicate this before the exam and, in the event of a marks appeal, they will have to accept the lecturer’s subjective assessment. In the event of injury, a medical certificate must be submitted to justify non-participation in the practical part of the session. A student who is injured is not exempt from attending classes, except in exceptional cases where express medical advice |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0130606 | Musculoskeletal System | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Musculoskeletal SystemCódigo: 0130606 Imprimir Course 1: First-term module. Foundation course. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives For students to identify anatomical structures as a foundation of knowledge for establishing dynamic relationships with functional organisation Students should be familiar with the components of the musculoskeletal system For students to acquire a general understanding of the morphology and physiology of human movement Students should acquire the relevant skills relating to the musculoskeletal system Prerequisites Not applicable Competencies Not applicable Learning outcomes RK1 To know and understand the morphology, physiology, pathology and behaviour of people, both healthy and unwell, in their natural and social environments RS7 Identify anatomical structures as a basis of knowledge for establishing dynamic relationships with functional organisation Course content 1. Identify and describe the general components of the musculoskeletal system, as well as its vascularisation, innervation and biomechanics. 2. Identify and describe the factors that influence human movement. 3. Identify and describe the general principles and theories of biology, physics and chemistry applicable to the biology of the human body in motion. 4. Identify and describe the general theoretical foundations of the morphology and physiology of human movement and their implications for other subjects within the degree programme 5. Apply research methodology to this area of the structure and function of the human body. 6. Distinguish between the various components of the musculoskeletal system. 7. Distinguish between normal functioning and its possible dysfunctional alternatives. 8. Use physiological tests for the analysis of movement and posture. 9. To apply scientific research methods and evidence-based practice appropriately as part of professional practice. Training activities Expressed in hours of training activities and % of face-to-face teaching. P1. Lectures 30 hours, 100% P2. Interactive classes 15 hours, 100% P3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities 15 hours, 100% P4. – Preparation of assignments or projects and problem-solving 10 hours, 0% P5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, literature reviews. 74 hours, 0% P6. – Tutoring 3 hours, 100% P7. Knowledge assessments 3 hours, 100% Total 150 hours of learning activities Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment criteria will be weighted according to the teaching and learning methodology used and the teaching workload of each component, in accordance with the following criteria. The final mark in the REGULAR EXAMINATION PERIOD will be based on a range of elements corresponding to all the activities carried out by the student, provided that the student has passed both the theory and practical components independently, that is, they have achieved at least 5 out of 10 in each of these parts. Otherwise, the mark will be the lowest mark obtained. Once this condition for assessment has been met, the following criteria will be applied: 1. ASSESSMENT OF THEORETICAL CONCEPTS (75%): The assessment of theoretical concepts will be carried out as follows: 60 per cent of the mark for this section corresponds to the assessment of theoretical concepts, which will take the form of an examination on the date agreed by the Vice-Chancellor’s Office for the ordinary examination session. The questions in this examination will cover material taught both in lectures and in laboratory sessions and assignments. One eliminatory test will be held during the semester. If the mark for this test is 6 or above, that entire section of the syllabus will be excluded from the exam in the ordinary examination period, provided that the specified mark is achieved and attendance exceeds 70 per cent. The remaining 15 per cent corresponds to the online assessments to be held during the term. Overall, the assessment of theoretical concepts accounts for 75% of the course mark 2. ASSESSMENT OF PRACTICAL CONCEPTS (10%): Attendance at practical classes is compulsory. Absences (whether excused or unexcused) exceeding 20% will result in a fail for this part of the course. Practical work will be assessed on a continuous basis by the lecturer, taking into account attendance, student participation and the submission of the workbook set by the lecturer. Where attendance is less than 80%, the assessment of practical work will consist of an oral practical examination before an examination board. The practical mark accounts for 10% of the overall mark for the module 3. SEMINAR ACTIVITIES AND SOLVING CASES AND/OR TESTS SET ON THE COURSE PORTAL OR IN CLASS (15%) The lecturer will set in-class activities to reinforce learning. Part of these activities involves completing the workbook ‘Fundamentals of the Anatomy of the Musculoskeletal System’. Assessment will be based on: completion of the proposed activities, completion of the test for each block, and completion of the additional activities set. In addition to this assessment, this material will be covered in the theory examinations. The mark obtained in this section will account for 15% of the overall mark for the module 4. CLASS ATTENDANCE: - Attendance at lectures and/or seminars, as well as participation in them, may increase a student’s mark by up to one mark, provided that the module has been passed and attendance is over 70 per cent. SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION SESSION Students who have not achieved a mark of 5 out of 10 in the ordinary assessment period must sit the corresponding examination in the extraordinary assessment period, which consists of an exam assessing all the content covered in the lectures, seminars and practical sessions; the mark obtained by the student will be the mark for the exam taken. SE1.—Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. – Final knowledge assessments 50 70 SE3. – Laboratory practical workbook 5 10 SE4. – Portfolio 5 10 Total 60 100 120 Bibliography Core: 1. Drake, Richard L. GRAY. Anatomy for Students Elsevier. 2020. ISBN: 9788491136088 2. López Román, A. Osteology from the Ground Up BDS Librería Editorial. 2011. ISBN: 9788495277138 3. López Román, A. Fundamentals of the Anatomy of the Musculoskeletal System 2nd ed. BDS LIBRERIA EDITORIAL. 2021. ISBN: 9788495277398 4. NETTER, FH. Atlas of Human Anatomy Elsevier Masson. 2023. ISBN: 9788445820650 5. Rouviere Human Anatomy. VOLUME 1 Masson. 2005. ISBN: 2294003918 6. Rouviere, H. DESCRIPTIVE, TOPOGRAPHICAL AND FUNCTIONAL HUMAN ANATOMY, VOLUMES 1, 2 AND 3 Masson. 2005. ISBN: 2294003926 Supplementary: 7. López Román, Antonio Structure and Function of the Human Body 1st ed.. BDS LIBRERIA EDITORIAL. 2011. ISBN: 9788495277107 Others: 8. Prometheus Anatomy Textbook and Atlas Panamericana. 2022. ISBN: 978-84-9835-2 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 22 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
SECOND FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0130518 | Combat sports | OB | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Combat sportsCódigo: 0130518 Imprimir Course 1. Second-term module. Compulsory. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives The objectives of the degree programme are aligned with the competences/learning outcomes set out in the Resolution of 18 September 2018 of the General Secretariat for Universities, publishing the Agreement of the Council of Universities of 17 September 2018, which sets out recommendations for universities’ proposals for verification reports for the official Bachelor’s degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences. In this regard, the following objectives are set out: • To adapt educational provision to the individual characteristics and needs of the entire population, with an emphasis on specific groups such as: schoolchildren, older people (the elderly), people with reduced mobility, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking gender and diversity into account. • To be able to guide, design, implement and evaluate physical exercise and physical fitness at an advanced level, based on scientific evidence, across different settings, contexts and types of activities for the entire population, with an emphasis on specific groups such as: older people (senior citizens), schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking into account gender and diversity. • To design and implement, with fluency, naturalness, awareness and consistency, physical exercise and physical conditioning programmes that are appropriate, efficient, systematic, varied and based on scientific evidence, for the development of processes of adaptation and improvement or rehabilitation of specific abilities in each individual in relation to human movement and its optimisation; with the aim of being able to solve unstructured, increasingly complex and unpredictable problems, with an emphasis on special populations. • To analyse, identify, diagnose, promote, guide and evaluate strategies, measures and activities that encourage adherence to an active lifestyle and the regular, healthy participation in and practice of physical activity, sport and exercise in an appropriate, efficient and safe manner by members of the public, with the aim of improving their overall health, well-being and quality of life, with a focus on specific population groups such as: older people (the elderly), schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking gender and diversity into account. • Be able to promote, advise on, design, implement and evaluate, from a technical and scientific perspective, appropriate and varied programmes of physical activity, exercise and sport, adapted to the needs, requirements and individual and group characteristics of the entire population, with an emphasis on older people (senior citizens), women and diversity, schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor). Description of the course content The content to be covered focuses on understanding and learning the basic aspects of this sport and aims to address the various facets of judo. The topics to be covered are: Topic 1: History of judo 1.1 Origins 1.2 Development 1.3 Evolution 1.4 The present day Topic 2: Fundamentals and skills of judo. 2.1 Fundamentals of standing judo 2.2 Fundamentals of ground judo Topic 3: Judo techniques 3.1 Standing judo techniques 3.2 Ground judo techniques Topic 4: Rules and refereeing. 4.1 Scoring 4.2 Shidos and penalties 4.3 Scoreboard Topic 5: Katas 5.1 History of Katas 5.2 Kodokan Katas 5.3 Nage no kata Learning activities The training activities to be undertaken by students throughout the course will be as follows: - Lectures or masterclasses (15 hours). - Practical classes (facilities, laboratory, etc.) (30 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). - Assessment (6 hours). Assessment system and criteria Continuous assessment This assessment will be divided into three sections. • Final knowledge assessments (50 per cent): - Theoretical examination • Practical activities (30 per cent): -Practical assessment • Portfolio (20%): -Practical placement diary In order to calculate the average mark and obtain a final grade, it is essential to achieve a mark of 5 out of 10 in the final assessments. The module will be deemed passed when the total of all marks, taking into account the above criteria, is 5 or higher. To be eligible for this assessment, students must have attended 70 per cent of all classes. Non-continuous (final) assessment This assessment will be marked on the basis of a theoretical and practical examination, with the following percentage breakdown by section. • Theoretical section (60%) • Practical section (40%) It is essential to achieve a mark of 5 out of 10 in the practical section in order for this to be averaged with the theoretical section. The module will be considered passed when the sum of all marks, taking into account the above considerations, is 5 or higher. Addendum The public health crisis caused by the COVID-19 pandemic has led to the adoption of exceptional safety measures which, whilst aimed at preventing the spread of the virus, have inevitably affected the way in which teachers and students interact in the context of face-to-face teaching. This has had an impact on the standard teaching timetable, which, whilst these measures remain in force, may be subject to change, particularly affecting teaching and assessment methods. In accordance with the provisions approved by the competent authority and in line with the agreements adopted by the governing bodies of the University and its faculties, the following sets out the extent to which teaching activities and the assessment systems and criteria for the module may be affected whilst the exceptional safety measures referred to in the previous paragraph remain in force. Teaching activities All teaching hours for face-to-face teaching activities will be delivered in full; however, the number of hours delivered physically in the classroom will be reduced by 40 per cent. These hours will be delivered synchronously via the virtual classroom. Classes delivered virtually will be recorded. These recordings will remain available on the course’s virtual campus to enrolled students throughout the academic year, so that they can be viewed an unlimited number of times. Should the exceptional circumstances give rise to measures restricting individual movement, the proportion of teaching hours delivered virtually will be increased. If this becomes necessary, provision has been made for 100 per cent of the weekly teaching hours to be delivered virtually. Assessment systems and criteria With regard to individual or group assignments for which a public oral presentation has been planned, such presentations will take place via the University’s virtual learning platform. Exams will be held in person in the physical classrooms designated for this purpose during the period set out in the University’s academic calendar. Only in the event that the authorities adopt mandatory measures restricting individual movement will exams be held remotely. The amendments and provisions set out in this section are provisional and may be subject to change as determined by the academic authorities or where circumstances so require. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
Reading list Essential: 1. Carratalá and Carratalá Physical Education and Extracurricular Sports in Schools: JUDO. Ministry of Education. 2001. ISBN: 2910008051875 2.- Casterlanas and Molina Judo in School Physical Education Editorial Hispano Europea. 2002. ISBN: 978-84-255-14 3. Taira The Essence of Judo Satori Publications. 2014. ISBN: 9788494239052 4. Villamón, M An Introduction to Judo Editorial Hispano Europea. 2013. ISBN: 9788425512964 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0130519 | Body expression and dance | OB | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Body expression and danceCódigo: 0130519 Imprimir Course 1. Second-term module. Compulsory. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives • To learn about the history of physical expression and dance • To master the key aspects of the various dimensions, and to learn the teaching methodology and styles specific to body expression and dance. • To be able to create a story, incorporating elements of dance. Course content • Unit 1. Body Expression as a subject within CAFYD. • Unit 2. Dance: history, concept, key figures and classification. • Unit 3. The expressive dimension. • Unit 4. The communicative dimension. • Unit 5. The creative dimension. • Unit 6. Methodology and teaching styles in Body Expression and dance. Training activities The training activities designed to enable students to acquire the intended competences during this module and to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: - Lectures on concepts relating to the fundamentals of human motor skills: biological, mechanical, behavioural, social and scientific (15 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). - Practical classes in laboratories or sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making (30 hours). - Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work carried out both individually and in groups, etc. (53 hours). - Oral, written and practical assessment tests (5 hours). Assessment system and criteria Continuous assessment The necessary requirements are set out below: • A minimum attendance rate of 70 per cent of all practical and theoretical sessions is compulsory. • An excused absence does not count as attendance. • Students must achieve a mark of at least 5 in each part of the module. • Students may not enter the classroom more than 15 minutes after the start of the session. Doing so will be treated as an absence. Below is a summary table showing the assessment activities corresponding to each specific learning outcome, the assessment methods to be used, and the percentage of the overall mark allocated to each activity: • Final knowledge assessments (50%). • Practical activities (30%). • Portfolio (20%). Non-continuous assessment The alternative to continuous assessment is the final assessment. Students must achieve a mark of at least 5 in each part of the module. The following table summarises the assessment components: • Final knowledge assessments (60%). • Practical activities (40%). |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0130520 | Outdoor physical activities | OB | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Outdoor physical activitiesCódigo: 0130520 Imprimir Course 1. Second-term module. Compulsory. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives The aim of this module is to equip students of Physical Activity and Sport Sciences with the knowledge and skills required to programme, analyse, design, plan, deliver and evaluate outdoor activities from a professional perspective. Graduates in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences must be able to tackle professional challenges in a comprehensive manner within the sporting and recreational sectors, contributing to their working environment the necessary tools, resources and knowledge required to develop physical education and sports programmes, as well as specific programmes for physical and technical training in various sporting disciplines; and, in the case of mountain and outdoor activities, to act as a guide for individuals and groups on mountain trails and in mountain environments. The general objectives set for this course are as follows: - To analyse the opportunities offered by the natural environment for physical and sporting activities and for professional development. - To foster cooperation amongst students and to assess the educational and social aspects involved in these activities. - To understand and design outdoor activities that have a low environmental impact, thereby contributing to the conservation and improvement of the environment. - To respect the environment and value it as a resource-rich setting for sporting and recreational activities. As for the specific objectives of the module, we highlight the following: 1. To plan and evaluate sports education activities in natural and mountain environments. 2. To coach and oversee the physical preparation of athletes at basic, intermediate and advanced levels in those mountain sports disciplines in which the student has specific technical training and specialisation. 3. To manage and coordinate leisure and sports tourism programmes, provided they take place in contact with nature or in the natural environment. 4. To act as a guide for individuals and groups along trails and through natural areas, where the level of risk is low and controlled. Prerequisites We are all aware of the changes taking place in our society, with new fields of activity being explored. This is primarily due to our new outlook on life, one that continues to take root as time goes on. Alfonso X el Sabio University has successfully embraced this evolution and incorporated it into its Physical Activity and Sport Sciences curriculum. We are, of course, referring to the concepts of sport, recreation and health. Physical and Sporting Activity in the Natural Environment (AFDMN) provides the perfect framework for delivering a more comprehensive education to our students; it is a fundamental resource in teaching processes and, increasingly, a growing career option. The day-to-day running of this module is no different from the standard procedures for other modules within the curriculum of the Faculty of Physical Activity and Sport Sciences, therefore the requirements for undertaking and completing the course content are the same as those required for the rest of the degree programme. Activities in the Natural Environment also require a degree of adaptability to changing circumstances (weather, transport, etc.) and situations that may be unfamiliar to some students, such as spending the night outdoors, travelling through woodland and scrubland, along footpaths and in mountainous areas; as well as the use of technical equipment that is often new to them and which will be essential for the smooth running of the course and for making the most of the teaching content. As with any physical activity, it is advisable to maintain a level of physical fitness appropriate to the characteristics described, enabling students to undertake the practical component in the great outdoors without any difficulty. Given the specific nature of the basic technical equipment used in the Activities and Sports related to the Natural Environment and in this course, Alfonso X University provides much of the necessary shared equipment, as well as all the support staff required for these practical sessions. Similarly, each student will provide the individual technical and specific equipment necessary to ensure complete safety during their training (clothing, footwear, rucksack, torch, overnight kit, etc.). Competencies 1) C.E.48. To understand and analyse the different forms of motor skills, as well as their application to the physical and sporting context. 2) C.E.49. To gain as many motor experiences as possible, relating to motor skills and patterns. 3) C.E.50. Understand the fundamentals of physical fitness, physical abilities and their development, with a focus on both the health sector and the school setting. 4) C.E.51. To understand and apply the theoretical and practical foundations of aerobics as a music-supported fitness discipline, with a view to its potential use as a tool and method of work in the fields of education or health. 5) C.E.52. To understand the theoretical foundations of play, its application in educational and recreational settings, and its potential use as a resource for the development of physical fitness in general. 6) C.E.53. To experience, understand and develop bodily expression, using the body as a means of expression and communication with others. Learning outcomes The elements that can be used to assess competences in in terms of learning outcomes will include, amongst others, the following: - Demonstrating sufficient knowledge of the various content blocks content covered by answering theoretical questions. - Carrying out assignments that apply the concepts covered in class. Applying, through practical scenarios, what is is covered in class at a theoretical level. - Reproduce the technical models developed in class, with a execution. - Design learning situations based on the context and the characteristics of the target group. In this module, particular emphasis will be placed on the process of continuous assessment, in which we expect the student to take the lead, and for their work, attitude and participation to be the investment that yields the expected and satisfactory results. The extensive practical content and the high number of hours devoted to hands-on experience and the experiential development of the subject matter will require a commitment from both students and teaching staff, which must result in the achievement of the set objectives in an active and meaningful way, in a manner that is enduring and useful for the subsequent professional development of our students. The assessment of these processes is described in percentage and numerical terms in the previous sections, but the educational value of the teaching-learning process will be reflected in each of the steps or procedures we undertake within each content block or teaching unit. Description of the content The content is organised into nine topics, following a plan and a temporal and spatial sequence which we shall endeavour to adhere to at all times. It may be necessary to make some adjustments to accommodate the dates of practical placements scheduled outside the University. Such dates or changes will always be notified well in advance. Topic 1. – New spaces and sporting activities. Hiking Topic 2. – Mountain orienteering and the sport of orienteering Topic 3. – Risk management in mountain activities Topic 4. – Climbing and abseiling. Essential equipment Topic 5. – Designing Activities in the Natural Environment Topic 6. – Landscape interpretation Topic 7. – Games and Challenge and Adventure Activities Topic 8. – Clothing, footwear and equipment Topic 9. - First Aid in the Mountains The content will be adapted to suit the group’s needs and the progression of the teaching and learning process. Training activities The training activities designed to enable students to acquire the intended competences during this module and to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: 1) Lectures on concepts relating to the fundamentals of human motor skills: sports, games, dance, physical expression, etc. (15 hours). 2) Practical sessions in laboratories or sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making (30 hours). 3) Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). 4) Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work carried out both individually and in groups, etc. (53 hours). 5) Oral, written and practical assessments (5 hours). Details of the training activities: The teaching activities and pedagogical methods will be varied, aiming to adapt as closely as possible to the characteristics of the students and the group; they will foster the ability to learn independently and to work in teams, whilst promoting creativity and dynamism. We will encourage an active methodology that involves all students, reinforcing meaningful learning. Working groups will be established to improve organisation and to differentiate the role of each student. Personalised attention and group cohesion should foster a positive atmosphere in the classroom and throughout the programme. To facilitate following the classroom presentations, where possible, the theoretical content will be covered using an outline from a bibliographic source accessible to all and provided in the supporting documentation; however, it is recommended that students prepare and study their own notes. Should any student be unable to undertake a practical component of the module due to any issue, they are expected to contact the lecturer as soon as possible and provide a valid reason. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities requiring the student’s physical presence will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. Assessment is regarded as a tool for monitoring the educational process, affecting students, lecturers and the teaching-learning process alike. Students may opt for the Continuous Assessment system, which is structured in three blocks, in line with the general organisation of the degree programme, allowing the module to be studied progressively. This approach combines theoretical study with the monitoring of practical work and individual assignments. The final mark will be allocated according to the following percentages: 1. Final knowledge assessments (50%) A written examination will be held at the end of the teaching period to assess the theoretical foundations required for the analysis and development of physical activities in the natural environment. A minimum mark of 5 out of 10 must be obtained in order for this to be included in the overall average with the other sections. • Final theory exam on the core content of the module. 2. Practical activities (30%) This section covers the practical evidence of students’ learning. Active participation in face-to-face practical sessions in a natural environment (Sierra de Guadarrama), with continuous assessment through individual and group practical exercises related to the content covered. On the final day of activities, a practical test will be held in which students must demonstrate mastery of techniques such as navigation (map, compass, GPS), climbing, rope progression, first aid, group guiding, knots and appropriate clothing. Attendance at the face-to-face practical sessions is compulsory. Only absences justified on duly documented medical grounds will be accepted. In such cases, the lecturer may require students to complete a substitute assignment. 3. Portfolio (20%) The portfolio will showcase the student’s independent work and their use of ICT in relation to the course. Creativity, originality and the ability to apply the course content in a digital format will be assessed. • Group production of an audiovisual project (video or other digital format) related to physical activities in the natural environment. • The project must include a technical specification listing the authors, content, tools used, music, design and bibliography. • The deadline for submission is before the final exam. Attendance requirement: Failure to attend more than 30% of the teaching activities requiring physical presence will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment. In this case, the student must opt for non-continuous assessment. Non-continuous (final) assessment Students who do not undertake continuous assessment must sit a final theoretical and practical examination, which will account for 100 per cent of the mark. This examination will take place during the official examination period set by the University. • Theoretical section (60%): Written assessment of the course’s theoretical content. • Practical component (40%): Demonstration of the practical skills acquired. It is essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in the practical component in order for it to be averaged with the theoretical component. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0130522 | Human Physiology | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Human PhysiologyCódigo: 0130522 Imprimir Course 1. Second-term module. Foundation course. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The objectives of the Physiology module are as follows: To understand the general elements that constitute human physiological functions, at both the cellular and systemic levels. To analyse the factors that influence human physiological responses and adaptations throughout the lifespan. To understand the general principles and theories of biology, physics and chemistry as they apply to the functioning of the human body. To establish the general theoretical foundations of physiological processes and their relevance to other subjects within the degree programme. These objectives are fundamental to laying the foundations for future learning in subjects related to exercise physiology, sports training, sports nutrition and the assessment of physical and sporting performance. Learning activities The module will be delivered through the following teaching activities, which aim to enable students to acquire the required competences and achieve the expected learning outcomes: - Lectures (45 hours): Lectures (face-to-face or online) will be delivered to address concepts related to the fundamentals of human motor function: biological, mechanical and scientific. These lectures will cover the physiological responses and adaptations the body undergoes in response to acute physical exercise and chronic training. Cardiovascular, respiratory, haematological, endocrine and neuromuscular responses and adaptations will be studied. The body’s specific responses and adaptations to exercise will also be analysed in relation to gender, level of biological maturity, environmental conditions and the presence or absence of medical conditions. The various parameters related to physical performance and the quantification of physical abilities will be addressed. -Seminars (7 hours): Face-to-face seminars will be held to explore the theoretical and practical content in greater depth. -Laboratory sessions (15 hours): Practical laboratory sessions will be held in small groups, enabling students to develop autonomy in problem-solving and decision-making. Students will undertake assignments applying the concepts covered in class and will apply theory to real-life situations through practical case studies. -Independent study (70 hours): This includes independent study, interactive e-learning on the virtual campus, literature reviews, report writing, and individual and group practical work. Students will be encouraged to explore any topic independently through research and personal work, as well as the appropriate use of ICT. - Various types of assessment (5 hours). Assessment system and criteria General attendance rule: Attendance at classes is compulsory. Unexcused absences exceeding 30 per cent per term will result in exclusion from continuous assessment. In this case, the examination held during the officially designated period will be the sole criterion for assessment. CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: To be eligible for continuous assessment, students must meet the attendance requirement. It will be assessed as follows: Final assessments (60% of the final mark): Tests will be held throughout the course (multiple-choice, short-answer questions, essay questions and/or oral examinations) to assess theoretical concepts. The type of examination will be specified prior to the examination session. Incorrect answers in multiple-choice tests will be marked down by a factor of 1/3. To pass these assessments, students must answer 50 per cent of the exam questions correctly, achieving a mark of 5.0. Two eliminatory assessments will be held during the term. To pass the module, students must achieve a mark of 6 or above. Practical activities (30% of the final mark). Portfolio: (10%) of the final mark. Attendance at practical classes is compulsory. More than 30 per cent of unexcused absences per term will result in a fail for this part of the module. The lecturer will assess the practical component on a continuous basis, taking into account attendance, student participation, assessments and the submission of assigned work. This will account for 50 per cent of the final practical mark. At the end of each term, there will be an assessment of the practical content (multiple-choice, short-answer questions, essay questions and/or oral examinations), which will account for the remaining 50 per cent of the overall practical mark. Students must achieve a pass mark of 50% to be considered to have passed the practical component (grade of 5). If, at the end of the term, the practical course mark is below 5, the student must sit an examination covering the entire practical course material for that term during the February examination period. If the practicals are not passed, regardless of whether the theory has been passed or not, the published mark will be ‘NP’. FINAL GRADE (GENERAL CRITERIA): The final mark will consist of 60 per cent of the theory mark and 40 per cent of the practicals mark. Students must meet all assessment criteria and achieve an overall mark of more than 5 in each part of the module to be considered to have passed. If any part of the module is not passed, these percentages will not apply, and the mark recorded will be the lowest mark obtained. Continuous assessment may contribute a maximum of 1 additional mark. Addendum Upon completion of the Human Physiology module, students will have acquired the following competences: To know and understand the physiological responses and adaptations that the body undergoes when subjected to sessions of acute physical exercise and periods of chronic training. To study the cardiovascular, respiratory, haematological, endocrine and neuromuscular responses and adaptations. To study the body’s specific responses and adaptations to exercise in relation to gender, degree of biological maturity, environmental conditions and the presence or absence of pathology. To understand the various parameters related to physical performance and the quantification of physical abilities. To recognise and understand the physiological and biomechanical factors that influence the practice of physical activity and sport. To understand the effects of physical exercise on the structure and function of the human body. To acquire basic scientific knowledge applied to physical activity and sport in their various forms. Bibliography Core: 1. Guyton Compendium of Medical Physiology Elsevier. 2021. ISBN: 9788491139546 2. Patton Anatomy and Physiology 11th ed. Elsevier. 2023. ISBN: 9788413825427 3. Prometheus Anatomy Textbook and Atlas Panamericana. 2022. ISBN: 978-84-9835-2 4. Tortora Derrickson Principles of Anatomy and Physiology Panamericana. 2021. ISBN: 9788411060264 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0130604 | Applied Biophysics | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Applied BiophysicsCódigo: 0130604 Imprimir Course 1. Second-term module. Foundation course. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives 1. For students to achieve the learning outcomes specific to the module. 2. To understand the properties of electricity and magnetism, with a view to their application in various therapies. 3. To explore in depth the characteristics of the atom and radiation, in order to understand their usefulness as a form of therapy. 4. To understand the physical principles of biomechanics and its application to the human body, as well as its implications for the relevant therapies. 5. To acquire a sound understanding of the physiological basis of vision and hearing, as well as the physical laws that explain the properties of light and sound waves, for application in various physiotherapy treatments. Prerequisites Not applicable Competencies Not applicable Learning outcomes RK1 To know and understand the morphology, physiology, pathology and behaviour of people, both healthy and unwell, in their natural and social environments RK2 To know and understand the sciences, models, techniques and instruments on which physiotherapy is based, structured and developed RK4 To be familiar with the principles and theories of physical agents and their applications in physiotherapy RK5 To understand the principles of biomechanics and electrophysiology, and their main applications in the field of physiotherapy RC7 Be able to work within professional teams as the basic unit through which professionals and other staff in healthcare organisations are organised in a mono-, multi- or interdisciplinary manner RC11 Understand the importance of keeping up to date with the knowledge, skills, abilities and attitudes that make up the professional competencies of a physiotherapist RC12 Communicate effectively and clearly, both orally and in writing, with users of the healthcare system as well as with other professionals Description of the content 1. Identify and describe the general components of the musculoskeletal system, as well as its blood supply, nerve supply and biomechanics. 2. Identify and describe the factors that influence human movement. 3. Identify and describe the general principles and theories of biology, physics and chemistry applicable to the biology of the human body in motion. 4. Identify and describe the general theoretical foundations of the morphology and physiology of human movement and their relevance to other subjects within the degree programme. 5. Apply research methodology to this area of the structure and function of the human body. 6. Distinguish between the various components of the musculoskeletal system. 7. Distinguish between normal functioning and its possible dysfunctional alternatives. 8. Use physiological tests for the analysis of movement and static posture. 9. To make appropriate use of scientific research methods and evidence-based practice as part of professional culture. Training activities Expressed in hours of training activities and % of face-to-face teaching P1. Lectures 30 hours, 100% P2. Interactive classes 15 hours, 100% P3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities 15 hours, 100% P4. – Preparation of assignments or projects and problem-solving 10 hours, 0% P5. Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews 74 hours, 0% P6. – Tutorials 3 hours, 100% P7. Knowledge assessments 3 hours, 100% Total: 150 hours of learning activities Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the corresponding weighting as specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment of this module will take into account the following components and their corresponding marks: • Final exam on concepts covered in ‘lecture sessions’, 70% • Assessment of ‘practical’ concepts, 15% • Multiple-choice tests on the content of the lectures (self-assessments), 5% • Activities in seminar sessions, 10%: (quiz, 5%; oral presentations and/or project presentations, 5%) The final mark for the module will be calculated by adding together the weighted percentages, with a score of 5 out of a possible 10 points being considered a pass, provided that at least the ‘practical’ component and the ‘lecture sessions’ component are both passed independently. Should any of these components fail, the mark will be that of the failed component (no averages will be calculated across the components). PRACTICAL SECTION: Attendance at practical laboratory sessions is COMPULSORY. Failure to attend any of the practical sessions will result in a ‘NOT PRESENTED’ mark in the ordinary assessment period, regardless of the marks achieved in the other assessed components of the module. Assessment of ‘practical’ concepts will take place via an exam at the end of the practical sessions. Completion of the Practical Workbook during the practical sessions will be assessed. Furthermore, the ‘portfolio’ will consist of the LB assignments uploaded to the virtual campus for each session; these will be marked on a scale of 5 to 10, with a minimum of 5 points required to pass. THEORETICAL PART: The assessment of ‘lecture sessions’ will take the form of an exam at the end of the term. This exam, held during the main examination period, will consist of multiple-choice questions covering theoretical aspects and/or problems. One assessment test will be held during the term. If a mark of 5 or above is achieved in this test, the content covered in that section will not need to be studied for the final exam; consequently, these students will only be required to sit the final exam on the material taught from the time of the assessment until the end of the term. If the student does not pass the module, they must sit the final exam covering all the content taught during the term. In those parts of the course involving oral presentations or the submission of assignments, the following aspects will be assessed (provided the work is submitted on time): • Explanation of concepts. • References consulted. • Quality and presentation methods. • Adherence to the time limit and/or length of the written assignment. • Compliance with the specific requirements for the assignment or presentation: original content, participation of group members, etc. In the EXTRAORDINARY EXAMINATION SESSION, students must also have passed both the practical and theoretical components. As in the Ordinary Examination Session, the relevant weightings will apply in the Extraordinary Examination Session provided that a mark of 5 out of 10 or higher has been achieved in both parts. SE1.— Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. – Final knowledge assessments 50 50 70 SE3. – Laboratory practicals workbook 5 10 SE4. – Portfolio 5 10 Total 60 100 120 Bibliography Primary: 1. López Román, A.; Carrillo Espartero, A.; Velasco Fernández, A.I. Fundamentals of Biophysics Applied to the Human Body BDS Publishing House, 2017. 2017. ISBN: 9788495277657 Supplementary: 2.- Aurengo, André Biophysics Madrid: McGraw-Hill-Interamericana, 2008. 2008. ISBN: 9788448163921 3.- Casado Marquez, M General Physics Marcombo, 2020. 2020. ISBN: 9788426728180 4. Kane, Joseph W. Physics / Joseph W. Kane, Morton M. Sternheim 2nd ed. Barcelona: Reverté, 2000. 2000. ISBN: 8429143181 5. López Román, Antonio Biophysics Applied to the Biomechanics of the Human Body 2nd ed. Madrid: Bellisco, Ediciones Técnicas y Científicas, 2007. 2007. ISBN: 9788496486546 6. Mirabent, D. J. Physics for the Life Sciences McGraw Hill, 2008. 2008. ISBN: 9788448168032 7. Ohanian, Hans C. Physics for Engineering and Science Mexico: McGraw Hill Interamericana, 2009. 2009. ISBN: 9701067444 8. Pedraza Physics Applied to the Health Sciences Barcelona [etc.]: Masson, 2000. 2000. ISBN: 8445808915 9. Pifarré San Agustín, F Physics and Clinical Biomechanics for Physiotherapists and Podiatrists University of Lleida Press, 2021. 2021. ISBN: 9788491442738 10. Planella, J., Marcos, D., Bonastre, J. Physics for Physiotherapists Bradu, 2020. 2020. ISBN: 9788418005251 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0130605 | Psychology | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PsychologyCódigo: 0130605 Imprimir Course 1. Second-term module. Foundation course. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives To gain an understanding of the basic psychological processes and the theoretical foundations of psychology as a science, and to recognise the contributions it can make both in terms of its scientific methodology and in clinical practice, as well as the theories and findings relating to our understanding of human beings. To understand the different areas of psychology and the professional contribution it makes to models of care for patients and service users within the healthcare system To be familiar with the main tools and intervention techniques used in psychology. To acquire knowledge of developmental psychology To understand the defining characteristics of the main psychopathological disorders. To recognise the psychological impact on and management of the emotional state of patients/service users. To know how to care for a patient or service user with empathy, how to manage potential hostile reactions, and how to provide them with emotional support and all the information they require. To integrate scientific research into daily practice, thereby helping to improve treatments. To identify the psychological problems arising from gender-based violence, in order to equip professionals with the skills for prevention, early detection, support and rehabilitation of victims of this form of violence. Prerequisites Not applicable Competencies Not applicable Learning outcomes RK1 To know and understand the morphology, physiology, pathology and behaviour of people, both healthy and unwell, in their natural and social environments RK7 To understand the learning theories applicable to health education and to the process of lifelong learning itself RK8 To understand the psychological aspects of the physiotherapist–patient relationship RK11 To recognise and identify the psychological and physical problems arising from gender-based violence, in order to equip students with the skills to prevent, detect at an early stage, provide care for and rehabilitate victims of this form of violence RS5 Identify the psychological and social factors that influence the health and illness of individuals, families and the community RC1 To acquire the appropriate clinical experience that provides intellectual abilities and technical and manual skills; that facilitates the incorporation of ethical and professional values; and that develops the ability to integrate the knowledge acquired; so that, upon completion of their studies, students are able to apply this knowledge both to specific clinical cases in hospital and non-hospital settings, and to interventions in primary and community care RC13 To encourage the participation of the patient and their family in the recovery process RC15 Be able to assess the functional status of the patient/user from a physiotherapy perspective, taking into account their physical, psychological and social aspects. RC16 Encourage the participation of the patient and their family in their recovery process RODS Develops effective communication, teamwork, analytical thinking, creativity and ethical leadership from a cross-disciplinary perspective, clearly inspired by democratic principles and values, as well as the Sustainable Development Goals, in order to conduct oneself with integrity in the professional sphere Description of the content 1. Understand the characteristics of the physiotherapist–patient relationship 2. Identify and describe the biopsychosocial model of health 3. To assess and describe the different relationships that can be established with patients and their families 4. Describe the theoretical principles of learning styles and their application in healthcare 5. Apply various psychological techniques to facilitate therapeutic intervention 6. To understand strategies for managing work-related stress 7. Understand the stages of human development for rehabilitation interventions 8. Apply scientific research and evidence-based practice as part of a professional culture 9. Be able to keep up to date with the fundamentals of the knowledge, skills and attitudes required for professional competencies Training activities Expressed in hours of training activities and % of face-to-face delivery P1. Lecture sessions 30 hours 100% P2. Interactive classes 15 hours 100% P4. Completing assignments or projects and solving challenges 10 hours 0% P5. Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews 74 hours 0% P6. – Tutoring 3 hours 100% P7.- Knowledge assessments 3 hours 100% Total: 150 hours of learning activities Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- To pass the module, students must: 1-Have completed the practical work set out in the seminars. 2-Achieve a mark higher than 5 in each part of the module. 3- Achieve a mark of five or above by adding together the percentages set out below: - Continuous assessment: Students may pass the module in blocks (2 exams accounting for 60% of the final mark). The remaining 30 per cent may be obtained through activities carried out in the seminars and in the exercises set by the lecturer, together with 10 per cent from the UAX SKILL SCHOOL. This assessment takes into account the following competences: C1, C2, C4, C5, C6, C7, C8, C9, C10, C11, C12, C13, C14. (If a student fails the first module, they will have to sit an exam covering both parts in the second module). EXAMINATION FORMAT - The exams will consist of random multiple-choice questions with answer options; correct answers are worth 1 mark, whilst incorrect answers result in a deduction of 1/3 of a mark. - Seminars: these will consist of written exercises on the topics covered, psychodramas, group dynamics, debates and individual exercises. * Each instance of non-attendance will result in the deduction of the applicable percentage. Students who do not pass the module through continuous assessment will have the following official examination sessions: - Ordinary June sitting: Assessment of the entire syllabus via a multiple-choice exam; correct answers are worth 1 point and incorrect answers result in a deduction of 1/3 of a point. This exam will cover the entire syllabus for the course. - July resit: This will be a multiple-choice exam; correct answers are worth 1 mark and incorrect answers result in a deduction of 1/3 of a mark. This exam will account for 100 per cent of the course mark. SE1. Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. – Final knowledge assessments 50 70 SE4. – Portfolio 10 20 Total 60 120 Bibliography Basic: 1. American Psychiatric Association. Last revised and published in 2023. DSM-5-TR Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders: Revised Text Editorial Médica Panamericana. 2023. ISBN: 8411060721 2. Iban Onandia-Hinchado and Aarón F. Del Olmo. Published in 2023. Manual of Child and Adolescent Neuropsychology Sara Ediciones. 2023. ISBN: 7888412667714 3. Kortleve. Published in 2023. Communication Skills for Physiotherapists ELSEVIER SPAIN. 2023. ISBN: 9788413823119 4.- World Health Organisation. Year of publication (latest revision): 2023. International Classification of Diseases, 11th revision World Health Organisation. 2023. ISBN: 0000000000 Supplementary: 5.- Acinas Acinas, Mª Patricia. 2nd edition, 2019. Communication skills and care strategies in the healthcare sector. Alcala Publishing Group. 2019. ISBN: 9788413238869 6.- Claudia Liliana Guarín Espinosa and Olga Ñucia Montoya Hurtado. Academic Publishers. (Published in 2020) Physiotherapy in Mental Health Universidad del Rosario Press. 2020. ISBN: 978-958-784-4 7. Dr Arturo Goicoechea. (Published in 2023) Chronic Pain Is Not Forever: The Keys to Understanding and Overcoming Pain. Vergara. 2023. ISBN: 841924869X |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Second Year
ANNUAL SUBJECTS
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0130601 | Professional Communication and Documentation | FB | 9 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Professional Communication and DocumentationCódigo: 0130601 Imprimir Year 2. Annual module. Foundation course. 9 credits. Profesores
Objectives The aim of this module is to improve the quality of care and work at CCSS through a practical approach to health information and Healthcare Documentation. The aim is for students to learn to communicate, conduct interviews, work as part of a team and collaborate with patients to carry out documentary searches; to manage and draft records; to use healthcare terminology; and to know how to select and disseminate information. 1. The theoretical principles of human communication: elements and foundations, intention, contexts, barriers to communication, verbal and non-verbal communication. Models of the clinician-patient relationship. 2. The methodological principles of conducting interviews in healthcare settings: types of interview, stages, interviewees, etc. The theoretical and methodological principles for the study, analysis and improvement of information processes when dealing with complex interviewees or environments, and teamwork. 3. The nature of information and documents, their various modes of production and management cycle, the legal aspects of their use and transfer, and the main sources of information in any format. 4. To understand the theoretical principles and techniques for gathering, selecting, organising, storing and processing information, as well as for its retrieval, access, dissemination and exchange. 5. To be familiar with the drafting techniques applied to healthcare and administrative records and texts. 6. To understand the theoretical and methodological principles for the study, analysis and improvement of the processes of information production, transfer and consumption. 7. Interference in communication. Characteristics, advantages and usefulness of remote consultation. 8. To be familiar with the main means of accessing information through new information and communication technologies (ICT). 9. To understand the possibilities offered by new technologies in the management of medical records. Specific Objectives: - Understanding the basic concepts and methods of human and business communication. - Distinguishing between aspects relating to oral and written communication. - To improve written communication skills. - To develop reading and writing habits. -Acquiring and putting into practice oral communication techniques. -Professional communication in healthcare. -Learning about healthcare administrative records. Medical records Prerequisites Not applicable Competencies Not applicable Learning outcomes RK6 Understand and apply communication theory and interpersonal skills RK8 Understand the psychological aspects of the physiotherapist–patient relationship RS6 Identify the factors involved in teamwork and leadership situations RC7 Be able to work within professional teams as a basic unit in which healthcare professionals and other staff within healthcare organisations are organised in a mono-, multi- or interdisciplinary manner RC12 Communicate effectively and clearly, both orally and in writing, with users of the healthcare system as well as with other professionals RODS Develops effective communication, teamwork, analytical thinking, creativity and ethical leadership from a cross-cutting perspective, clearly inspired by democratic principles and values, as well as the Sustainable Development Goals, in order to conduct oneself with integrity in the professional sphere Description of the content 1. Expressive skills: Being able to describe a situation or an object within the field. Being able to evaluate a situation or an object. Being able to present an argument on a topic. Being able to defend a point of view or a set of facts. Being able to convey an idea concisely. Be able to explain a point on a subject clearly to an audience. Be able to assess a situation in order to make a decision. Be able to clarify. 2. Textual skills: Being able to evaluate texts. Being able to use methods and processes for writing and improving quality (pre-composition, text production, revision and correction). 3. Contextual and pragmatic skills: To produce short speeches tailored to the context in which they will be delivered. Deliver effective presentations and conduct productive meetings. Apply active listening techniques. Distinguish and filter information within a business context. Produce brief speeches tailored to the context in which they will be delivered. Communicate professionally, conduct interviews efficiently and work effectively as part of a team. Manage time. 4. Document-based skills: To equip students with the skills to resolve their information-related problems: To be able to locate and understand relevant information. To be able to summarise and synthesise spoken and written texts. To be familiar with the main sources of biomedical information. To assess the validity and relevance of academic and scientific information. To make decisions based on this information and to manage personal documentation and health records. To know how to use information ethically in discourse. To know how to cite and reference bibliographies. To know how to complete specialised records and documents. 5. Lexical and terminological resources: Expand general vocabulary. Understand word formation and neologisms in Spanish. Recognise and expand the use of terminology, sub-technical vocabulary and UFE. Training activities Expressed in training hours and % of face-to-face delivery P1. – Lectures 45h 100% P2. Interactive classes 30 hours 100% P4. – Completing assignments or projects and solving challenges 25 hours 0% P5. Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews 115 hours 0% P6. – Tutoring 6h 100% P7.- Knowledge assessments 4 hours 100% Total 225 hours of learning activities Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- ASSESSMENT CRITERIA AND SYLLABUS The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s acquisition of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed learning outcomes has been mastered: First term: o Continuous assessment tests: § Coursera (5%). Completion period: between 13 October and 14 November. [No exceptions]. § Content test (10%): covering the material covered in the module. 15 questions (multiple-choice and short-answer) o Main examination session: § Elevator pitch (20%): final weeks of the first term. Minimum mark: 5. o The January ordinary examination session will only be used to assess students who did not sit the test or who obtained a mark of less than 5 in the oral examination. Second term: o Continuous assessment tests: § Test on the course content (10%). o Ordinary examination session: § Written examination (55%). Minimum mark: 5. Ordinary examination date. Examination comprising a practical case study (transcription of a clinical interview) and questions (patient identification, interview strategies and stages, identifying errors). To have the continuous assessment (Coursera + test) counted, students must have a minimum attendance rate of 70% by the end of the term (no more than 6 absences, whether justified or not) or Supplementary sitting (100%). Students who are required to sit the supplementary sitting must take both parts of the examination: oral and written. § Oral (35%). Minimum mark: 5 § Written (65%). Minimum mark: 5 SE1. Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. – Final knowledge assessments 50 70 SE4. – Portfolio 10 20 Total 60 120 Bibliography Core: 1. Acinas Acinas, M. P. Communication Skills and Care Strategies in the Healthcare Sector Alcalá Association. 2004. ISBN: 8496224694 2.- ACINAS ACINAS, Mª Patricia Communication Skills and Care Strategies in the Healthcare Sector Alcalá Association. 2004. ISBN: 8496224694 3. Anderson, C. TED Talks. The Official TED Guide to Public Speaking. Nicholas Brealey Publishing. 2016. ISBN: 9780544809710 4. Bados, Arturo Public Speaking: A Practical Guide to Developing Skills and Confidence Madrid: Piramide, 1991. 1991. ISBN: 8436805860 5. Bados, Arturo Public Speaking: A Practical Guide to Developing Skills and Confidence Madrid: Piramide, 1991. 1991. ISBN: 8436805860 6. Borrell i Carrió, F. How to Work as a Team: And Build Strong Relationships with Managers and Colleagues Gestión 2000. 2004. ISBN: 8480889705 7. Borrell i Carrió, F. How to work as a team: and build good relationships with managers and colleagues Gestión 2000. 2004. ISBN: 8480889705 8. Borrell, Francesc Communicate Well, Lead Better Barcelona: Gestión 2000, 2002. 2002. ISBN: 8480887249 9. Cibanal Juan, L. Communication Techniques and the Helping Relationship in Health Sciences 2nd ed. ELSEVIER. 2010. ISBN: 9788480866644 10. Clèries, Xavier Communication: An Essential Skill for Professionals Barcelona [etc.]: Masson, 2006. 2006. ISBN: 9788445816721 11. Gómez de Enterría and Sánchez, J. Oral Communication in the Workplace Madrid: Arco Libros, [2008]. 2008. ISBN: 9788476357095 12. Gómez de Enterría y Sánchez, Josefa Oral Communication in the Workplace Madrid: Arco Libros, [2008]. 2008. ISBN: 9788476357095 13. Gómez Torrego, L. Speaking and Writing Correctly Madrid: Arco Libros. 2006. ISBN: 8476356536 14. Gómez Torrego, Leonardo Speaking and Writing Correctly Madrid, Arco Libros. 2006. ISBN: 8476356536 15. Kortleve, V. Communication Skills for Physiotherapists. Elsevier. 2023. ISBN: 9788413823119 16. Leonardo Gómez Torrego Practical Spanish Spelling Espasa. 2009. ISBN: 9788467028409 17. López-Méndez, E., Llorento-Domingo, P. and Costa-Cabanillas, M. Illustrated Handbook of Communication Skills: A Clinical Guide for Healthcare Professionals Editorial Pirámide. 2023. ISBN: 9788436847994 18. Luis Cibanal Juan Communication Techniques and Helping Relationships in Health Sciences ELSEVIER. 2010. ISBN: 9788480866644 19. Manuel Dasí, Fernando de Communication Skills for Managers Madrid: ESIC, 1999. 1999. ISBN: 8473562127 20. Merayo, A., Bravo, E. and Gordon, F. Communication with Patients: Emotional Skills for Healthcare Professionals Elsevier. 2014. ISBN: 9788490227558 21. Porter, Stuart Dictionary of Physiotherapy Barcelona: Elsevier, 2007. 2007. ISBN: 9788481749922 22. Porter-Ladousse, Gillian Oxford Supplementary Skills Reading: Intermediate UK: Cambridge University Press, 1987. 1987. ISBN: 0194534189 23. Poyatos, Fernando Non-verbal Communication Madrid: Istmo, 1994. 1994. ISBN: 84709028223 24. Velilla, R. The Power of Effective Presentations: A Practical Guide to Barcelona: Gestión 2000, 2002. 2002. ISBN: 8480887885 25. Velilla, Ricardo The Power of Effective Presentations: A Practical Guide to Barcelona: Gestión 2000, 2002. 2002. ISBN: 8480887885 Supplementary: 26. Buqué, Francesc Basic Manual for the Design of Heating Systems Barcelona: Marcombo, 2009. 2009. ISBN: 9788426715500 27.- Davis, Flora Non-verbal Communication Madrid: Alianza, reprinted 1995. 1995. ISBN: 8420616168 28. Dugger, Jim Effective Listening: The Key to Communication Madrid: Fundación Confemetal, 2006. 2006. ISBN: 8496743047 29. Serrano González, Mª Isabel Health Education in the 21st Century: Communication and Health Madrid: Díaz de Santos; Segovia: Provincial Council. 1998. ISBN: 8479783273 30. Trujillo, José Ramón Negotiation, Communication and Verbal Courtesy: Theory and Techniques Madrid: Ediciones 2010, 2004. 2004. ISBN: 8495058537 Links Spelling rules – Link to various exercises for practising spelling Spelling exercises – Exercises on accent marks, homophones, homonyms and punctuation |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0230514 | Team Sports II | OB | 8 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Team Sports IICódigo: 0230514 Imprimir Year 2. Annual module. Compulsory. 8 credits. Profesores
Objectives The objectives of the degree programme are aligned with the competences/learning outcomes set out in the Resolution of 18 September 2018 of the General Secretariat for Universities, publishing the Agreement of the Council of Universities of 17 September 2018, which sets out recommendations for universities’ submission of verification reports for the official Bachelor’s degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences. In this regard, the following objectives are set out: • To understand, develop and be able to apply the procedures, strategies, activities, resources, techniques and methods involved in the teaching-learning process efficiently, carrying out all activities across all areas of professional practice in physical activity and sport (formal and informal physical and sporting education; physical and sports training; physical exercise for health; management of physical activity and sport). • To communicate and interact appropriately and effectively in the fields of physical activity and sport, across diverse contexts of practice, demonstrating teaching skills in a conscious, natural and sustained manner. • Design and implement a methodological process comprising observation, reflection, analysis, diagnosis, execution, technical and scientific evaluation and/or dissemination in different contexts and across all sectors of professional practice in physical activity and sport. • Adapt educational intervention to the individual characteristics and needs of the entire population, with an emphasis on specific groups such as: schoolchildren, older people (the elderly), people with reduced mobility, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking gender and diversity into account. • Be able to guide, design, implement and evaluate physical exercise and physical fitness at an advanced level, based on scientific evidence, across different fields, contexts and types of activities for the entire population, with an emphasis on special populations such as: older people (senior citizens), schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking into account gender and diversity. • To design and implement, with fluency, naturalness, awareness and consistency, physical exercise and physical conditioning programmes that are appropriate, efficient, systematic, varied and based on scientific evidence, for the development of processes of adaptation and improvement or rehabilitation of specific abilities in each individual in relation to human movement and its optimisation; with the aim of being able to solve unstructured, increasingly complex and unpredictable problems, with an emphasis on special populations. • To analyse, identify, diagnose, promote, guide and evaluate strategies, measures and activities that encourage adherence to an active lifestyle and the regular, healthy participation in and practice of physical activity, sport and exercise in an appropriate, efficient and safe manner by members of the public, with the aim of improving their overall health, well-being and quality of life, with a focus on specific population groups such as: older people (the elderly), schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking gender and diversity into account. • Be able to promote, advise on, design, implement and evaluate, from a technical and scientific perspective, appropriate and varied programmes of physical activity, physical exercise and sport, adapted to the needs, requirements and individual and group characteristics of the entire population, with an emphasis on older people (senior citizens), women and diversity, schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor). • Be able to fluently develop procedures and protocols to solve unstructured, unpredictable and increasingly complex problems, coordinating and demonstrating mastery of the elements, methods, processes, activities, resources and techniques that make up basic motor skills, physical activities, sporting skills, play, expressive movement and dance activities, and outdoor activities in an appropriate, efficient, systematic, varied and methodologically integrated manner for the entire population, with an emphasis on specific groups such as: older people (senior citizens), schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking into account gender and diversity, and in any sector of of physical activity and sport (formal and informal physical and sports education; physical and sports training; physical exercise for health; management of physical activity and sport). • To fluently develop procedures and protocols to solve unstructured, unpredictable and increasingly complex problems, by articulating and applying a command of the elements, methods, procedures, activities, resources, techniques and processes relating to physical fitness and physical exercise in an appropriate, efficient, systematic, diverse and methodologically integrated manner for the entire population, with an emphasis on special groups such as: older people (the elderly), schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking into account gender and diversity, and across any sector of professional practice within physical activity and sport. • To identify, organise, direct, plan, coordinate, implement and carry out technical and scientific evaluation of the various types of physical and sporting activities adapted to the development, characteristics and needs of individuals and the nature of the activity, venue and organisation, across all types of physical activity and sport services, including sporting events, and within any type of organisation, population, context, setting and group, with an emphasis on specific populations such as: older people (the elderly), schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor) and in any sector of professional practice within physical activity and sport (formal and informal physical education and sport; physical and sports training; physical exercise for health; management of physical activity and sport), ensuring safety, efficiency and professionalism in the work carried out in compliance with current regulations. • To articulate and present, with rigour and a scientific approach, the rationale upon which to consistently and professionally develop, support, substantiate and justify all actions, decisions, processes, procedures, interventions, activities, tasks, conclusions, reports and professional performance. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been established Competencies - C.E.54. To understand and master the technical and tactical fundamentals, both individual and collective, in the various sports disciplines. - C.E.55. To understand and apply the rules and regulations governing the various sports disciplines. - C.E.56. To understand and master, with a reasonable degree of autonomy, specific technical elements and their application to the game and competition. Learning outcomes The criteria that may be used to assess the competences in terms of learning outcomes will include, amongst others, the following: - Demonstrate sufficient knowledge of the various content areas covered by answering theoretical questions. - Carry out practical work applying the concepts covered in class. - Applying what is covered in class at a theoretical level to real-life situations through practical scenarios. - Reproducing the technical models developed in class to an appropriate standard. - Compile a repertoire of exercises and games, knowing how to adapt them to various physical and sporting contexts. - Design learning situations based on the context and the characteristics of the target group. Description of the content VOLLEYBALL 1. History: the origins, development and current state of volleyball. 2. Organisation of volleyball resources (equipment, sports facilities, spaces, maintenance of facilities). 3. Teaching methodology for volleyball. 4. Theory and practice of the basic technical skills in volleyball. 5. Theory and practice of the basic rules of volleyball. 6. Theory and practice of the basic tactical aspects of volleyball. BASKETBALL 1. History: the origins, development and current state of basketball. 2. Organisation of basketball resources (equipment, sports facilities, spaces, maintenance of facilities). 3. Teaching methodology for basketball. 4. Theory and practice of the basic technical fundamentals of basketball. 5. Theory and practice of the basic rules of basketball. 6. Theory and practice of the basic tactical aspects of basketball. Training activities The training activities designed to enable students to acquire the intended competences during this module and to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: 1) Lectures on concepts relating to the fundamentals of human motor skills: sport, games, dance, physical expression, etc. (20 hours). 2) Practical sessions in laboratories or sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making (60 hours). 3) Individual and group tutorials (10 hours). 4) Oral, written and practical assessment tests (7 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the regular examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. The module comprises two different sports, volleyball and basketball; it is COMPULSORY to pass both sports in order to pass the module. Once both have been passed, the average of the two marks will be calculated to determine the final mark for the module. VOLLEYBALL AND BASKETBALL Continuous Assessment Students who meet the 70 per cent compulsory attendance requirement will be eligible for continuous assessment, which is detailed below: Final knowledge assessments (50%) These will consist of a theory exam covering the course content, accounting for 50 per cent of the final mark. Practical activities (30%) This section will be divided into two parts: 1) A practical examination on the course content (20%). 2) Participation and attendance at the scheduled masterclasses (10%). Portfolio (20%) This will consist of completing an assignment related to the course content, accounting for 20% of the final mark. Non-continuous (final) assessment Students who do not meet the 70% compulsory attendance requirement will not be eligible for the continuous assessment system. Instead, they must sit a final assessment consisting of a theoretical and practical examination, which will account for 100 per cent of the final mark. This examination will comprise two parts: Theoretical part (60%) Practical part (40%) It will be essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in the practical part in order to have this averaged with the theoretical part. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0230515 | Equipment-based sports | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Equipment-based sportsCódigo: 0230515 Imprimir Year 2. Annual module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives 1. To understand the basic motor skills and their application in sports involving equipment. 2. To understand the basic technical principles of tennis and padel. 3. To apply basic methodological principles to the teaching of tennis and padel. 4. To design motor activities and games related to tennis and padel. 5. To understand the basic historical aspects of tennis and padel. 6. Understand the basic rules of tennis and padel. 7. Acquire a basic command of the skills specific to tennis and padel. Description of the content • To gain as many motor experiences as possible, relating to motor skills and patterns. • To understand the theoretical foundations of the game, its application in educational and recreational contexts, and its potential use as a resource for developing general physical fitness. • To understand and master the technical and tactical fundamentals, both individual and team-based, in the various sports disciplines. • To understand and apply the rules governing the various sports. • To understand and master, with a reasonable degree of independence, specific technical elements and their application to the game and competition. Training activities The training activities to be undertaken by students throughout the module will be as follows: - Lectures or masterclasses (20 hours). - Practical classes (facilities, laboratory, etc.) (40 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (8 hours). - Assessment (7 hours). Assessment system and criteria STUDENTS MAY CHOOSE BETWEEN CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT OR NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT. EACH OF THE TWO SPORTS COVERED IN THE COURSE (TENNIS AND PÁDEL) WILL ACCOUNT FOR 50% OF THE GRADE AND WILL BE ASSESSED AS FOLLOWS: CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: Attendance at 50% of the theory classes is compulsory. Attendance and participation in practical sessions are compulsory for 80 per cent of them. The mark percentages are allocated as follows: • FINAL KNOWLEDGE ASSESSMENTS (50%): Written examinations based on the content covered in the syllabus. • PRACTICAL ACTIVITIES (30%): 15% of the mark will be assessed through the development and/or presentation of a practical session in groups. The remaining 15 per cent will be assessed through the Performance Exam. • PORTFOLIO (20%) -PRACTICAL WORKBOOK The final mark will be the average of the marks obtained in both sports (tennis and padel). The assessment is entirely summative, meaning that all marks count towards the final mark. The mark for the Final Knowledge Tests MUST BE ABOVE 5 IN ORDER TO BE INCLUDED IN THE OVERALL TOTAL. OTHERWISE, THE STUDENT WILL BE CONSIDERED TO HAVE FAILED. A mark of 5 or above in the final assessment for each sport is required to pass. Teachers may award a pass if a pupil scores above 4 in one sport and the combined total with the other sport gives a mark of 5 or above (EXAMPLE – 4 IN TENNIS AND 6 IN PÁDEL WOULD GIVE A FINAL MARK OF 5) NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: -All students who do not meet the attendance requirement will sit a NON-CONTINUOUS assessment (June) THEORETICAL SECTION: 60% Multiple-choice theory exam (FULL YEAR) PRACTICAL SECTION: 40% Practical case studies in the exam (FULL YEAR) SUPPLEMENTARY EXAM (JULY) Any student who has to sit an exam at this stage will sit an exam of this type. THEORETICAL SECTION: 60% (FULL COURSE) PRACTICAL SECTION: 40% (FULL COURSE) The mark obtained in this exam is the final mark for the module. Addendum BIBLIOGRAPHY 1. - Pascual M.J. History of the Rules of Tennis. Gymnos 1991. 2. - International Tennis Federation. Tennis Training for Children and Young People. Gymnos. 1993. 3. - Del Freo A. 1,500 Exercises. Paidotribo. 2007. 4. - Various authors. An Introduction to Racket Sports. Paidotribo. 2007. 5. - Richard Schonborn. Technical Training. Tutor. 1999 6. - Sanz Rivas D. Tennis in Schools. Paidotribo. 2004. 7. - Tous, J. New Trends in Strength and Bodybuilding. Ergo. 1999. 8. - Ruiz Pérez, Luis M. Sport and Learning: The Process of Skill Acquisition and Development. Visor. 1994. 9. - Groppel, J. Tennis for Advanced Players. Gymnos. 1993. Bibliography Core: 1.- Del Freo, Alessandro 1,500 Exercises for Developing Technique, Speed and Rhythm in Tennis Paidotribo Publishers. 1998. ISBN: 8480193670 2. International Tennis Federation Tennis Training for Children and Young People Madrid: Gimnos, 1993. 1993. ISBN: 8480130075 3. Moyano, J. 1001 Padel Games and Exercises. Wancuelen. 2013. ISBN: 8499932258 4. Moyano, J. Padel: Strokes, Training and More Wancuelen. 2016. ISBN: 9788499934204 5. Navarro, S. The Fundamentals of Padel: The Secrets of Effective Training for Athletes. Paidotribo. 2014. ISBN: 8499105491 6. Pascual M.J. History of the Rules of Tennis GYMNOS. 1991. ISBN: 8485945948 7. Ruiz Pérez, Luis Miguel Sport and Learning: Processes of Acquisition and Development 2nd ed. Madrid: Visor, 1997. 1997. ISBN: 847774095X 8. Sanz Rivas, D Tennis in Schools Paidotribo. 2004. ISBN: 84-8019-734-X 9. Sanz Rivas, David Tennis at School : Paidotribo. 2004. ISBN: 84-8019-734- 10. Various authors An Introduction to Racket Sports Paidotribo. 2007. ISBN: 9788480199469 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0230516 | Exercise physiology | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Exercise physiologyCódigo: 0230516 Imprimir Year 2. Annual module. Foundation course. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The overall objective of the Exercise Physiology module is for students on the Bachelor’s Degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences to acquire knowledge of and understand the physiological mechanisms underlying responses to and adaptations from physical exercise, as a basis for establishing the criteria on which to develop intervention programmes. Thus, by the end of the academic year, students who have passed the module should be familiar with the physiological principles relating to the cardiorespiratory, metabolic, neuromuscular, endocrine and immune systems, and their adaptations to sports training and functional capacity, as well as their application in physiological assessment and other determinants of sporting performance. OBJECTIVES (in terms of learning outcomes) - To understand the physiological principles related to sports training and regular physical activity. - To understand the scientific literature in the field of exercise physiology and the physiological adaptations related to human and sporting performance. - To be able to justify the assessment of physical fitness and the prescription of health-oriented physical exercises. - To identify the risks associated with inappropriate practice in relation to maintaining physical fitness and sporting performance. - To study the physiological responses and adaptations undergone by the psychobiological system when subjected to acute and chronic physical exercise sessions. - To understand the scientific literature in the field of exercise physiology and the physiological adaptations related to human and sporting performance. - To understand the energy sources utilised during exercise and how these interact depending on the type of exercise performed. - To study the haematological, neuroendocrine and renal physiological responses and adaptations that the body undergoes when subjected to acute and chronic physical exercise sessions. - To study the cardiorespiratory physiological responses and adaptations that the body undergoes when subjected to acute and chronic physical exercise sessions. Course content Topic 1. Fundamentals of motor control Topic 2. Physical exercise and the neuromuscular system Topic 3. Physical exercise, bioenergetics and metabolism Topic 4. Physical exercise and the cardiorespiratory system Topic 5. Physical exercise and the endocrine system Topic 6. Physical exercise and the immune system Topic 7. Molecular physiology of exercise Topic 8. Physical exercise and genetics Topic 9. Physical exercise and specific physiological responses Learning Activities The learning activities to be undertaken by students throughout the module will be as follows: - Seminars, workshops, etc. (30 hours). - Practical sessions (facilities, laboratory, etc.) (30 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (8 hours). - Assessment (5 hours). - Students’ independent work (study, e-learning, literature review, etc.) (70 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities requiring the student’s physical or virtual presence will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. The final mark for the module will be out of 10, and may be obtained through: A. CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT This applies to students who attend classes and meet the required attendance rate (70 per cent). Final knowledge assessments (60%) Practical activities (20%) Portfolio (20%) B. NON-CONTINUOUS (final) ASSESSMENT: 100% of the final mark is based on a theoretical and practical examination, with the following breakdown: Theoretical section: 60% Practical part: 40% It is essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in the practical section in order for it to be averaged with the theoretical section. Addendum The use of artificial intelligence (AI)-based tools in the preparation of this work is restricted to auxiliary functions such as grammar checking, the generation of outlines or the search for general information. Any use of AI must be properly cited, specifying the tool used, its specific function and when it was applied. The use of AI to draft substantial content, carry out critical analysis or interpret results compromises the originality and authorship of the work. Checks for plagiarism and/or the use of AI will be carried out using the tool available on the virtual campus and will be assessed by the tutor to verify the integrity of the work submitted. Bibliography Essential: 1.- Guyton A. C. Compendium of Medical Physiology Elsevier. 2021. ISBN: 9788491139546 2. López Chicarro JL, Fernández Vaquero A. Exercise Physiology. 3rd edition Panamericana Medical Publishers. 2006. ISBN: 8479039833 3. López Chicharro JL Aerobic–Anaerobic Transition. Concept, Methodology for Determination and Applications. Master Line. 2004. ISBN: 8493250562 4. McArdle WD, Katch FI, Katch VL. Fundamentals of Exercise Physiology. 2nd edition. McGraw Hill. 2004. ISBN: 9788448605988 5. Mora Rodríguez R. Physiology of Sport and Exercise. Field and Laboratory Practice. Editorial Médica Panamericana. 2009. ISBN: 9788498352702 6. Verónique Billat Physiology and Training Methodology Paidotribo. 2002. ISBN: 8480196270 7. Willmore JH, Costill DL. Physiology of Exercise and Sport. 4th edition. Paidotribo. 2007. ISBN: 9788480199162 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0230602 | Biomechanics | FB | 9 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
BiomechanicsCódigo: 0230602 Imprimir Year 2. Annual module. Foundation course. 9 credits. Profesores
Objectives To study the physical principles governing mechanics and apply them to the human body. To examine the structures involved in movement and the relationships between them. To understand the principles of biomechanics and electrophysiology, and their main applications in the field of Physical Rehabilitation and Physiotherapy Prerequisites Not applicable Learning Outcomes Not applicable Learning outcomes RK1 To know and understand the morphology, physiology, pathology and behaviour of people, both healthy and unwell, in their natural and social environments RK2: To know and understand the sciences, models, techniques and instruments on which physiotherapy is based, structured and developed RK4: To be familiar with the principles and theories of physical agents and their applications in physiotherapy RK5 To understand the principles of biomechanics and electrophysiology, and their main applications in the field of physiotherapy RK6 To understand and apply communication theory and interpersonal skills RK7 To understand the learning theories applicable to health education and to the process of lifelong learning itself RK8 Understand the psychological aspects of the physiotherapist–patient relationship RK9 To be familiar with the physiological and structural changes that may occur as a result of the application of physiotherapy RK10 To understand the pathophysiology of diseases, identifying the manifestations that appear throughout the process, as well as medical and surgical treatments, primarily in terms of their physiotherapy and orthopaedic aspects RK11To recognise and identify the psychological and physical problems arising from gender-based violence, in order to equip students with the skills to prevent, detect at an early stage, support and rehabilitate victims of this form of violence. RK14 To understand ergonomic and anthropometric principles RS6 Identify the factors involved in teamwork and leadership situations RS9 Identify the changes brought about as a result of physiotherapy intervention RC7Be able to work within professional teams as a basic unit in which professionals and other staff within healthcare organisations are organised in a mono-, multi- or interdisciplinary manner RC11Understand the importance of keeping up to date with the knowledge, skills, abilities and attitudes that make up the professional competencies of a physiotherapist RC12 Communicate effectively and clearly, both orally and in writing, with users of the healthcare system as well as with other professionals RC13 Encourage the participation of the patient and their family in their recovery process RC16 Encourage the participation of the patient and their family in their recovery process Description of the content 1. Describe the concept of human biomechanics and its clinical application. 2. Identify and describe the factors that influence human movement. 3. Identify and describe the general principles and theories of kinetics and kinematics, as they apply to the analysis of human movement. 4. Explain the general theoretical foundations of the physiology of human movement. 5. Identify and describe the principles of human movement analytically, both in terms of functional segments and as a whole. 6. Identify and describe the anatomical and physiological foundations of the fascial system. 7. Identify and describe the principles of the biomechanics of muscle chains 8. Identify and describe the principles of biomechanics relating to force, balance, coordination, posture and gait 9. Identify and describe the principles of biomechanics and electrophysiology and their main applications within the profession. 10. Identify and describe the principles and theories of biomechanics, kinesiology and ergonomics as they apply to physiotherapy. 11. Be able to draw up a form for recording anthropometric and biomechanical data for a healthy person and a patient 12. Be able to assess strength using subjective manual methods 13. Be able to assess strength using objective, instrumented methods. Dynamometry 14. Be able to carry out an isokinetic assessment following an established protocol. 15. Be able to carry out a posturographic assessment in accordance with an established protocol. 16. Be able to carry out a balance assessment using subjective and objective instrumented methods (stabilometry). 17. Be able to carry out a coordination assessment. 18. Be able to analyse human gait using a gait analysis platform 19. Be able to analyse foot contact patterns 20. Be able to carry out an assessment of myofascial dysfunction syndrome Training activities P1. – Lectures, 60 hours of training, 100% face-to-face P2. – Practical classes, 10 hours of training, 100% face-to-face P3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities, 20 hours of training, 100% face-to-face P4. – Preparation of assignments or projects and problem-solving, 20 hours of training, 0% face-to-face P5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, literature reviews. 105 hours of teaching, 0% face-to-face P6. Tutoring, 6 hours of learning activities, 100% face-to-face P7. – Knowledge assessments: 4 hours of learning activities, 100% face-to-face Total: 225 hours of learning activities Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s learning activities requiring the student’s physical or virtual presence will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- 1. Assessment of THEORETICAL concepts will be carried out as follows: Throughout the two semesters, a series of eliminatory tests will be held on the subject matter covered up to that point. In order to pass the module for each semester, the arithmetic mean of all tests must be 6 or above. If, at the end of the semester, the arithmetic mean of the tests taken is below 6, the student must sit an examination covering the entire syllabus taught in that semester in the February and/or June examinations. The theory mark will account for 60% of the final mark for the module. Attendance at classes is essential for continuous assessment to be taken into account. 2. Assessment of PRACTICAL components will be carried out as follows: attendance at practical classes is compulsory. Absences (whether authorised or unauthorised) exceeding 20 per cent per term will result in a fail for this part of the module. Practical work will be assessed on an ongoing basis by the lecturer, who may set a series of tests, assignments and tasks. These will assess whether the student possesses the theoretical knowledge and sufficient proficiency in each of the techniques covered in the practical classes. Attendance, as well as the student’s attitude and participation during classes, will also be taken into account. In order to pass the module for each semester, the arithmetic mean of all tests taken during that semester must be 5 or above, bearing in mind that tests with marks below 3 or where the student did not sit the test will be marked as 0. If, at the end of the term, the arithmetic mean of the assessments taken is below 5, the student must sit an examination covering the entire syllabus taught at the end of each semester. The practicals mark will account for 30 per cent of the final mark for the module. 3. SEMINARS The seminar mark accounts for 10 per cent of the final mark in the ordinary examination session 4. OTHER DISTANCE-LEARNING ACTIVITIES will be activities proposed by the lecturer, in which students who participate actively may earn 5 marks. Examples of these activities include participation in conferences, university congresses, etc. For each activity, 1 additional mark will be awarded if the activity is deemed beneficial according to the lecturer’s criteria, and 0 if it is not. FINAL MARK formula: (theory × 0.6 + practicals × 0.3 + seminar × 0.1). To apply this formula, each component must be equal to or greater than 5 marks out of a possible 10. If a student has failed to pass the theory and/or practical component of the module through the eliminatory assessments held throughout the semester, they must sit an exam covering the entire syllabus taught that semester, which will take place at the end of the semester (February). If they fail to pass the subject in any of the semesters, they must sit the June exam, in which they will be examined solely on the part they failed. If they fail any part of that exam, they will have to sit an exam covering the entire syllabus (theory and practice) in the EXTRAORDINARY exam session in July. SPECIAL EXAMINATION SESSION Students must sit an exam on theory (accounting for 70 per cent of the total mark) and practical work (accounting for 30 per cent of the total mark). Therefore, the final mark is based on a variety of elements, reflecting all their activities and work. SE1. Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. – Final knowledge assessments 50 70 SE3. – Laboratory practical workbook 5 10 SE4. – Portfolio 5 10 Total 60 120 Bibliography Basic: 1. A. I. Kapandji Joint Physiology: Spine, Pelvic Girdle, Lumbar Spine, Thoracic Spine and Thorax, Cervical Spine and Head Editorial Médica Panamericana S.A. 2007. ISBN: 9788498350470 2. Dufour, M Functional Biomechanics Masson. 2006. ISBN: 8445816454 3. Joseph Hamill BIOMECHANICS: THE BASICS OF HUMAN MOVEMENT (5th ed.) LIPPINCOTT WILLIAMS AND WILKINS. WOLTERS KLUWER HEALTH. 2021. ISBN: 9788418563478 4. Kapandji, A. I. Joint Physiology: Annotated Diagrams of Human Mechanics Madrid: Editorial Médica Panamericana, 2009. 2009. ISBN: 9788479033774 5. LEOPOLD BUSQUET PHYSIOLOGICAL CHAINS: THE PELVIC GIRDLE AND THE LOWER LIMB PAIDOTRIBO. 2012. ISBN: 9788499101644 6. López Román, Antonio Biophysics Applied to the Biomechanics of the Human Body 2nd ed. Madrid: Bellisco, Ediciones Técnicas y Científicas, 2007. 2007. ISBN: 9788496486546 7. Lucas Leal, Daniel Martínez, Eduardo Sieso Fundamentals of Exercise Mechanics © Resistance Institute (Sarria Fitness S.L.). 2012. ISBN: 9788461580033 8. Miralles Marrero, Rodrigo C. Clinical Biomechanics of Musculoskeletal Disorders Barcelona: Masson, 2007. 2007. ISBN: 8445816802 Supplementary: 9. Aguado Jósar, Xavier Efficiency and Sports Technique Self-published, 1993. ISBN: 8487330207 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0230603 | Specialist Physiotherapy 1 | OB | 18 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Specialist Physiotherapy 1Código: 0230603 Imprimir Year 2. Annual module. Compulsory. 18 credits. Profesores
Objectives 1 To provide knowledge of general physiotherapy intervention procedures: massage therapy, electrotherapy, magnetotherapy, hydrotherapy, balneotherapy, climatotherapy, thalassotherapy, thermotherapy, cryotherapy, vibrotherapy, phototherapy, pressotherapy and therapies derived from other physical agents. 2. To lay the foundations for the essential recovery processes. 3. To understand the fundamental aspects of occupational therapy and other therapies related to the field of physiotherapy, as well as the definition, objectives and principles of ergonomics and anthropometry. 4. To define the concepts of correct and incorrect posture and physical work: exertion, sustained postures and repetitive tasks. 5. To establish the theoretical and practical foundations of: a. Kinesitherapy: concept, principles, classification, physiological effects, objectives and methods of application. b. The fundamentals of passive and active kinesitherapy. c. The types of analytical joint mobilisation: their objectives, classification and principles. d. The types of joint traction: objectives, classification and principles. e. The fundamentals of suspension therapy, pole therapy and mechanotherapy f. The fundamentals of muscle activity: isometric, isotonic and isokinetic exercise, and types of muscle chains. g. Muscular kinetic and facilitating chains. h. The fundamentals and programmes of muscle strengthening. i. Types of osteoarticular postures, their objectives, classification and principles. j. The fundamentals of rest and immobilisation. Prerequisites Not applicable Learning outcomes Not applicable Learning outcomes RK5 Understand the principles of biomechanics and electrophysiology, and their main applications in the field of physiotherapy RS6 Identify the factors involved in teamwork and leadership situations RS10 Understand and apply manual and instrumental assessment methods and procedures in physiotherapy and physical rehabilitation, as well as the scientific evaluation of their usefulness and effectiveness. RS11 Understand, design and apply the various modalities and general intervention procedures in physiotherapy RS12 Understand, design and apply therapies derived from other physical agents, as well as fundamental therapies in occupational therapy and other therapies related to the field of physiotherapy RS17 Analyse, plan and apply movement as a therapeutic measure, promoting the patient’s/user’s participation in their treatment process Description of the course content 1. Be able to correctly apply general physiotherapy intervention protocols, focusing on all essential recovery processes. 2. Be able to describe the principles of ergonomics and anthropometry, as well as their objectives. 3. Be able to describe, distinguish between and apply the principles and fundamentals of kinesitherapy, mechanotherapy, suspension therapy and pole therapy. 4. Be able to explain the principles of muscle activity. 5. Be able to provide examples of muscular and facilitating kinetic chains. 6. Be able to apply, compare and describe the various principles and programmes of muscle strengthening. 7. Be able to present movement as a therapeutic measure, identifying the patient as a participant in the process. 8. Be able to encourage the participation of the patient and their family in the recovery process. 9. Be able to identify interprofessional boundaries and suggest appropriate points of reference. 10. Be able to explain the concept of biological diversity to students and describe the limitations inherent in any measurement. 11. Be able to foster the attitude of continuous improvement and learning that is inherent in a qualified and regulated profession. Training activities These are expressed in hours of training activities and as a percentage of face-to-face teaching P1. – Lectures 60 h 100% P2. Interactive classes 14 h 100% P3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities 90 hours 100% P4 – Preparation of assignments or projects and problem-solving 7 h 0% P5. – Independent study, solving case studies or problems, and bibliographic research. 269 h 0% P6. Tutorials 6 h 100% P7. Knowledge tests 4 hours 100% Total: 450 hours of training activities Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities requiring the student’s physical or virtual presence will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- Assessment system and criteria The assessment criteria will be weighted according to the teaching and learning methodology used and the teaching workload for each component, in accordance with the following criteria: • 40%_ Assessment of ‘theoretical’ concepts • 40%_ Assessment of ‘practical’ concepts • 10%_ Seminar activities • 10%_ Continuous assessment (participation, contributions, etc.) The final mark for the module will be the sum of the components, weighted accordingly, with a score of 5 out of a possible 10 required to pass. Each and every component (including attendance at lectures and seminars) must be passed separately in order to be eligible for the final mark to be calculated; otherwise, the mark published will be the lowest of the marks obtained. 1. Assessment of THEORETICAL CONTENT (session)_ will account for a maximum of 40% of the final mark for the module. Throughout the two semesters, a series of eliminatory tests will be held on the material covered up to that point. In order to pass the module for each semester, the arithmetic mean of all tests (to calculate the mean, the mark for each test must be 4 or above) must be 6 or above. If, at the end of the semester, the arithmetic mean of the tests taken is below 6, the student must sit an examination covering the entire syllabus taught in that semester in the February and/or June examination sessions. 2. Assessment of PRACTICAL CONTENT (laboratory work) will account for a maximum of 40% of the final mark for the module. In each semester, there will be two continuous assessment tests, each accounting for 10% of the total mark. In the practical component, it is not possible to be exempted from the module. The final examination covering the entire syllabus taught during the semester accounts for 80%. 3. ASSESSMENT: SEMINAR ACTIVITIES_ will account for a maximum of 10% of the final mark. Assignments and presentations on topics proposed by the lecturer, relating to the course content and aimed at broadening students’ knowledge of the subject – primarily focusing on new technologies that reinforce the content of the lectures – will be assessed. All students are required to present one or more of the assignments allocated to their group. Students must ‘upload’ their presentation to the portal before presenting it so that their classmates can study it and formulate their questions following the presentation. These questions will be used in the multiple-choice exam for this module. If no questions are submitted, the lecturers will select the questions to be included in the exam. Assessment will be based on the following criteria: • Exam • Participation • Collaboration 4. Continuous assessment – this will account for a maximum of 10% of the final mark. The mark for this section (theory and practice) will be based on: • Attendance • Behaviour • Participation • Collaboration
QUARTERLY AND FINAL THEORETICAL EXAMS: Assessment of both practical and theoretical concepts will take place through separate examinations at the end of each semester. Students will be required to sit the June ordinary examination session for any theoretical and/or practical components not passed during the academic year. Failure to pass any theoretical and/or practical component in the ordinary June examination session will result in a fail for the ENTIRE theoretical and/or practical component of the module. For the July examination session, any theory and/or practical mark of 5 or above will be retained, and the student will only be examined on all the theoretical and/or practical content not passed in the ordinary June examination session. Therefore, the final mark is based on a variety of elements, corresponding to all your activities and work. It is an absolute requirement to pass all the components of the module with a mark of at least 5 in order for the final average to be calculated, in both the ordinary and supplementary examination sessions. SE1. Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. Final knowledge assessments 50 70 SE3. – Laboratory practical workbook 5 10 SE4. – Portfolio 5 10 Total 60 120 Bibliography Primary: 1. Elly Hengeveld; Kevin Banks; Mathew Newton; G D Maitland Maitland, Spinal Manipulation Elsevier. 2015. ISBN: 9788490228142 2. Phillip Page Strength band training Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics. 2020. ISBN: 9781492556657 3. Michelle H. Cameron, Physical Agents in Rehabilitation: From Research to Practice Elsevier. 2013. ISBN: 9788490224373 4. Albornoz Cabello, Manuel General Physiotherapy Procedures: Barcelona: Elsevier Masson, 2012. 2012. ISBN: 9788490220139 5. Antje Hüter Physical Therapy, Thermotherapy, Mechanotherapy... Paidotribo. 2005. ISBN: 9788480198004 6. Cristina Aramburu de Vega Electrotherapy, Thermotherapy and Hydrotherapy : Síntesis. 2003. ISBN: 8477385785 7. C. Génot, Henri Neiger, A. Leroy, G. Pierron, M. Dufour, G. Péninou, J. M. Dupré Kinesiotherapy Volume 1 – Principles. Lower limbs. Assessments. Passive and active techniques of the musculoskeletal system Panamericana. 1988. ISBN: 9788479032456 8. C. Génot, Henri Neiger, A. Leroy, G. Pierron, M. Dufour, G. Péninou, J. M. Dupré Kinesiotherapy Volume 2 – Upper Limbs. Head and Trunk. Assessments. Passive and Active Techniques of the Musculoskeletal System Panamericana. 1988. ISBN: 9788479032463 9. Caufriez The Hypopressive Method Cardeñoso. 2013. ISBN: 9788481907384 10. César Fernández de las Penas Kinesitherapy: Physiological Principles and Practical Application Elsevier. 2013. ISBN: 9788490220115 11. César Fernández de las Penas & Alberto Melían Ortiz Kinesitherapy Elsevier. 2024. ISBN: 9788413824383 12. César Fernández de las Peñas; Alberto Melián Ortiz Kinesitherapy: Physiological Principles and Practical Application Elsevier. 2019. ISBN: 9788491133605 13. Fermín Valera Garrido Percutaneous electrolysis Elsevier. 2020. ISBN: 9788491131663 14. Ferrer Anglada, Josep. Advanced massage: Elsevier. 2019. ISBN: 9788491132516 15. Hernán Andrés de la Barra Physical Agents, Basic Concepts Spanish Academic Publishing House. 2018. ISBN: 9786202137058 16. Isabel Eisen (Pilates instructor) Pilates Heatherton, Vic.: Hinkler. 2021. ISBN: 9781488923128 17. Javier Güeita Rodríguez and María Alonso Fraile Aquatic Therapy: Elsevier, 2015. ISBN: 9788490228104 18. Javier Güeita Rodríguez and María Alonso Fraile Aquatic Therapy: Approaches from Physiotherapy, Occupational Therapy and Speech and Language Therapy Elsevier. 2020. ISBN: 9788491135791 19. Khan, Joseph Principles and Practice of Electrotherapy : Jims. 1991. ISBN: 8470923544 20. López Román, Antonio Fundamentals of General Physiotherapy Bellisco. 2009. ISBN: 9788495277022 21. Manuel Albornoz Cabello Transcutaneous Electrical Nerve Stimulation Elsevier. 2020. ISBN: 9788491138914 22. Philippe Souchard Physiotherapy Treatment in RPG Elsevier. 2016. ISBN: 9788491130734 23. Porter, Stuart Dictionary of Physiotherapy Barcelona: Elsevier, 2007. 2007. ISBN: 9788481749922 24. Rodríguez Martín Electrotherapy in Physiotherapy Panamericana. 2004. ISBN: 9788479037536 25. Serge Tixa Atlas of Palpatory Anatomy. Volume 1. Neck, Trunk and Upper Limb Elsevier Masson. 2014. ISBN: 9788445825808 26. Serge Tixa Atlas of Palpatory Anatomy. Volume 2. Lower Limb Elsevier Masson. 2014. ISBN: 9788445825815 27. Stuart Porter Tidy Physiotherapy : Butterworth Heinemann. 2009. ISBN: 0750632119 28. Thomas W. Myers Anatomical Pathways: Myofascial Meridians for Manual and Movement Therapists Elsevier. 2015. ISBN: 9788445820131 29. Tim Watson Evidence-Based Practical Electrotherapy Elsevier. 2009. ISBN: 9788480864442 30. Tim Watson Modalities in Electrotherapy, 13th Edition Elsevier. 2021. ISBN: 9788491137245 31. Weiss, Hans Rudolf Physiotherapy for Scoliosis Based on Diagnosis Barcelona: Paidotribo, 2004. 2004. ISBN: 8480197315 32.- YVES XHARDEZ HANDBOOK OF PHYSIOTHERAPY AND FUNCTIONAL REHABILITATION El Ateneo. 2010. ISBN: 9789500205214 Supplementary: 33.- Tixa, S. Atlas of Palpatory Anatomy. Volume 1. Neck, Trunk and Upper Limb, 5th ed. Elsevier. 2024. ISBN: 9788413826950 34.- Tixa, S. Atlas of Palpatory Anatomy. Volume 2. Lower Limb, 6th edition Elsevier. 2024. ISBN: 9788413826981 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 56 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
FIRST FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0230518 | Basic physical education and motor games | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Basic physical education and motor gamesCódigo: 0230518 Imprimir Year 2 Course. First semester module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The objectives of the degree programme are aligned with the competences/learning outcomes set out in the Resolution of 18 September 2018 of the General Secretariat for Universities, publishing the Agreement of the Council of Universities of 17 September 2018, which sets out recommendations for universities’ submission of verification reports for the official Bachelor’s degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences. In this regard, the following objectives are set out: • To understand, develop and be able to apply the procedures, strategies, activities, resources, techniques and methods involved in the teaching-learning process efficiently, carrying out all activities across all areas of professional practice in physical activity and sport (formal and informal physical and sporting education; physical and sports training; physical exercise for health; management of physical activity and sport). • To communicate and interact appropriately and effectively in the fields of physical activity and sport across diverse contexts, demonstrating teaching skills in a conscious, natural and consistent manner. • Adapt educational intervention to the individual characteristics and needs of the entire population, with an emphasis on specific groups such as: schoolchildren, older people (the elderly), people with reduced mobility, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking gender and diversity into account. • Fluently develop procedures and protocols to solve unstructured, unpredictable and increasingly complex problems, articulating and demonstrating mastery of the elements, methods, processes, activities, resources and techniques that comprise basic motor skills, physical activities, sporting skills, play, expressive movement and dance activities, and outdoor activities in an appropriate, efficient, systematic, varied and methodologically integrated manner for the entire population, with an emphasis on specific groups such as: older people (the elderly), schoolchildren, people with disabilities and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking into account gender and diversity, and across any sector of professional practice within physical activity and sport (formal and informal physical and sporting education; physical and sports training; health-related physical exercise; and physical activity and sport management). • To understand, be able to explain and communicate the roles, responsibilities and importance of a qualified graduate in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences, as well as to analyse, understand, identify and reflect critically and independently on their professional identity, training and performance in order to achieve the aims and benefits inherent in physical activity and sport in an appropriate, safe, healthy and efficient manner across all physical activity and sport services offered and provided, and in any professional sector within the field of physical activity and sport. • To understand, develop and apply the ethical and deontological, structural and organisational, and professional performance considerations, as well as the regulations governing the professional practice of graduates in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences, across any professional sector within physical activity and sport (formal and informal physical activity and sport education; physical and sports coaching; physical exercise for health; management of physical activity and sport); as well as being able to carry out multidisciplinary work. Description of the course content The content to be covered focuses on understanding and learning the basic aspects of this sport and aims to address the various facets of judo. The topics to be covered are: Topic 1. History of Physical Education and Play 1.1. History of Physical Education 1.2. History of Play Topic 2: Designing Training Sessions 2.1. Definition 2.2. Structure and elements of a session 2.3. Organisation of the session 2.4. Documentation Topic 3: The game 3.1. Definition 3.2. Characteristics of play 3.3. General guidelines for play 3.4. Classification and types of play Topic 4. Motor behaviour 4.1. Definition 4.2. Development of motor behaviour 4.3. Implications for play/sport Topic 5. Motor skills 5.1. Definition 5.2 Types of skills 5.3. Characteristics 5.4. The role of basic motor skills in play Topic 6. Perceptual-motor skills 6.1. Definition 6.2. Characteristics 6.3. Types of abilities 6.4. Role in play Topic 7. Basic physical abilities 7.1. Definition 7.2. Characteristics 7.3. Development 7.4. Role in sport Training Activities The training activities to be undertaken by students throughout the module will be as follows: - Lectures or classroom sessions (15 hours). - Practical classes (facilities, laboratory, etc.) (45 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (7 hours). - Assessment (5 hours). - Students’ independent work (study, e-learning, literature review, etc.) (54 hours). Assessment system and criteria Continuous assessment This assessment will be divided into three sections. • Final knowledge assessments (50 per cent): - Theoretical examination • Practical activities (30%): -Practical classes -Class activities • Portfolio (20%): -Practical diary In order to calculate the average mark and obtain a final grade, it is essential to achieve a mark of 5 out of 10 in the final examinations. The module will be deemed passed when the sum of all marks, taking into account the above considerations, is 5 or higher. To be eligible for this assessment, students must have attended 70 per cent of all classes. Non-continuous (final) assessment This assessment will be marked on the basis of a theoretical and practical examination, with the following percentage breakdown by section. • Theoretical section (60%) • Practical section (40%) It is essential to achieve a mark of 5 out of 10 in the practical section in order for this to be averaged with the theoretical section. The module will be considered passed when the sum of all marks, taking into account the above criteria, is 5 or higher. Addendum The public health crisis caused by the COVID-19 pandemic has led to the adoption of exceptional safety measures which, whilst aimed at preventing the spread of the virus, have inevitably affected the way in which teachers and students interact in the context of face-to-face teaching. This has had an impact on the standard teaching timetable, which, whilst these measures remain in force, may be subject to change, particularly affecting teaching and assessment methods. In accordance with the provisions approved by the competent authority and in line with the agreements adopted by the governing bodies of the University and its faculties, the following sets out the extent to which teaching activities and the assessment systems and criteria for the module may be affected whilst the exceptional safety measures referred to in the previous paragraph remain in force. Teaching activities All teaching hours for face-to-face teaching activities will be delivered in full; however, the number of hours delivered physically in the classroom will be reduced by 40 per cent. These hours will be delivered synchronously via the virtual classroom. Classes delivered virtually will be recorded. These recordings will remain available on the course’s virtual campus to enrolled students throughout the academic year, so that they can be viewed an unlimited number of times. Should the exceptional circumstances give rise to measures restricting individual movement, the proportion of teaching hours delivered virtually will be increased. If this becomes necessary, provision has been made for 100 per cent of the weekly teaching hours to be delivered virtually. Assessment systems and criteria With regard to individual or group assignments for which a public oral presentation has been planned, such presentations will take place via the University’s virtual learning platform. Exams will be held in person in the physical classrooms designated for this purpose during the period set out in the University’s academic calendar. Only in the event that the authorities adopt mandatory measures restricting individual movement will exams be held remotely. The amendments and provisions set out in this section are provisional and may be subject to change as determined by the academic authorities or where circumstances so require. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0230523 | Physical activity and sport for people with disabilities | OB | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Physical activity and sport for people with disabilitiesCódigo: 0230523 Imprimir Year 2, Course 2. First term. Compulsory. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives Objectives The objectives of the degree programme are aligned with the competences/learning outcomes set out in the Resolution of 18 September 2018 of the General Secretariat for Universities, publishing the Agreement of the Council of Universities of 17 September 2018, which sets out recommendations for universities to submit verification reports for the official Bachelor’s degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences. Accordingly, the following objectives are set out: • To adapt educational provision to the individual characteristics and needs of the entire population, with an emphasis on specific groups such as: schoolchildren, older people (the elderly),people with reduced mobility, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), whilst taking gender and diversity into account. • To be able to guide, design, implement and evaluate physical exercise and physical fitness at an advanced level, based on scientific evidence, across different settings, contexts and types of activities for the entire population, with a focus on specific groups such as: older people, schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking gender and diversity into account. • To design and implement, with fluency, naturalness, awareness and consistency, physical exercise and physical fitness programmes that are appropriate, efficient, systematic, varied and based on scientific evidence, for the development of processes of adaptation and improvement or rehabilitation of specific abilities in each individual in relation to human movement and its optimisation; with the aim of resolving unstructured, increasingly complex and unpredictable problems, with an emphasis on special populations. • Be able to rehabilitate, retrain and/or re-educate individuals, groups or teams with injuries and medical conditions (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), whether they compete or not, through physical and sporting activities and physical exercises suited to their characteristics and needs. • Be able to promote, advise on, design, implement and evaluate, from a technical and scientific perspective, appropriate and varied programmes of physical activity, physical exercise and sport, adapted to the individual and group needs, demands and characteristics of the entire population, with an emphasis on older people (the elderly), women and diversity, schoolchildren, people with disabilities and people with medical conditions or related health issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor). Description of the content Description of the content The main competences related to the subjects in this module that students will acquire upon completion are as follows: 1) C.E.78. To be familiar with the key developments in current scientific evidence regarding physical activity and health, and the design of health-oriented physical activity programmes. 2) C.E.79. To design health-oriented physical activity and fitness programmes, following an assessment of the characteristics and needs of the individuals for whom they are intended. 3) C.E.80. To be familiar with and able to utilise the main sources of literature relating to physical activity and health. 4) C.E.81. Understand the theoretical basis of the most common pathological processes and the prescription of individualised exercise programmes for each case. 5) C.E.82. The inclusion of pupils with special educational needs is one of the challenges currently facing graduates in Physical Activity and Sport. Both at a conceptual and legislative level, there is unanimous agreement that all children have the same rights to receive a quality education that takes into account both their potential and their limitations, not to be discriminated against on account of the nature of their particular conditions, and therefore, to be included, just like any other pupil, in the classroom and in any other setting, whether extracurricular, recreational or sporting. 6) C.E.83. To be familiar with the main physical, mental and sensory disabilities. 7) C.E.84. Understand the importance of physical activity programmes in the inclusion of children with special educational needs. 8) C.E.85. Plan activities adapted for pupils with special educational needs. 9) C.E.86. Make appropriate use of ICT and other resources to find information relating to physical activity and health. Relation to the degree programme’s learning outcomes This module specifically contributes to the following competences defined for the degree programme as a whole, although there are other competences to which it may also contribute: 1) Learning Outcome 5. Assess physical fitness and prescribe health-oriented physical exercises. 2) C.E.6. Promote and evaluate the development of lasting and independent habits regarding physical activity and sport amongst the adult population, older people and people with disabilities. 3) C.E.7. Identify the health risks arising from the practice of inappropriate physical activities amongst people who engage in health-oriented physical activity. Learning activities The training activities to be undertaken by students throughout the module will be as follows: - Lectures or masterclasses (15 hours). - Practical classes (facilities, laboratory, etc.) (30 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (4 hours). - Assessment (6 hours). - Students’ independent work (study, e-learning, literature review, etc.) (70 hours). Assessment system and criteria Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities requiring the student’s physical or virtual presence will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will be carried out taking into account the various learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed learning outcomes has been achieved: Continuous Assessment (≥ 70% physical or virtual attendance) Final knowledge assessments – 50% - Theoretical examinations Practical activities – 30% - In-class delivery of the practical activity - Presentation of the practical activity Portfolio – 20% - Assessment of the theoretical document for the practical activity Final Assessment (< 70% attendance, either in person or online) Theoretical component – 60% - Theoretical exam Practical component – 40% - Assignment demonstrating the practical application of the course’s theoretical concepts Students sitting the final assessment must pass the theoretical-practical exam. Passing both parts (theoretical and practical) is compulsory in order to pass the module. Therefore, it is compulsory to obtain at least a 5 in the practical part so that this can be averaged with the theoretical part. Attendance at the course must be at least 70 per cent of the sessions in order to be eligible for continuous assessment. Students who do not achieve 70 per cent attendance will be assessed via the final assessment. Addendum Addendum Learning outcomes The criteria used to assess competences in in terms of learning outcomes will include, amongst others, the following: - Demonstrating sufficient knowledge of the various content modules content modules set out through the completion of theoretical and practical questions. - Carrying out assignments and practical exercises applying the subject matter the subject. - Carry out a basic assessment of a subject’s state of health, prior to the commencement of an exercise programme. - Assessment of the parameters of healthy physical fitness. - Solve practical case studies involving the prescription of exercise for health for different types of individuals. - Basic assessment of the main physical, mental and sensory impairments. Bibliography Essential: 1. Arráez Martínez, Juan Miguel Motor skills, self-concept and integration of blind children : Granada: University: Andalusian Institute of Sport ISBN: 8433824783 2. Various authors Adapted physical education for primary schools: first cycle : Barcelona : INDE, 2003 ISBN: 8495114666 3. Cati Gómez Lecumberri; Núria Puig Barata; Gaspar Maza Gutiérrez Sport and social integration. A guide to educational intervention through sport : INDE ISBN: 9788497291552 4. Francisco Javier Hernández Vázquez Inclusion in Physical Education. The keys to success for the inclusion of pupils with different abilities : INDE ISBN: 9788497293082 5. Rios Hernández, Merche A Handbook on Adapted Physical Education for Pupils with Disabilities : Barcelona : Paidotribo, 2003 ISBN: 8480196858 6. Sanz Rivas, David; Reina Vaíllo, Raúl. PHYSICAL ACTIVITIES AND ADAPTED SPORTS FOR PEOPLE WITH DISABILITIES : Paidotribo ISBN: 9788499101576 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 10 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
SECOND FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0230520 | Communication in a Foreign Language I | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Communication in a Foreign Language ICódigo: 0230520 Imprimir Year 2 Course. Second term module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Learning activities The training activities to be undertaken by students throughout the course will be as follows: - Lectures or masterclasses (30 hours). - Seminars, workshops, etc. (30 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (7 hours). - Assessment (5 hours). - Students’ independent work (study, e-learning, literature review, etc.) (78 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities requiring the student’s physical or virtual presence will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. The assessment process will be carried out with the aim of achieving the learning outcomes set out in the course description. The assessments carried out will evaluate the four language skills (reading comprehension, listening comprehension, written expression and oral expression). These tests will be: • Writing tests. • Written tests comprising multiple-choice questions, true or false questions, fill-in-the-blank exercises and short-answer questions. • Reading and reading comprehension exercises. • Vocabulary and grammar exercises. • Completing and presenting assignments. • Listening comprehension tests. • Oral expression tests. CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT Students will be assessed through continuous assessment, as follows: Final Knowledge Tests (Total 60%): Mid-term Test 1 (30%) Mid-term Test 2 (30%) Skills: Technical Vocabulary Reading Listening Grammar & Use of English Practical Activities (30%): Speaking Test It will be essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in these sections (each part of the final knowledge tests and the practical activities) in order to be eligible for continuous assessment. Portfolio (10%) - Tasks focusing on oral and written expression set by the lecturer during classes throughout the term. NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT/REGULAR AND/OR SITTING (Final) Should a student have failed to sit any of the partial assessments or have failed them, the corresponding official examination will account for 100% of the mark. In this case, students will be assessed via a theoretical and practical examination, with the following weighting: Theoretical section: 60% Practical part (Speaking test): 40% - It is essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in the practical part in order for it to be averaged with the theoretical part. Note 1: AT THE DISCRETION OF EACH LECTURER, the results of the oral tests for continuous assessment may be carried over to the regular examination (never the resit) within the academic term in question. The results of the written tests MAY NOT BE CARRIED OVER UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES FOR ANY OTHER EXAMINATION SESSION. Therefore, both continuous assessment and the ordinary and supplementary examination sessions will have UNIQUE AND SPECIFIC written test results for each session. Bibliography Core: 1. Virginia Evans and Jenny Dooley It’s Grammar Time 4 Express Publishing. 2016. ISBN: 9781471538100 2. Virginia Evans and Jenny Dooley It’s Grammar Time 4 Express Publishing. 2016. ISBN: 9781471538100 3. Virginia Evans, Jenny Dooley and Alan Graham Career Paths: Sport Express Publishing. 2016. ISBN: 9781471505737 Supplementary: 4. Brinks Lockwood, Robyn and David Bohlke Skillful Listening and Speaking Level 2 Macmillan Education. 2013. ISBN: 978230431935 5. Rogers, Louis Skillful 2 Reading and Writing Macmillan Education. 2018. ISBN: 9781380010650 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0230521 | Statistics | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
StatisticsCódigo: 0230521 Imprimir Year 2 Course. Second term module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The objectives of the degree programme are aligned with the competences/learning outcomes set out in the Resolution of 18 September 2018 of the General Secretariat for Universities, publishing the Agreement of the Council of Universities of 17 September 2018, which sets out recommendations for universities’ submission of verification reports for the official Bachelor’s degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences. In this regard, the following objectives are set out: • To design and implement the methodological process comprising observation, reflection, analysis, diagnosis, implementation, technical and scientific evaluation and/or dissemination in different contexts and across all sectors of professional practice in physical activity and sport. • To organise and implement the provision of advice, certification and technical-scientific evaluation of physical and sporting activities and resources across all physical activity and sport services, contexts, environments and sectors of professional practice in physical activity and sport, as well as in the design and preparation of technical reports across all physical activity and sport services. • To be familiar with and understand the fundamentals of scientific research methodology. • To analyse, review and assess the impact and effectiveness of research methods, techniques and resources, as well as scientific working methodology, in solving problems that require the use of creative and innovative ideas. Prerequisites None specified. Competencies Competencies Knowledge 1. C.G.21. Understand the basic concepts of biostatistics and their applicability to the biomedical sciences. 2. C.E.105. Design and analyse simple studies. 3. C.E.106. The usefulness and applications of statistical software. 4. C.E.107. Distinguish between a sample and a population, as well as between random and non-random samples. 5. C.E.108. Analyse a dataset descriptively. 6. C.E.109. Understand the most important distributions and know when to use them. 7. C.E.110. Construct and interpret confidence intervals for means and proportions. 8. C.E.111. Formulate the hypotheses for a hypothesis test based on the aim of the experiment, and understand their limitations and interpretation. 11. C.E.112. Understand the relationship between confidence intervals and hypothesis testing. 12. C.E.113. Interpret the p-value and draw conclusions. 13. C.E.114. Distinguish between independent and paired samples. 14. C.E.115. Distinguish between parametric and non-parametric methods. 15. C.E.116. Compare one or two means or proportions depending on the type and number of data points. 16. C.E.117. The applications of the chi-squared test; understand the limitations of the technique and analyse the reasons for its significance. 17. C.E.118. Understand the concepts of risk factor, relative risk, odds ratio and aetiological fraction. 18. C.E.119. The problem of multiple comparisons and the Bonferroni correction. 19. C.E.120. Understand the concept and interpretation of simple linear regression and correlation studies 20. C.E.121. Understand the concept and interpretation of survival analysis. The Kaplan-Meier method. 21. C.E.122. Understand the concept, purpose and design of a clinical trial. Meta-analysis. PRACTICAL SKILLS Competent practical skills (routinely and without supervision) 1. C.E.123. Interpret the levels of precision, confidence and error in the conclusions of a statistical study. 2. C.E.124. Use a statistical software package at user level. 3. C.E.125. Analyse data descriptively. 4. C.E.126. Calculate confidence intervals for means and proportions, determining the appropriate sample size. 5. C.E.127. Formulate the hypotheses for a hypothesis test. 6. C.E.128. Calculate the p-value. 7. C.E.129. Compare two means. 8. C.E.130. Compare two proportions. 9. C.E.131. Analyse a contingency table using the chi-squared test. 10. C.E.132. Apply the Bonferroni method. 11. C.E.133. Plot a scatter plot, regression line and correlation for two variables. 12. C.E.134. Calculate Spearman’s correlation coefficient. 13. C.E.135. Create a database. To have practised this under supervision (under the supervision of the tutor) 1. C.E.136. Break down contingency tables to identify the causes of significance in a chi-squared test. 2. C.E.137. Transform variables to ensure they meet the specifications of the model to be used. 3. C.E.138. Obtain normality intervals in linear regression. 4. C.E.139. Calculate the appropriate measure in an epidemiological study. 5. C.E.140. Evaluate a binary diagnostic method. Perform exact tests for two proportions. 6. C.E.141. Compare several means using parametric and non-parametric methods. 7. C.E.142. Perform multiple regression. Learning outcomes The elements that can be used to assess competences in in terms of learning outcomes will include, amongst others, the following: - Ability to understand and assimilate basic concepts - Ability to apply statistical calculations. Relation to the degree programme’s competences C.G.22. Effectively utilise knowledge, procedures and results relating to statistics Description of the course content THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL CONTENT Topic 1: Introduction to research. Topic 2: Information retrieval and statistical software. Topic 3: Basic concepts in applied statistics. Topic 4: Descriptive statistics and data visualisation. Topic 5: Probability distributions. Topic 6: Confidence intervals and hypothesis testing. Topic 7. Database management and cleaning tools. Topic 8. Linear and bivariate correlations. Topic 9. Comparison of two groups. Topic 10. Comparison of K groups. Topic 11. Chi-square test Topic 12. Presentation of results Topic 13. An introduction to emerging statistical methods: meta-analysis and regression. Topic 14. An introduction to emerging statistical methods: mixed and linear models Learning activities The training activities designed to enable students to acquire the intended competences during this module and to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: 1) Lectures on concepts related to statistics (30 hours) 2) Seminars, workshops, etc. (30 hours) 3) Individual and group tutorials (7 hours). 4) Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work, both individually and in groups, etc. (78 hours). 5) Oral, written and practical assessments (5 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment system will consist of: oral examinations, multiple-choice written examinations, essay-type written examinations, the completion and presentation of assignments, tutorial supervision, and attendance and participation in seminars and practical demonstrations. a) CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: This comprises several parts: Final knowledge assessments (50%) - Final examination (50%). The theoretical and practical examination may consist of multiple-choice questions, short-answer or essay-style questions, or case studies. In multiple-choice questions, correct answers will be marked, bearing in mind that incorrect answers will result in a percentage deduction based on the number of answers provided. The exam will be marked out of 10 marks. Practical activities (30%) - Data analysis assignment with a written report: Students will carry out a practical assignment, either individually or in pairs, consisting of analysing a set of real or simulated data using the statistical techniques covered in the module. Portfolio (20%) - Practical work log (20%). This individual practical work log must be completed during practical sessions. It will cover all the practical work carried out in class, which will be saved on the computers. Students must individually submit a log for marking. Each student must therefore compile their portfolio solely from the practical exercises carried out in class or as specified by the lecturer throughout the course. b) NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: If students opt for the final assessment or forfeit their right to continuous assessment, they must sit the COURSE EXAMS IN JANUARY OR JULY. Final knowledge assessments (100%) - Final exam 100%. The exam, covering both theoretical and practical content, may consist of multiple-choice questions, short-answer or essay-style questions, or case studies. For multiple-choice questions, correct answers will be awarded marks, whilst incorrect answers will result in a percentage deduction based on the number of options in the question. The exam will be marked out of 10 marks. - The theoretical section will account for 60 per cent of the final mark. - The practical section will account for 40 per cent of the final mark. It is an essential requirement to achieve a minimum mark of 5 out of 10 in the practical section in order for it to be averaged with the theoretical section. CLASS ATTENDANCE. STUDENTS WILL LOSE THEIR RIGHT TO CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT if their attendance rate is less than 70% EXCUSES FOR ABSENCES Justification for absences must be submitted within a maximum of two weeks of the absence; after this period, the justification will no longer be valid. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0230522 | The History of the Olympic Movement, Physical Activity and Sport | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The History of the Olympic Movement, Physical Activity and SportCódigo: 0230522 Imprimir Year 2, Course 2. Second term. Foundation module. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives Skills 1. To be familiar with and able to apply the essential theoretical tools that enable students to understand sport as a social and cultural phenomenon and, as such, one that is constantly evolving and interacting with other systems within the social structure (education, politics, the economy, the media, etc.). 2. To reflect on the complex and ambivalent roles that sport plays in modern societies. 3. To understand the process of human development and its stages, in order to subsequently adapt the practice of physical and sporting activity accordingly. Programme Outcomes 1) To know and understand the effects of physical exercise on the structure and function of the human body. 2) To know and understand the subject matter of the Sciences of Physical Activity and Sport. Relation to the degree programme’s learning outcomes This module specifically contributes to the following competences defined for the degree programme as a whole: 1) C.G.3. To know and understand the physiological and biomechanical factors that influence the practice of physical activity and sport. 2) C.G.5. To know and understand the effects of physical exercise on the structure and function of the human body. 3) C.G.4. To know and understand the behavioural and social factors that influence the practice of physical activity and sport. 4) C.G.6. To know and understand the effects of physical exercise on the psychological and social aspects of human beings. 5) C.G.1. To know and understand the subject matter of the Sciences of Physical Activity and Sport. 6) C.G.2. To acquire basic scientific knowledge applied to physical activity and sport in their various forms. Learning outcomes The elements that may be used to assess competences in terms of learning outcomes will include, amongst others, the following: - Demonstrating sufficient knowledge of the various content modules covered by answering theoretical questions. - Carry out assignments applying the concepts covered in class. - Applying what is covered in class at a theoretical level to real-life situations through practical scenarios. - Independently exploring any topic through research and personal study. - Make appropriate use of ICT. Learning activities The learning activities designed to enable students to acquire the intended competences during this module and to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: • Lectures on concepts relating to the fundamentals of human motor function: biological, mechanical, behavioural, social and scientific. • Individual and group tutorials • Practical sessions in laboratories or sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making. • Seminars, workshops, etc. • Independent study, including self-directed learning, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work carried out both individually and in groups, etc. • Oral, written and practical assessments. Course content SYLLABUS TOPIC 1: Introduction to the theory of sport. TOPIC 2: Sport in the earliest historical civilisations. TOPIC 3: Mesoamerica. TOPIC 4: Ancient Greece. TOPIC 5: Roman civilisation. TOPIC 6: The Middle Ages. TOPIC 7: The Olympic Games and sport in the 21st century. Pierre de Coubertin. TOPIC 8: The Modern Olympic Games. Learning Activities The learning activities to be undertaken by students throughout the course will be as follows: - Lectures or masterclasses (30 hours). - Seminars, workshops, etc. (30 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (7 hours). - Assessment (5 hours). - Students’ independent work (study, e-learning, literature review, etc.) (78 hours). Assessment system and criteria Continuous assessment Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities requiring the student’s physical or virtual presence will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment in the standard examination session. Academic exemption will only apply to lectures or theoretical classes, and not to practical classes designated as ‘TRAB’. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the corresponding weighting as specified in the course syllabus. • Final knowledge assessments (50%) Written examinations covering the full range of learning activities carried out in the classroom. 50%. • Practical activities (20%) Submission of practical work and presentation. 20 per cent. • Portfolio (30%) Course on Olympic content. 10% Individual assignment on supplementary content. 20% Final assessment 100% of the final mark will be based on a theoretical and practical examination, broken down as follows: • Theoretical section: 60% • Practical component: 40% It will be essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in the practical part in order to have this averaged with the theoretical part. Bibliography Essential: 1. Blázquez, D. Physical Education INDE. 2010. ISBN: 9788497292047 2. Gilles Massardier Tales and Legends of the Olympic Games Anaya. 2004. ISBN: 978-84-667-27 3. Monroy, A., & Sáez, G. History of Sport: From Prehistory to the Renaissance. WANCEULEN, S.L. 2007. ISBN: 9788498232226 4. Pérez Ramírez, C The Historical Development of Physical Education. Apunts Journal. Physical Education and Sport. 1994. ISBN: 2014-0983 https://revista-apunts.com/evolucion-historica-de-la-educacion-fisica/ 5.- Vicente Muñoz Puelles A journey through the Olympic Games Anaya. 2020. ISBN: 978-84-698-65 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 18 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Third Year
ANNUAL SUBJECTS
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0230601 | Medical and Surgical Conditions 1 | OB | 9 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Medical and Surgical Conditions 1Código: 0230601 Imprimir Year 3. Annual module. Compulsory. 9 credits. Profesores
Objectives Students must acquire a basic understanding of medical and surgical conditions and be able to manage, in a professional manner, the patients they treat who present with the conditions covered in this module, as well as any interdisciplinary reports from the health sciences that they receive Prerequisites Not applicable Competencies Not applicable Learning outcomes RK1 To know and understand the morphology, physiology, pathology and behaviour of people, both healthy and unwell, in their natural and social environments RK10 To understand the pathophysiology of diseases, identifying the manifestations that arise throughout the process, as well as medical and surgical treatments, primarily in terms of their physiotherapeutic and orthopaedic aspects RK11 To recognise and identify the psychological and physical problems arising from gender-based violence, in order to equip students with the skills for the prevention, early detection, care and rehabilitation of victims of this form of violence RS8 Recognise life-threatening situations and know how to perform basic and advanced life-support manoeuvres RC7 Be able to work within professional teams as a basic unit in which professionals and other staff from care organisations are organised in a unidisciplinary, multidisciplinary or interdisciplinary manner. Description of the content . Use the most common healthcare terminology amongst healthcare professionals to describe the physiological and structural changes that may occur as a result of illness. 2. Identifies and describes basic health concepts. 3. Identify, describe and understand the main aetiological factors and the mechanisms underlying the various pathological processes. 4. Identifies, describes and understands the various underlying pathophysiological alterations in different pathological conditions at all stages of the life cycle. 5. Identifies, describes and understands the various diagnostic techniques used in the pathologies of the different organ systems. 6. Identify and describe the basic principles of prevention, as well as the various medical and surgical treatments applicable to each type of condition. 7. Identifies and describes the physical problems resulting from gender-based violence 8. Identifies and describes the main changes resulting from the various treatments applied 9. Uses clinical documentation to interpret different pathologies. 10. Is able to compile a medical record based on the patient’s history and physical examination. 11. Knows how to apply prevention methods for the various conditions appropriately. 12. Identifies and describes the various therapeutic procedures, both medical and surgical 13. Is able to keep their knowledge, skills and attitudes relating to professional competences up to date through a process of continuous professional development. 14. Identifies physical problems arising from gender-based violence within their field of practice 15. Is able to recognise and describe life-threatening situations 16. Knows how to perform basic and advanced life-support manoeuvres. 17. Is familiar with ways of involving the service user and their family in the recovery process. Training activities The number of hours of training activities and the percentage of face-to-face delivery are specified P1. – Lecture sessions 60 h 100% P2. Interactive classes 15 h 100% P3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities 15 hours 100% P4 – Preparation of assignments or projects and problem-solving 20 hours 0% P5. – Independent study, solving case studies or problems, and bibliographic research. 105 h 0% P6. Tutorials 6 h 100% P7. Knowledge tests 4 hours 100% Total hours of training activities 225 Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment criteria will be weighted according to the teaching and learning methodology used and the teaching workload of each component, in accordance with the following criteria. The final mark for the REGULAR EXAMINATION PERIOD will be based on the range of elements corresponding to all the activities carried out by the student, provided that the student has passed both the theory and practical components independently, that is to say, they have achieved at least 5 out of 10 in each of these parts. Otherwise, the mark will be the lowest mark obtained. Once this condition for assessment has been met, the following criteria will be applied: 1. SEMINAR ACTIVITIES AND SOLVING CASES AND/OR TESTS SET ON THE COURSE PORTAL OR IN CLASS (20%) The lecturer will set in-class activities to reinforce learning. Assessment will be based on: completion of the set activities, completion of the test for each block, and completion of any additional activities set. The mark obtained in this section will account for 20% of the overall mark for the course 2. ASSESSMENT OF THEORETICAL CONCEPTS: The assessment of theoretical concepts will be carried out as follows (70%): a) Throughout each semester, a series of eliminatory tests will be held on the material covered up to that point. In order to pass the module, the arithmetic mean of all tests must be 6 or higher, provided that no individual test mark is below 4 out of 10 and attendance is 70 per cent or higher. b) If, at the end of each semester, the arithmetic mean of the tests taken is below 6 or attendance is less than or equal to 70 per cent, the student must sit an examination covering the entire syllabus taught that semester in the ordinary examination session. The final mark for the theoretical component will be the average of the two semesters, provided that both semesters have a mark of 5 or above. Otherwise, the lower of the two marks obtained will be used. The assessment of theoretical concepts accounts for 70% of the overall mark for the module 3. ASSESSMENT OF PRACTICAL ELEMENTS (10%): Attendance at practical classes is compulsory. Absences (whether excused or unexcused) exceeding 20% will result in a fail for this part of the module. Practical work will be assessed on a continuous basis by the lecturer, taking into account attendance, student participation and the submission of assignments set by the lecturer. Where attendance is less than 80%, the assessment of practical work will consist of a practical examination. The practical mark accounts for 10 per cent of the overall mark for the module 4. CLASS ATTENDANCE: - PROVIDED that a mark of 5 or above has been obtained in the main examination session, attendance at lectures and/or seminars, as well as participation in these and/or extracurricular activities, may increase the student’s mark by up to one mark. Students who have not achieved a mark of 5 out of 10 in the ordinary examination session must sit the corresponding examination in the supplementary session, which consists of a test covering all the content taught in the lectures, seminars and practical sessions. The relevant weightings will be applied when a pass mark (a mark of 5 or above) is achieved in both theory and practicals. Otherwise, the lowest mark obtained will be recorded. EXTRAORDINARY EXAMINATION SESSION An examination covering all the course content will be held. The pass mark for this sitting will be 5 or above. With regard to the assessment criteria and weightings, the provisions for the ordinary sitting apply SE1. Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. – Final knowledge assessments 50 50 70 SE3. – Laboratory practicals workbook 5 10 SE4. Portfolio 5 10 Total 60 100 120 Bibliography Primary: 1. Cordero Ampuero, J. Gómez Barrena, E Traumatology and Orthopaedics. General Principles ELSEVIER. 2019. ISBN: 9788491131571 2. Dorland Illustrated Pocket Medical Dictionary McGraw-Hill. 1998. 3. Gonzalez Mas Medical Rehabilitation Masson. 1995. ISBN: 84-458-0483-9 4. Harrison Principles of Internal Medicine McGraw-Hill. 2003. ISBN: 970-10-5165-3 5. Klaus Buckup Clinical Tests for Bone, Joint and Muscle Disorders Masson. 2005. ISBN: 844581118 6. Mc Gowan, P Essentials of the Respiratory System Masson. 2008. ISBN: 9788481747331 7. Pastrana Delgado, J BASIC PATHOPHYSIOLOGY AND GENERAL PATHOLOGY FOR HEALTH SCIENCES ELSEVIER. 2023. ISBN: 9788413821641 8.- Pastrana Delgado, Juan, Garcia de Cassasola Sánchez, Gonzalo Basic Pathophysiology and General Pathology Elsevier. 2013. ISBN: 9788480869461 Supplementary: 9. Andrés Combalia Traumatology and Orthopaedics. Lower Limb ELSEVIER. 2022. ISBN: 9788491135524 10. Berquist, Thomas H. Compendium of Diagnostic Imaging in Musculoskeletal Pathology Madrid: McGraw-Hill, 2004. 2004. ISBN: 9788448605551 11. Cabrero Faile Radiological Imaging Elsevier. 2007. ISBN: 84-458-14450- 12. Ehmer, B. Physiotherapy in Orthopaedics and Traumatology Interamericana. 2005. ISBN: 8448606566 13. Fernando Marco Martínez Traumatology and Orthopaedics: Upper Limb ELSEVIER. 2022. ISBN: 9788491135012 14. Goodman Medical Pathology for Physiotherapists McGraw-Hill-Interamericana. 2002. ISBN: 84-486-0360-5 15.- J. Larry Jameson, Anthony S. Fauci, Dennis L. Kasper, Stephen L. Hauser, Dan L. Longo, Joseph Loscalzo Harrison: Principles of Internal Medicine, 2nd Edition. McGraw-Hill Interamericana de España. 2018. ISBN: 9781456264864 16. Lucio Ventura Ríos Manual of Musculoskeletal Ultrasound Panamericana. 2010. ISBN: 978-607-7743- 17. Pleguezuelos, Miranda, Gómez and Capellas Principles of Cardiac Rehabilitation Panamericana. 2010. ISBN: 978-84-9835-2 18. Rafael Gonzalez Días Traumatology and Orthopaedics. Spine and Paediatric Orthopaedics ELSEVIER. 2022. ISBN: 9788413823249 19. Ronald McRae Practical Management of Fractures McGraw Hill-Interamericana. 1998. ISBN: 84-486-0186-6 20. Tomás Jolín, Antonio Silvestre Pathology of the Musculoskeletal System Sintesis. 1996. ISBN: 84-7738-410-X 21. Walter F. Boron, MD, PhD and Emile L. Boulpaep, MD Handbook of Medical Physiology ELSEVIER. 2022. ISBN: 9788413821313 Links Assistive Technology Centre – This page describes the different types of assistive technology available in Spain Spanish Physiotherapy Association – This is the AEFI website. Spanish Centre for Documentation on Disability – Provides extensive documentary information. It is part of the Royal Board for the Prevention of Disability |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0330508 | Physical activity and health | OB | 8 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Physical activity and healthCódigo: 0330508 Imprimir Year 3. Annual module. Compulsory. 8 credits. Profesores
Objectives The objectives of the degree programme are aligned with the competences/learning outcomes set out in the Resolution of 18 September 2018 of the General Secretariat for Universities, publishing the Agreement of the Council of Universities of 17 September 2018, which sets out recommendations for universities’ submission of verification reports for the official Bachelor’s degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences. In this regard, the following objectives are set out • To understand, develop and be able to apply the procedures, strategies, activities, resources, techniques and methods involved in the teaching-learning process efficiently, carrying out these activities throughout the course of action across all areas of professional practice in physical activity and sport (formal and informal physical and sporting education; physical and sports training; physical exercise for health; management of physical activity and sport). • To design and apply the methodological process comprising observation, reflection, analysis, diagnosis, implementation, technical and scientific evaluation and/or dissemination in different contexts and across all sectors of professional practice in physical activity and sport. • Be able to guide, design, implement and evaluate physical exercise and physical fitness at an advanced level, based on scientific evidence, across different settings, contexts and types of activities for the entire population, with an emphasis on specific groups such as: older people (the elderly), schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking gender and diversity into account. • To design and implement, with fluency, naturalness, awareness and consistency, physical exercise and physical conditioning programmes that are appropriate, efficient, systematic, varied and based on scientific evidence, for the development of processes of adaptation and improvement or rehabilitation of specific abilities in each individual in relation to human movement and its optimisation; with the aim of resolving unstructured, increasingly complex and unpredictable problems, with an emphasis on special populations. • Be able to rehabilitate, retrain and/or re-educate individuals, groups or teams with injuries and medical conditions (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), whether they compete or not, through physical and sporting activities and physical exercises suited to their characteristics and needs. • Demonstrate an advanced level of competence in the planning, implementation, monitoring and evaluation of physical and sports training programmes. • Be able to promote, advise on, design, implement and evaluate, from a technical and scientific perspective, appropriate and varied programmes of physical activity, physical exercise and sport, adapted to the individual and group needs, requirements and characteristics of the entire population, with an emphasis on older people (the elderly), women and people from diverse backgrounds, schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor). • To organise and implement programmes for the promotion, guidance, coordination, supervision and technical-scientific evaluation of physical activity, exercise and sport for the entire population, with a focus on specific population groups, whether led by a professional or undertaken independently by the individual, in various settings and across all sectors of professional practice relating to physical activity and sport (formal and informal physical and sporting education; physical and sports training; health-related physical exercise; management of physical activity and sport) in accordance with citizens’ capabilities and needs, with the aim of fostering their autonomy, understanding, and the greatest possible and appropriate engagement in physical activity and sport. • To fluently develop procedures and protocols for solving unstructured, unpredictable and increasingly complex problems, by articulating and applying a mastery of the elements, methods, processes, activities, resources and techniques that make up basic motor skills, physical activities, sporting skills, play, expressive movement and dance activities, and outdoor activities in an appropriate, efficient, systematic, varied and methodologically integrated manner for the entire population, with an emphasis on specific groups such as: older people (the elderly), schoolchildren, people with disabilities and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking into account gender and diversity, and across any sector of professional practice within physical activity and sport (formal and informal physical and sporting education; physical and sports training; health-related physical exercise; management of physical activity and sport). • To fluently develop procedures and protocols to solve unstructured, unpredictable and increasingly complex problems, by articulating and applying a command of the elements, methods, procedures, activities, resources, techniques and processes relating to physical fitness and physical exercise in an appropriate, efficient, systematic, diverse and methodologically integrated manner for the entire population, with an emphasis on specific groups such as: older people (the elderly), schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking into account gender and diversity, and across any sector of professional practice within physical activity and sport. • To identify, organise, direct, plan, coordinate, implement and carry out technical and scientific evaluation of the various types of physical and sporting activities adapted to the development, characteristics and needs of individuals and the nature of the activity, venue and organisation, across all types of physical activity and sport services, including sporting events, and within any type of organisation, population, context, setting and group, with an emphasis on specific populations such as: older people (the elderly), schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor) and in any sector of professional practice within physical activity and sport (formal and informal physical education and sport; physical and sports training; physical exercise for health; management of physical activity and sport), ensuring safety, efficiency and professionalism in the work carried out in compliance with current regulations. • To articulate and present, with rigour and a scientific approach, the rationale upon which to consistently and professionally develop, support, substantiate and justify all actions, decisions, processes, procedures, interventions, activities, tasks, conclusions, reports and professional performance. • Understand and be able to apply ethical and deontological principles, as well as those of social justice, in professional practice and engagement; demonstrate a commitment to scientific and professional rigour; and maintain a consistent attitude of service to the public in the exercise of their professional practice, with a view to achieving improvement, excellence, quality and efficiency. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been established. Competencies The main competences related to the subjects covered in this module that students will acquire upon completion are as follows: 1) C.E.78. To be familiar with the main developments in current scientific evidence relating to physical activity and health, and to the design of health-oriented physical activity programmes. 2) C.E.79. To design health-oriented physical activity and fitness programmes, following an assessment of the characteristics and needs of the participants for whom they are intended. 3) C.E.80. To be familiar with and able to utilise the main sources of literature relating to physical activity and health. 4) C.E.81. Understand the theoretical foundations of the most common pathological processes and the prescription of individualised exercise programmes for each case. 5) C.E.82. The inclusion of pupils with special educational needs is one of the challenges currently facing graduates with a degree in Physical Activity and Sport. Both at a conceptual and legislative level, there is unanimous agreement that all children have the same rights to receive a quality education that takes into account both their potential and their limitations, not to be discriminated against on account of the nature of their particular conditions, and therefore, to be included, just like any other pupil, in the classroom and in any other setting, be it extracurricular, recreational or sporting. 6) C.E.83. To be familiar with the main physical, mental and sensory disabilities. 7) C.E.84. Understand the importance of physical activity programmes in the inclusion of children with special educational needs. 8) C.E.85. Plan activities adapted to pupils with special educational needs. 9) C.E.86. Make appropriate use of ICT and other resources to find information relating to physical activity and health. Relation to the degree programme’s learning outcomes This module specifically contributes to the following competences defined for the degree programme as a whole, although there are other competences to which it may also contribute: 1) C.E.5. Assess physical fitness and prescribe health-oriented physical exercises. 2) C.E.6. Promote and evaluate the development of lasting and independent habits of physical activity and sport amongst the adult population, older people and people with disabilities. 3) C.E.7. Identify the health risks arising from the practice of inappropriate physical activities amongst people who engage in health-oriented physical activity. Learning outcomes The elements that can be used to assess competences in in terms of learning outcomes will include, amongst others, the following: - Demonstrating sufficient knowledge of the various content modules content modules set out through the completion of theoretical and practical questions. - Carrying out assignments and practical work applying the subject-specific the subject. - Carry out a basic assessment of a subject’s state of health prior to commencing an exercise programme. - Assessment of the parameters of healthy physical fitness. - Solve practical case studies involving the prescription of exercise for health for different types of individuals. - Basic assessment of the main physical, mental and sensory impairments. Course content First term: A) Unit 1: Theoretical content. 1. Fundamentals of Physical Activity applied to Health: Benefits and Risks. 2. Health assessment: Pre-exercise assessment. 3. Health-related fitness tests and interpretation. 4. General principles of exercise prescription Unit 2: Pre-registration for physical exercise applied to health. 5. Physical activity for the healthy population with special considerations: children and adolescents, older adults and pregnancy. 6. Physical activity for people with cardiovascular and pulmonary conditions: cardiovascular, peripheral arterial and pulmonary diseases. B) Practical content: 1. Training variables to be monitored in fitness and health programmes: metabolic calculations and methods for prescribing exercise intensity. 2. Health assessment: Risks and benefits of physical activity. 3. Exercise planning and programming in health-focused fitness programmes. 4. Exercise dose-response for the healthy population, with special consideration. Second term: A) Theoretical content: 7. Exercise prescription for people with metabolic disorders and risk factors for cardiovascular disease: diabetes mellitus, dyslipidaemia, hypertension, metabolic syndrome, overweight and obesity. Unit 3: 8. Exercise prescription for populations with other chronic diseases and health problems: arthritis, cancer, fibromyalgia, kidney disease, multiple sclerosis, osteoporosis, spinal cord injury, multiple chronic diseases and health disorders. 9. Brain health and brain-related disorders: Attention deficit disorders, Alzheimer’s disease, anxiety and depression, cerebral palsy and Parkinson’s disease. Unit 4: 10. Behavioural theories and strategies to promote exercise. B) Practical content: 5. Assessing exercise intensity for people with metabolic disorders 6. Assessing exercise intensity for people with cardiovascular disease 7. Designing exercise programmes for people with chronic conditions 8. Designing exercise programmes focused on brain health. 9. Student-led sessions and presentations. Training activities The training activities designed to enable students to acquire the intended competences during this module and to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: 1) Lectures on concepts relating to the practice of health-oriented physical and sporting activities (60 hours). 2) Practical classes in laboratories and sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making within the fields of physical activity and health, and physical activity and sport for people with disabilities (30 hours). 3) Individual and group tutorials (8 hours). 4) Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work carried out both individually and in groups, etc. (71 hours). 5) Oral, written and practical assessments (6 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT The elements to be taken into account in the assessment and their weightings shall be as follows: 1. Final knowledge assessments (50%) This section will comprise the following parts: January ordinary examination (30%): This will consist of two parts: • 40 single-choice multiple-choice questions, with one correct answer deducted for every three incorrect answers. • A case study related to the course content. To pass both parts, the minimum mark required is 5; under no circumstances may a mark lower than 5 be averaged in. June ordinary examination (20%): • 40 single-answer multiple-choice questions, with one correct answer deducted for every three incorrect answers. To pass, the minimum mark required is 5; under no circumstances may a mark lower than 5 be used to pass. Should a student fail either of these assessments during the regular examination sessions, they must retake it in July during the supplementary examination session. 2. Practical activities (30%): Submission of individual and group learning activities (10%), as well as performance during practical sessions or in the presentation of these activities, with this weighting divided into 5% in the first term and 5% in the second term. This will account for 10% of the overall mark for the module and may determine whether the student achieves a PASS (5 marks). If a ‘FAIL’ is obtained, this must be remedied by completing a remedial assignment. Final course project (20 per cent): in which the student will apply the skills, knowledge and competences acquired during the course. This will account for 30 per cent of the overall mark, with a mark ranging from 5 to 10 points, and will allow students to make up for the previous section should they have been assessed as ‘FAIL’. 3. Portfolio (20%): First term practical workbook (10%); to achieve a PASS, a minimum mark of 5 must be obtained, whilst meeting the minimum assessment criteria set out in the assessment rubric. If a ‘FAIL’ is obtained, this must be remedied by completing a remedial assignment. Second term practical workbook (10 per cent): to achieve a ‘PASS’, a minimum mark of 5 must be obtained, whilst meeting the minimum assessment criteria set out in the assessment rubric. This percentage includes the possibility of undertaking supplementary activities such as ‘U-LAB’; should these take place, the weighting would be divided into 5% for the submission of laboratory assignments and 5% for the completion of the U-Lab. If a ‘FAIL’ is obtained, students must retake the module by completing a resit assignment. To be eligible for the continuous assessment model, the following attendance criteria apply: o Attendance at laboratory sessions: Attendance at laboratory sessions is COMPULSORY. The maximum number of absences permitted for these is 20 per cent. o Overall attendance for the module: Overall attendance for all classes (lectures + laboratory sessions) must be 70 per cent. Passing the module is conditional upon achieving a mark of 5 or above in each of the sections mentioned above. Failure to achieve the minimum mark of 5 in any of these sections will mean that the student is required to sit an examination covering all the content covered during the course, in the ordinary or supplementary examination session set by the University. Students who DO NOT MEET the attendance requirement must be assessed under the NON-CONTINUOUS (final) ASSESSMENT model. Students who do not meet the requirements for the continuous assessment model (attendance, submission of practical work, assignments and tasks) may opt for the ‘Final Assessment Model’. In this case, their mark will depend exclusively on the results obtained in the corresponding examinations during the official examination sessions. To this end, the mark in this case will be allocated as follows: Theoretical and practical test: 100% • Theoretical part: 60% • Practical part: 40% To pass both parts, students must achieve a minimum mark of 5. Furthermore, it is essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in the practical part in order for the mark to be averaged with the theoretical part. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
Bibliography Basic: 1. American College of Sports Medicine ACSM Manual for the Assessment and Prescription of Exercise Barcelona: Paidotribo. 2014. ISBN: 8499104258 2. American College of Sports Medicine Reference Manual for the Monitoring and Prescription of Exercise Barcelona: Paidotribo, 2000. 2000. ISBN: 8480194340 3. Heyward, V.H. Assessment and Prescription of Exercise Paidotribo. 2004. ISBN: 8480192607 4. Luis López Mojares Physical Activity and Health for Executives and Professionals Cie Inversiones Editoriales Dossat. 2002. ISBN: 8495312875 5. Souchard, P.E. Active Global Stretching I. Paidotribo. 2000. ISBN: 8480192852 Supplementary: 6. American College of Sports Medicine ACSM’s Metabolic Calculations Handbook Lippincott Williams. 2005. ISBN: 0781742382 7.- Souchard, P.E. Active Global Stretching II Paidotribo. 2006. ISBN: 8480193727 Links National Strength and Conditioning Association – NSCA website: National (American) Strength and Conditioning Association American College of Sports Medicine – Website of the American College of Sports Medicine |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0330509 | Teaching Physical Activity and Sport I | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Teaching Physical Activity and Sport ICódigo: 0330509 Imprimir Year 3. Annual module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives 1. To understand and analyse the basic and fundamental concepts of motor learning. 2. To understand and apply the basic principles of teaching physical activity in primary and compulsory secondary education (ESO). 3. To distinguish between and apply the different teaching styles, depending on the educational context. 4. To be able to develop a teaching unit (TU) and apply it at the different stages of the Spanish education system. 5. To analyse, understand and apply assessment criteria and tools in any educational process, thereby monitoring that teaching and learning process. 6. Be able to creatively design learning tools related to ICT (Information and Communication Technologies), curricular adaptations, the organisation of the school, and current legislation relating to our education system. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been established. Competencies Course competences: 1) C.E.57. To study the process of acquiring different motor skills, analysing the factors involved in this process. 2) C.E.58. Understand and apply the basic principles of teaching Physical Activity and Sport. 3) Learning Outcome 59. Distinguish between existing teaching styles and know how to apply them according to the context in which we find ourselves. 4) Learning Outcome 60. Understand the current structure of the Spanish education system. 5) Learning Outcome 61. To understand the planning processes in Physical Education and know how to apply them to any year group within the secondary education stage. 6) C.E.62. Be familiar with and know how to apply assessment criteria and tools in different educational contexts, thereby learning to monitor the teaching and learning process. 7) C.E.63. To be familiar with and know how to apply Information and Communication Technologies (ICT) in an educational context. 8) C.E.64. Understand the functioning and organisation of the school. Qualification competences: 1. Learning Outcome 1. To design, develop and evaluate teaching and learning processes relating to physical activity and sport, taking into account the individual and contextual characteristics of participants. 2. Learning Outcome 2. To promote and evaluate the development of lasting and independent habits of physical activity and sport amongst the school population. Learning outcomes The elements that may be used to assess the learning outcomes in terms of learning outcomes will include, amongst others, the following: 1. Demonstrate sufficient knowledge of the various content areas covered by answering theoretical questions. 2. Carry out projects applying the concepts covered in secondary school PE lessons. 3. Draw up an annual PE programme for any year group within the stage 4. Applying the theoretical concepts covered in class to real-life situations through practical scenarios. 5. Understand how different pedagogical variables influence the teaching and learning process. 6. Independently develop any topic through research and personal study 7. Understand how to apply the principles and models of pedagogical intervention in any educational context. 8. Make appropriate use of ICT Course content description BLOCK I: MOTOR LEARNING TOPIC 0 – INTRODUCTION. FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS OF MOTOR DEVELOPMENT. TOPIC 1.- BASIC CONSIDERATIONS REGARDING MOTOR AND SPORTS LEARNING. TOPIC 2. – THEORIES AND MODELS OF LEARNING. TOPIC 3.- MOTOR CONTROL AND LEARNING. TOPIC 4. THE ACQUISITION OF MOTOR AND SPORTING SKILLS. TOPIC 5.- COGNITIVE VARIABLES IN MOTOR LEARNING. BLOCK II: TEACHING PHYSICAL ACTIVITY AND SPORT. BASIC CONCEPTS. TOPIC 1.- TEACHING UNIT. TOPIC 2.- FUNDAMENTALS OF TEACHING METHODOLOGY. TOPIC 3.- TEACHING TECHNIQUES. DIDACTIC COMMUNICATION. TOPIC 4.- ORGANISATION AND MONITORING OF PHYSICAL ACTIVITY AND SPORT. TOPIC 5. – THE CURRICULUM: VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE TOOLS. BLOCK III: PLANNING AND PROGRAMMING IN THE EDUCATIONAL AND PHYSICAL-SPORTING CONTEXT. TOPIC 1. – THE EDUCATION SYSTEM. TOPIC 2.- THE CURRICULUM. CONCEPT, LEVELS OF SPECIFICATION AND TYPES. TOPIC 3. – BASIC COMPETENCIES, OBJECTIVES AND EDUCATIONAL CONTENT. TOPIC 4. PROGRAMMING IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION. TOPIC 5. PHYSICAL EDUCATION SESSIONS. TOPIC 6.- ASSESSMENT IN THE FIELD OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND SPORT. TOPIC 7.- ADDRESSING DIVERSITY AMONGST PUPILS. TOPIC 8.- RESOURCES AND TEACHING MATERIALS IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION. BLOCK IV – METHODS AND TECHNIQUES FOR TEACHING PHYSICAL ACTIVITY AND SPORT. TOPIC 1. TEACHING STYLES: CONCEPT AND CLASSIFICATION. TOPIC 2. – TRADITIONAL TEACHING STYLES. TOPIC 3. TEACHING STYLES THAT PROMOTE INDIVIDUALISED TEACHING. TOPIC 4.- TEACHING STYLES THAT ENABLE PUPIL PARTICIPATION. TOPIC 5. TEACHING STYLES THAT ENGAGE STUDENTS COGNITIVELY. TOPIC 6.- TEACHING STYLES THAT ENABLE STUDENT PARTICIPATION AND PROMOTE CREATIVITY. TOPIC 7.- TEACHING PROGRESSIONS. Training activities 1. Lectures on concepts relating to the teaching processes of physical activity and sport (30 hours). 2. Seminars, workshops, etc. (30 hours). 3. Individual and group tutorials (8 hours). 4. Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work, both individually and in groups, etc. (83 hours). 5. Oral, written and practical assessments (5 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the regular examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT. The continuous assessment section is organised into three components: Final knowledge assessments, Practical activities and Portfolio. For this module, the weightings established for each section are: • Final knowledge assessments: 60% This section includes the final submissions covering the theoretical content taught in class • Practical activities: 30% Throughout the course, various seminars will be held, with assignments to be prepared and submitted during class time • Portfolio: 10% Submission of all work completed during the course, in a timely and appropriate manner TO BE ELIGIBLE FOR CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT, ATTENDANCE AT BOTH THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL CLASSES IS MANDATORY FOR AT LEAST 70 PER CENT OF THEM. NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT. 100 per cent of the mark will be based on a single theoretical and practical examination. This examination will be divided into two parts: • Theoretical part: 60% • Practical part: 40% It is an essential requirement to achieve a minimum mark of 5 out of 10 in the practical part in order for this to be averaged with the theoretical part. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
Bibliography Core: 1. Bravo Berrocal, Rafael Educational and complementary activities in the natural environment: games Archidona (Málaga): Aljibe, 1998. 1998. ISBN: 8487767850 2. Calzada Arija, Amando Curriculum project for Secondary Education (E.S.O.) and the first year of the Baccalaureate Madrid: Gymnos, 1995. 1995. ISBN: 8480130350 3. Castejón Oliva, Francisco Javier Evaluation of Physical Education Programmes Madrid: Gymnos, 1996. 1996. ISBN: 8480130458 4. Castillo Arredondo, Santiago Theoretical Foundations of Physical Education; Learning and Motor Development Madrid: National University of Distance Education, 1998Physical description: v.; 24 cm ISBN: 84-362-3767-6 Subjects: Physical education Primary education Pedagogy Motor learning Motor development Authors: Castillo Arredondo, Santiago A. 1998. ISBN: 8436237676 5. Cratty, Bryant J. Perceptual and Motor Development in Children Barcelona: Paidós, 1982. 1982. ISBN: 8475091946 6. F. Ureña … [et al.] Didactic Aspects of Physical Education. 3 / Zaragoza: University, Institute of Educational Sciences. 1995. ISBN: 8477911320 7. Fernández Truán, Juan Carlos The didactic application of material resources in the design of the Physical Education curriculum [Seville]: San Pablo Andalucía Foundation Publishing House, 1999. ISBN: 8492225289 8. Galera, Antonio D. A Handbook of Physical Education Pedagogy: A Multicultural Perspective Barcelona; Buenos Aires; Mexico: Paidós, 2001. 2001. ISBN: 8449310717 9. García, Antonio Learning and Teaching in Physical Education: The Challenge of Implementing Reflective Practices Córdoba, Argentina: Institute for Physical Education Teachers, [2001]. 2001. ISBN: 9879540743 10. Gil Madrona, Pedro Evaluation of the Physical Education Curriculum in Teaching Madrid: Gymnos, 1999. 1999. ISBN: 8480131543 11. Gomendio, Margarita Physical Education for the Integration of Children with Special Needs Madrid: Gymnos. 2000. ISBN: 848013240X 12. Granda, Juan Manual on Motor Learning and Development: A Perspective on Barcelona: Paidós, 2002. 2002. ISBN: 8449312744 13.- J. Gazol...[et al.] Didactic Aspects of Physical Education. 2 / Zaragoza: Institute of Educational Sciences, University of Zaragoza, 1998. ISBN: 8477911576 14. Conference on the Didactics of Physical Education (1st, 1994, Granada) Proceedings of the 1st Conference on the Didactics of Physical Education Seville: Regional Government of Andalusia, Department of Education and Science [etc.], 1994. ISBN: 8487387748 15. Le Boulch, Jean Psychomotor Development from Birth to Age 6 Barcelona: Paidós, 1999. 1999. ISBN: 8449300967 16. Le Boulch, Jean Education through Movement in School-Age Children Barcelona; Buenos Aires; Mexico: Paidós, 1996. 1996. ISBN: 8475091172 17. LUIS MIGUEL RUIZ PEREZ Development, Motor Behaviour and Sport Madrid: Síntesis, 2001. 2001. ISBN: 8477388261 18. Mosston, Muska Teaching Physical Education: The Reform of Teaching Methods Barcelona: Hispano Europea, 1996. 1996. ISBN: 842550970X 19. Piéron, Maurice Teaching Physical and Sporting Activities Madrid: Gymnos, 1988. 1988. ISBN: 8485945441 20. R. Gericó... [et al.] Didactic Aspects of Physical Education, 1 / Zaragoza: University of Zaragoza, Institute of Educational Sciences. 1985. ISBN: 8460038521 21.- R. Pérez... [et al.] Didactic aspects of physical education. 5 / Zaragoza: Institute of Educational Sciences, University of Zaragoza. 2004. ISBN: 8477912106 22. Ruiz Pérez, Luis Miguel Sport and learning: processes of acquisition and development 2nd ed. Madrid: Visor, 1997. 1997. ISBN: 847774095X 23. Ruiz Pérez, Luis Miguel Motor Development and Physical Activities Madrid: Gymnos, 1994. 1994. ISBN: 8485945336 24. Sánchez Bañuelos, Fernando Foundations for the Teaching of Physical Education and Sport 2nd ed. Madrid: Gymnos, 1992. 1992. ISBN: 848594531X 25. Seners, Patrick The Physical Education Lesson Barcelona: INDE. 2001. ISBN: 8495114496 26. Various authors Motor Control and Learning Madrid: Síntesis, 1999. 1999. ISBN: 8477386870 27. Various authors Fundamentals of Motor Skills: Theoretical, Practical and Madrid: Gymnos, 2000. 2000. ISBN: 8480132833 28. Various authors Physical Education in Secondary Schools: Development of Teaching Materials Barcelona: INDE, 1997. 1997. ISBN: 8487330673 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0330510 | Sports specialisation | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Sports specialisationCódigo: 0330510 Imprimir Year 3. Annual module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The objectives of the degree programme are aligned with the competences/learning outcomes set out in the Resolution of 18 September 2018 of the General Secretariat for Universities, publishing the Agreement of the Council of Universities of 17 September 2018, which sets out recommendations for universities’ proposals for verification reports for the official Bachelor’s degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences. In this regard, the following objectives are set out: • To understand, develop and be able to apply the procedures, strategies, activities, resources, techniques and methods involved in the teaching-learning process efficiently, carrying out the entire course of action across all areas of professional practice in physical activity and sport (formal and informal physical and sporting education; physical and sports training; physical exercise for health; management of physical activity and sport). • To be able to guide, design, implement and evaluate physical exercise and physical fitness at an advanced level, based on scientific evidence, across different settings, contexts and types of activities for the entire population, with an emphasis on specific groups such as: older people (the elderly), schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking gender and diversity into account. • To identify, communicate and apply scientific anatomical, physiological and biomechanical criteria at an advanced level of proficiency in the design, development and technical-scientific evaluation of appropriate procedures, strategies, actions, activities and guidelines; to prevent, minimise and/or avoid health risks associated with the practice of physical activity and sport across all population groups. • Design and implement, with fluency, ease, awareness and consistency, physical exercise and physical conditioning programmes that are appropriate, efficient, systematic, varied and based on scientific evidence, to facilitate the processes of adaptation and improvement or rehabilitation of specific abilities in each individual in relation to human movement and its optimisation; with the aim of being able to solve unstructured, increasingly complex and unpredictable problems, with an emphasis on special populations. • Demonstrate an advanced level of proficiency in the analysis, design and evaluation of tests for assessing and monitoring physical fitness and physical and sporting performance. • Demonstrate an advanced level of competence in the planning, implementation, monitoring and evaluation of physical and sports training programmes. • To articulate and demonstrate, with rigour and a scientific approach, the rationale upon which to consistently and professionally develop, support, substantiate and justify all actions, decisions, processes, procedures, interventions, activities, tasks, conclusions, reports and professional performance. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been established Course content • General Principles • History, Terminology and General Aspects • Interpretation and Application of the Rules of the Game • General and specific dynamic coordination. Skills and abilities. • Technique and tactics of the sport. • Regulations Training Activities The training activities to be carried out to ensure that students acquire the intended competences during this module and are able to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: 1) Lectures on concepts relating to the fundamentals of human motor skills: sports, games, dance, physical expression, etc. (30 hours). 2) Practical sessions in laboratories or sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making (30 hours). 3) Individual and group tutorials (7 hours). 4) Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work carried out both individually and in groups, etc. (77 hours). 5) Oral, written and practical assessments (6 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- For each sport, the general assessment criteria shall be as follows: CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: The final mark for the module will be out of 10 and may be obtained through continuous assessment throughout the course or by sitting the non-continuous assessment. - Final knowledge assessments (50%). A theoretical and practical examination will be held, which may consist of multiple-choice questions, short-answer or essay questions, or practical case studies. For multiple-choice questions, correct answers will be marked, bearing in mind that incorrect answers will result in a percentage deduction based on the number of answers provided. The exam will be marked out of 10 marks. - Practical activities (50%). One or more assignments to be completed in accordance with the regulations. The total mark for these assignments will be out of 10 marks. NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: If students opt for the final assessment or forfeit their right to continuous assessment, they must sit the COURSE EXAMS IN MAY OR JULY. - Final knowledge assessments (100%) Final exam 100%. The exam covering theoretical and practical content may consist of multiple-choice questions, short-answer or essay questions, or practical case studies. For multiple-choice questions, correct answers will be marked, bearing in mind that incorrect answers will result in a percentage deduction based on the number of options in the question. The exam will be marked out of 10 marks. The theoretical section will account for 60% of the final mark. The practical section will account for 40% of the final mark. It is an essential requirement to achieve a minimum mark of 5 out of 10 in the practical section in order for it to be averaged with the theoretical section. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0330511 | New trends in fitness training | OB | 8 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
New trends in fitness trainingCódigo: 0330511 Imprimir Year 3. Annual module. Compulsory. 8 credits. Profesores
Objectives 1. To learn about the latest training trends in the fitness sector 2. To understand and identify the strengths and weaknesses of programmes based on new training trends 3. To improve motor skills through practical exercises. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Course content 1. History and evolution of fitness. Components of fitness 2. The role of a personal trainer (current situation) 3. Online training / coaching 4. New technologies: force platforms, photoelectric sensors, massage guns, mobile apps 5. Wellness: Pilates method, hypopressive exercises, joint mobility, pelvic floor, foam roller. 6. Fitness: Olympic movements, group classes (Les Mills, F45 Training, Trib3), new hybrid sports disciplines (CrossFit, Hyrox, OCR), barefoot training (Animal Flow, Ground, Handstand), kettlebell training, functional training. 7. New training methods: occlusive training, variable load training, oscillatory training, post-activation potentiation. Training activities The training activities to be undertaken by students throughout the module will be as follows: - Lectures or masterclasses (30 hours). - Seminars, workshops, etc. (20 hours). - Practical classes (facilities, laboratory, etc.) (30 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (10 hours). - Assessment (6 hours). - Students’ independent work (study, e-learning, literature review, etc.) (79 hours). Assessment system and criteria System 1. Regarding class attendance: a) Students must attend at least 80 per cent of classes during the academic year. b) Each day of absence, or any lateness exceeding 10 minutes from the start of the class, will be counted as one absence. c) Students are responsible for keeping track of their own number of absences. If a student is absent from class for more than 3 days, they must contact the teacher immediately after the absence. d) After 3 absences, students lose the right to sit the pre-exam, in which they must achieve a mark of 6 points. This applies regardless of whether the absences are authorised or unauthorised. Assessment Criteria 1. CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT This applies to students who attend classes and meet the required attendance percentage. - Final knowledge assessments (60%) - Practical activities (40%) 2. NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT (final): 100% of the final mark is based on a theoretical and practical examination, with the following breakdown: o Theoretical section: 60% o Practical part: 40% It is essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in the practical section in order for this to be averaged with the theoretical section. * Students must submit ALL assignments requested in class on time and in the correct format. This means that students must upload the relevant practical assignment before the deadline, in the specific section allocated to each assignment. Any assignment submitted after the specified date and time, or submitted in a format other than that defined in class, will be counted as NOT SUBMITTED; a maximum of one assignment may be submitted on time and in the correct format. In such cases, the maximum mark will be 5 marks. If the second assignment is not submitted, it will be recorded as ‘not submitted’ and ‘not assessable’. (The practical workbook is excluded from this criterion). * Individual assignments must be unique; there must not be two identical assignments . If two assignments are found to have the same content and explanation, they will be considered as NOT SUBMITTED. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0330512 | Sports nutrition | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Sports nutritionCódigo: 0330512 Imprimir Year 3. Annual module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives This module aims to achieve the following objectives: 1- To provide students with a comprehensive overview of general nutrition so that they can understand the concepts associated with sports nutrition. 2- To teach students the methodology for conducting a proper nutritional assessment and interpreting the results in relation to a person’s state of health, and to adapt their diet to the sport they practise 3- To foster critical thinking in students so they can assess the accuracy of information received regarding nutrition and, in doing so, avoid the spread of false myths. 4- To develop tools for improving one’s daily diet, as well as a greater awareness of the use of food, supplements and other products consumed. 5- To address topics of interest relating to nutrition and dietetics, providing additional reference material to explore the subject in greater depth 6- To guide and evaluate the various initiatives that promote adherence to an active lifestyle and the regular, healthy participation in and practice of physical activity and sport. 7- Draw up appropriate nutritional recommendations tailored to the individual’s specific context, in line with the most up-to-date scientific knowledge in the field of sports nutrition 8- Understand the different macronutrients and know how to apply them in a sporting context to maximise performance or aid an athlete’s recovery under specific conditions Course content Syllabus THEORY TOPIC 1: Introduction to nutrition TOPIC 2: Energy substrates TOPIC 3: Proteins in physical activity and sport TOPIC 4: Carbohydrates in physical activity and sport TOPIC 5: Lipids in physical activity and sport TOPIC 6: Vitamins in physical activity and sport TOPIC 7: Minerals in physical activity and sport TOPIC 8: Hydration in physical activity and sport TOPIC 9: Functional foods and ergogenic aids SEMINARS SEM1: Food composition tables SM2: Recommended intakes. Dietary guidelines. Energy expenditure SM4: Miracle diets SM5: Eating disorders SM6: Nutritional assessment of athletes SM7: Assessment of sports drinks SM8: Nutrition in strength and endurance sports SM9: Nutrition in team sports Learning Activities The training activities to be undertaken by students throughout the module will be as follows: - Lectures or masterclasses (30 hours). - Practical classes (facilities, laboratory, etc.) (30 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (8 hours). - Assessment (5 hours). - Students’ independent work (study, e-learning, literature review, etc.) (70 hours). Assessment system and criteria In the course’s virtual classroom, you will be able to view in detail the activities you are required to complete, as well as the submission deadlines, assessment criteria and marking schemes for each one. To be eligible for CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT, a minimum attendance of 70 per cent at both theory and practical classes is compulsory. Failure to meet this requirement will result in the loss of the right to Continuous Assessment, and students will instead sit the non-continuous assessment during the official examination sessions. Continuous assessment will be allocated as follows: Final knowledge assessments (60%) -Exams assessing the knowledge acquired from the theoretical concepts studied in class. Practical activities (20%) - Solving practical case studies based on information previously studied in laboratory activities. Students will be set exercises to complete relating to the concepts covered in the session or will be asked to search for scientific articles on a specific topic, to develop critical reading skills. Portfolio (20%) - Compilation of a portfolio in which the theoretical concepts covered in class are applied in a practical manner. Non-continuous assessment will be distributed as follows: Theoretical-Practical Test (100%) - A written examination covering the theoretical knowledge of the subject (60%) - A practical examination assessing the practical skills acquired. It is an essential requirement to achieve a minimum mark of 5 out of 10 in the practical section in order for this to be averaged with the theoretical mark. (40%) The examinations will be multiple-choice, except for the practical cases, which may consist of solving a problem similar to those covered in class. Incorrect answers in the multiple-choice examination are marked negatively. In the course/module’s virtual classroom, you will be able to view in detail the activities you are required to complete, as well as the submission dates, assessment criteria and marking schemes for each one. 5.1. Ordinary examination session To pass the course/module in the ordinary assessment period, you must achieve a mark of 5.0 out of 10.0 or higher in the final mark (weighted average) for the course and, in addition: The average mark for all activities in each course/module must be 5.0 out of 10.0 or higher to be included in the overall average with the exam. Similarly, the exam mark must be 5.0 out of 10.0 or higher to be included in the overall average with the activities. 5.2. Extraordinary examination session To pass the module in the resit, students must achieve a final mark (weighted average) of 5.0 out of 10.0 or higher. Students must submit any assignments that were not passed during the ordinary examination period, after receiving the relevant feedback from the lecturer, or any assignments that were not submitted at all. Bibliography Essential: 1. Marcela Glez-Gross Sports Nutrition: From Physiology to Practice Panamericana. 2020. ISBN: 9788491106036 Supplementary: 2.- Ángel Gil Treatise on Nutrition 3rd ed. Panamericana. 2017. ISBN: 9788491101956 3. Jeukendrup, Asker, Sport Nutrition/ 4th ed. Human Kinetics, 2024. ISBN: 9781718221703 4. José Matáix Verdú Nutrition and Human Diet Ergon. 2009. ISBN: 9788484736646 5. Pablo Veiga Herreros Theoretical and Practical Handbook of Nutrition and Diet Bellisco. 2009. ISBN: 9788495277008 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0330513 | Theory and practice of sports training | OB | 8 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Theory and practice of sports trainingCódigo: 0330513 Imprimir Year 3. Annual module. Compulsory. 8 credits. Profesores
Objectives The course ‘Theory and Practice of Sports Training’ is designed with a view to students’ future professional roles as those responsible for improving the physical fitness of athletes and the general population, aiming to develop skills from a perspective grounded in scientific evidence. The overall objective of the module is to ensure that students acquire the fundamental knowledge (‘knowing’) and skills (‘knowing how to do’ and ‘knowing what to do’) necessary to: 1) assess the necessity and influence of each physical capacity on training and on general and specific motor performance, 2) interpret the principles governing the training of physical qualities and apply effective and safe stimuli to improve physical fitness; 3) design training programmes for athletes and the general population. Objectives 1 and 3 will be fully achieved following the completion of other modules such as ‘Functional Assessment of Physical and Sports Performance’ and ‘Organisation and Planning of Sports Training’. - To understand the principles of training, the concept of training load and its application to achieve adaptations. - Understand physical abilities and the methods for improving them in the general population and athletes. - To know how to apply the various training methods to improve physical fitness. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Competencies The main competences related to the subjects covered in this module that students will acquire upon completion are as follows: 1) C.E.65. To be familiar with and understand the effects that a training programme has on athletes’ physical fitness. 2) C.E.66. To master the key concepts of the sports training process. 3) C.E.67. To recognise and practise the different systems and methods for training physical qualities (strength, endurance, flexibility and speed). 4) Learning Outcome 68. To understand, develop and apply the basic concepts of sports training planning and delivery. 5) C.E.69. Apply training principles to different contexts related to the practice of physical activity and sport. (green, grey) 6) C.E.70. Understand and be able to develop the physical, technical and tactical skills required for the chosen sport. 7) C.E.71. Understand the methodology and specific training methods of the chosen sport. 8) C.E.72. Understand and analyse the characteristics of athletes from a physiological and biomechanical perspective. 9) C.E.73. Know how to plan and evaluate training and competition in the chosen sport. (green, purple) 10) C.E.74. Understand the benefits, limitations and interpretation of the main functional assessment tests used in the fields of health and sport. 11) C.E.75. To critically read articles from the scientific literature dealing with different aspects of exercise physiology and the functional assessment of physical performance. Relation to the degree programme’s learning outcomes This module specifically contributes to the following competences defined for the degree programme as a whole, although there are other competences to which it may also contribute: 1) C.E.3. Plan, develop and monitor the training process at its various levels. 2) C.E.4. Apply physiological, biomechanical and behavioural principles when supervising sports training. 3) C.E.5. Assess physical fitness and prescribe health-oriented physical exercises. 4) C.E.8. Plan, develop and evaluate the delivery of recreational physical and sporting activities. 5) C.E.10. Select and know how to use sports materials and equipment appropriate for each type of recreational physical and sporting activity. Learning outcomes The elements that may be used to assess competences in terms of learning outcomes include, amongst others, the following: • Demonstrate sufficient knowledge of the various content areas covered by answering theoretical questions. • Apply what is learnt in theory in class to real-life situations through practical scenarios. • To plan and periodise a season, or part of a season, in the chosen sport. • Independently develop any content through research and personal work. • Be able to apply the principles and methods of sports training to develop the various basic physical qualities, taking into account the relevant context. • Apply the technical and tactical knowledge acquired in relation to the chosen sport. • Carry out practical functional assessments of those abilities that can be evaluated through testing (e.g. joint mobility, strength, endurance, speed, etc.) • Make appropriate use of ICT. Course content Topic 1. Basic criteria for designing training programmes. Topic 2. Strength: concepts and training variables. Topic 3. Methodology and selection of exercises for strength training. Topic 4. Core control and stability training to improve performance and health. Topic 5. Speed: concepts, variables and training methodology. Topic 6. Endurance: concepts and training variables. Topic 7. Methodology and selection of exercises for endurance training Topic 8. Mobility/flexibility: concepts and training variables. Topic 9. Methodology and selection of exercises for range of motion and flexibility training. Topic 10. Introduction to new technologies for monitoring and tailoring training. Topic 1. Basic criteria for the design of training programmes 1.1. Definition of load/stimulus, its relationship to adaptation and its application to training. 1.2. Components of training load. 1.3. Training load and recovery. 1.4. The training process: analysis and update. 1.5. The systematisation of the training process: origins, evolution and review. 1.6. Programming: practical implementation and the decision-making process in training programmes. Topic 2. Strength: training concepts and variables. 2.1 The concept of strength, updated terminology and its application in the field of physical education and sport. 2.1.1. Applied force, Peak Force (PF) and Rate of Force Development (RFD). 2.1.2. Force-time and force-velocity curves: understanding and application to training. 2.1.3. Power as a result of strength training 2.1.2. Load-velocity curve: application for load control and the effects of training (“force-velocity profile”). 2.2. Strength deficit. 2.3. Strength training objectives by sport: analysis and strength requirements in sport. 2.4. Strength training in healthy physical conditioning programmes (ACFS). 2.5. Definition and decision-making regarding strength training load variables: 2.5.1. Training frequency (Fen). 2.5.2. Training volume (Ven). 2.5.3. Training intensity (Ien). 2.5.4. Nature of the effort (CE) and Effort Index (IE). 2.5.5. Recovery (Ren) and training density (Den). Topic 3. Methodology and selection of exercises for strength training. 3.1. Definition of a training method, analysis of proposals and updating. 3.2. Vertical Progression Methods: 3.2.1. Circuit Methods (General, Concentrated, Blocks) 3.2.2. Exercise Grouping Methods for a Set (AES) 3.3. Horizontal Progression Methods: 3.3.1. Methods of Grouping Sets for a Single Exercise (ASE): uniform load, variable load. 3.4. Criteria for the selection of exercises in strength training 3.4.1. Variables in exercise selection. 3.4.2. According to exercise characteristics: simple, combined and sequential. 3.4.3. According to the nature of the tasks: conditioning, technical-tactical-conditioning (integrated and comprehensive). 3.4.4. According to training focus/effects: GD (non-specific but useful), specific and competitive. Topic 4. Training of core control and stability to improve performance and health. 4.1. Terminological and conceptual analysis in relation to the concept of ‘core stability’ 4.2. Static and dynamic stability and their implications for performance and injury prevention 4.3. Fundamentals of ‘core’ training: 4.3.1. The neutral zone and its implications for health and performance. 4.3.2. Selection of exercises and methodology for improving core control and stability. 4.3.3. Variables for defining and controlling load in ‘core’ training: current proposals Topic 5. ‘Speed’: concepts, variables and training methodology. 5.1. ‘Speed’ as a resulting physical fitness capacity. 5.2. Criteria for improving execution speed in a sporting context. 5.3. Selection of exercises and training methods to improve ‘speed’ in sport. Topic 6. Endurance: concepts and training variables 6.1. Endurance: introduction and an update on terminology and concepts 6.2. Analysis and structure of endurance in sport for application to training 6.2.1. Endurance training in cyclic sports 6.2.2. Endurance training in complex non-cyclic sports 6.2.3. Endurance training in health and fitness programmes 6.3. Definition and decision-making regarding the variables of resistance training load: 6.3.1. Training frequency (Fen). 6.3.2. Training volume (Ven). 6.3.3. Training intensity (Ien). 6.3.4. Recovery (Ren) and training density (Den). 6.4. ‘Concurrent’ training: strength and endurance training Topic 7. Methodology and selection of exercises for endurance training. 7.1. Continuous Methods (CM): 7.1.1. Uniform CM. 7.1.2. Variable CM. 7.2. Interval Methods (IM): 7.2.1. Interval-Based Interval Methods (MFI). 7.2.2. Repetition-Based Interval Training (MFR). 7.2.3. ‘High-Intensity’ Interval Training (HIIT): a review of terminology and concepts. 7.2.4. Evidence and applications of HIIT: short and long HIIT intervals, RST, RSA. 7.2.5. Competition/Control Method (MCC). 7.2.6. Criteria for selecting exercises to improve endurance: analysis and practical applications. Topic 8. Range of Motion (ROM)/flexibility: concepts and training variables 8.1. Flexibility/range of motion (ROM) training: application to sporting performance and health. 8.1. Definition, factors and components of ROM/flexibility, 8.2. Joint mobility. 8.3. Concepts of ‘stretching’, elasticity, stiffness and compliance. 8.4. Laxity, stiffness and stability in relation to possible ROM dysfunctions. 8.5. Biostructural and neurophysiological foundations of flexibility/ROM training. 8.6. Requirements for ROM/flexibility in the context of sport. 8.7. Requirements for joint mobility and functional flexibility in healthy fitness programmes. Topic 9. Methodology and selection of exercises for ADM/flexibility training. 9.1. Flexibility/ADM within the basic structures of periodisation (intra-session). 9.2. Selection of exercises for flexibility/ADM training. 9.3. Methodology and techniques for flexibility/ADM training. 9.3.1. Static Stretching (SS): Passive Stretching (PS);;;;;;;; Active Stretching (AS);;;;;;;; Dynamic Stretching (DS). 9.3.2. Combined Techniques. 9.3.3. Stretching and Electrical Muscle Stimulation (EMS). 9.3.4. Myofascial self-release. 9.3.5. Review of proposals and controversies regarding ‘stretching’. Topic 10. Introduction to new technologies for monitoring and measuring training load. 10.1. Technology for the assessment and monitoring of strength training load. 10.2. Technology for the assessment and monitoring of endurance training load. 10.3. Technology for the assessment and monitoring of training load to improve core stability. 10.4. Technology for the assessment and monitoring of training load to improve range of motion (ROM) and flexibility. Training activities 1. Lectures (MG) on concepts relating to sports training, as well as those relating to the technical and tactical aspects applied to sports training (60 hours) 2. Practical sessions (LB) in laboratories and sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually acquire the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making within the field of sports training and the functional assessment of physical performance (30 hours). 3. Individual and group tutorials (10 hours). 4. Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work carried out both individually and in groups, etc. (79 hours). 5. Oral, written and practical assessment tests (7 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the ordinary examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The final mark for the module will be out of 10, and may be obtained through: A. CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT This applies to students who attend classes and meet the required attendance rate (70 per cent). Final knowledge assessments (60%) Practical activities (40%) B. NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT (final): 100% of the final mark is based on a theoretical and practical examination, with the following breakdown: Theoretical section: 60% Practical part: 40% It is essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in the practical section in order for this to be averaged with the theoretical section. Addendum The use of artificial intelligence (AI)-based tools in the preparation of this work is restricted to auxiliary functions such as grammar checking, the generation of outlines or the search for general information. Any use of AI must be properly cited, specifying the tool used, its specific function and when it was applied. The use of AI to draft substantial content, carry out critical analysis or interpret results compromises the originality and authorship of the work. Checks for plagiarism and/or the use of AI will be carried out using the tool provided on the virtual campus and will be assessed by the tutor to verify the integrity of the work submitted. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
Bibliography Essential: 1. González Badillo, Juan José Fundamentals of Strength Training Programming Barcelona: INDE, 2002. 2002. ISBN: 8497290135 2. Juan José González Badillo Fundamentals of Strength Training: Application to High-Performance Sport INDE. 1997. ISBN: 848733038 X 3. Fernando Navarro Valdivielso Endurance Madrid: Gymnos, 1998. 1998. ISBN: 8480131144 Further reading: 4. García Manso, Juan Manuel Theoretical Foundations of Sports Training: Principles and Applications Madrid: Gymnos, 1996. 1996. ISBN: 8480130539 5. González Ravé, José María Sports Training: Madrid: Médica Panamericana, 2014. 2014. ISBN: 9788498357837 6. Naclerio, Fernando Sports Training Buenos Aires: Editorial Médica Panamericana, 201. 2011. ISBN: 9788498353310 0. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 51 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
FIRST FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0330514 | Sport and leisure | OB | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Sport and leisureCódigo: 0330514 Imprimir Course 3. First-semester module. Compulsory. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives The objectives of the degree programme are aligned with the competences/learning outcomes set out in the Resolution of 18 September 2018 of the General Secretariat for Universities, publishing the Agreement of the Council of Universities of 17 September 2018, which sets out recommendations for universities’ submission of verification reports for the official Bachelor’s degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences. In this regard, the following objectives are set out: • To design and apply the methodological process comprising observation, reflection, analysis, diagnosis, implementation, technical and scientific evaluation and/or dissemination in different contexts and across all sectors of professional practice in physical activity and sport; • To communicate and interact appropriately and efficiently in the fields of physical activity and sport, across diverse intervention contexts, demonstrating teaching skills in a conscious, natural and continuous manner. • To design and implement, with fluency, naturalness, and in a conscious and continuous manner, physical exercise and physical conditioning programmes that are appropriate, efficient, systematic, varied and based on scientific evidence, for the development of adaptation processes and the improvement or rehabilitation of specific abilities in each individual in relation to human movement and its optimisation; with the aim of resolving unstructured, increasingly complex and unpredictable problems, with an emphasis on special populations. • To organise and implement programmes for the promotion, guidance, coordination, supervision and technical-scientific evaluation of physical activity, physical exercise and sport for the entire population, with a focus on special populations, whether supervised by a professional or undertaken independently by the individual, in various settings and across all sectors of professional practice relating to physical activity and sport (formal and informal physical and sporting education; physical and sports training; health-related physical exercise; management of physical activity and sport) in accordance with citizens’ capabilities and needs, with the aim of fostering their autonomy, understanding, and the greatest possible and appropriate engagement in physical activity and sport. • To understand and be able to apply ethical and professional conduct principles, as well as those of social justice, in professional practice and engagement; and to maintain a commitment to scientific and professional rigour, alongside a consistent attitude of service to the public in the exercise of their professional practice, with a view to achieving improvement, excellence, quality and efficiency. • To understand, develop and apply the ethical and professional standards, structural and organisational frameworks, professional performance requirements and regulations governing the professional practice of graduates in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences, across any professional sector within physical activity and sport (formal and informal physical and sporting education; physical and sports coaching; physical exercise for health; management of physical activity and sport); as well as being able to carry out multidisciplinary work. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been established. Competencies The main competences related to the subjects in this module that students will acquire upon completion are as follows: 1) C.E.87. To be familiar with the most recent concepts and techniques relating to organisational management, with particular emphasis on those applicable to sports organisations. 2) C.E.88. To understand and apply a strategic management methodology that can be applied to sports organisations. 3) C.E.89. To have a thorough understanding of the basic types of facilities where students carry out their work activities, in order to subsequently analyse their needs and resource options within each of them. 4) C.E.90. To understand and apply organisational variables according to the types of competition and activity, in line with the prevailing trends in sport today: social, technical and economic. 5) C.E.91. Understand and apply the principles of managing and promoting different events: sporting, social and mixed. 6) C.E.92. Understand current legislation and its application in the field of physical activity and sport. 7) C.E.93. To practise and organise physical, sporting and recreational activities, adapting them to different contexts: leisure, recreation, tourism, etc. This module specifically contributes to the following competences defined for the degree programme as a whole, although there are other competences to which it may also contribute: 1) C.E.11. To manage, supervise and evaluate programmes of recreational physical and sporting activities. 2) C.E.12. Manage a sports organisation, body or facility. 3) C.E.13. Select and know how to use sports materials and equipment appropriate for each type of recreational physical and sporting activity. Learning outcomes The elements that may be used to assess these competences in terms of learning outcomes include, amongst others, the following: - Demonstrate sufficient knowledge of the various content modules covered by answering theoretical and practical questions. - Carry out assignments and practical exercises applying the subject matter. - Make appropriate use of ICT and other resources to find information relating to the management of sports facilities. - Planning recreational physical and sporting activities for any population group. Description of the content The course content is organised into seven topics, following a temporal and spatial sequence which we will endeavour to adhere to at all times. It may be necessary to make some adjustments to accommodate the dates of scheduled practical sessions, which complement the classroom lectures and planned assignments. Such dates or changes will always be notified well in advance. Topic 1: Free Time, Leisure and Recreation. Topic 2: Play and Recreational Sport. Topic 3: Teaching Styles Applied to the Field of Recreation. Topic 4: Designing activities and experiences for active leisure. Topic 5: The ‘Alternative Sports’ model Topic 6: Professional fields within recreation. Topic 7: Municipalisation of Sport. The content will be adapted according to the group’s needs and the progression of the teaching-learning process. Training Activities The training activities designed to enable students to acquire the intended competences during this module and to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: 1) Lectures on concepts relating to the management and organisation of physical, sporting and recreational activities (15 hours). 2) Practical sessions in laboratories and sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making within the fields of sports management and planning, sports legislation, and sport and recreation (30 hours). 3) Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). 5) Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work carried out both individually and in groups, etc. (45 hours). 6) Oral, written and practical assessments (5 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities requiring the student’s physical presence will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment. In this case, the examination to be held during the official examination period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. In this module, particular emphasis will be placed on the continuous assessment process, in which we expect the student to take the lead, and for their work, attitude and participation to be the investment that yields the expected and satisfactory results. The highly practical content and the large number of hours devoted to practical experience and the experiential development of the course material will require a commitment from both students and teaching staff, which must result in the achievement of the set objectives in an active and meaningful way, in a manner that is enduring and useful for our students’ future professional development. The assessment of these processes is described in percentage and numerical terms as follows: Continuous assessment Continuous assessment for this module is structured around three components, in accordance with the standard regulations for the Bachelor’s degree programme: 1. Final knowledge assessments (50%) - A written examination will be held at the end of the teaching period to assess the theoretical knowledge acquired throughout the course. - A minimum mark of 5 out of 10 must be obtained in order for this to be included in the overall average with the other sections. 2. Practical activities (40%) This section covers the applied activities that students will undertake throughout the academic year. Assessment will focus on commitment, attitude, active participation and the quality of the work produced. Assessable evidence includes: - Preparation and delivery of a teaching session (20 per cent): Group work involving the submission of a guidance sheet and a practical presentation in class. - Design and presentation of a recreational and sporting event (20%): Group work involving monitoring of the process and a final presentation to an assessment panel. 3. Portfolio (10%) The portfolio will document the student’s learning process through the compilation of meaningful evidence. Critical reflection, personal progression and the ability to self-assess will be assessed. It will include: - Results of comprehension tests using Kahoot (10%): Short, regular assessments prior to sessions, together with specific independent reading activities using the flipped classroom methodology. Note: Failure to attend more than 30 per cent of the teaching activities requiring physical attendance will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment. In this case, the student must opt for non-continuous assessment. Non-continuous (final) assessment Students who do not undertake continuous assessment must sit a final theoretical and practical examination, which will account for 100% of the mark. This examination will take place during the official examination period set by the University. Breakdown of the final examination: • Theoretical section: 60% • Practical part: 40% It will be essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in the practical part in order for this to be averaged with the theoretical part. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0330515 | Psychology of Physical Activity and Sport | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Psychology of Physical Activity and SportCódigo: 0330515 Imprimir Course 3. First-semester module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives • To understand the most important aspects of PAFD: its history, conceptualisation, usefulness and areas of application. • To master and assess all the psychological variables in sports psychology: motivation (activation, stress and anxiety); personality and self-confidence; attention and concentration; leadership, team cohesion and communication. • To know how to apply the main psychological intervention strategies, and to learn about other areas of application of the PAFD: eating disorders, injuries, disability, burnout and retirement from sport. Description of the course content Course Syllabus • Unit 1. Origins and history of the Psychology of Physical Activity and Sport (PAFD). • Unit 2. Psychology of Physical Activity and Sport: concept, utility and aims. • Unit 3. Areas of application of PAFD. • Unit 4. Motivation: the ‘driving force’ in sport. • Unit 5. Arousal, stress and anxiety. • Unit 6. Personality and self-confidence. • Unit 7. Attention and concentration. • Unit 8. Leadership, communication and team cohesion. • Unit 9. Psychological strategies for intervention in the PAFD. • Unit 10. Other areas of application: eating disorders, injuries, burnout and retirement from sport. Training activities The training activities to be undertaken by students throughout the module will be as follows: - Lectures or masterclasses (30 hours). - Seminars, workshops, etc. (30 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (7 hours). - Assessment (5 hours). - Students’ independent work (study, e-learning, literature review, etc.) (78 hours). Assessment system and criteria Continuous assessment • A minimum attendance rate of 70 per cent of all practical and theoretical sessions is compulsory. • An excused absence does not count as attendance. • Students must achieve a mark of at least 5 in each part of the module. • Students may not enter the classroom more than 15 minutes after the start of the session. Doing so will be treated as a marked absence. Below is a summary table showing the assessment activities corresponding to each specific learning outcome, the assessment methods to be used, and the percentage of the overall mark allocated to each activity: • Final knowledge assessments (50%). • Practical activities (30%). • Portfolio (10%). Final assessment The alternative to continuous assessment is the final assessment. Students must achieve a mark of at least 5 in each part of the module. The following table summarises the assessment components: • Final knowledge assessments (60%). • Practical activities (40%). Bibliography Core: 1. Beauchamp, M.R. and Eys, M.A. Group Dynamics in Exercise and Sport Psychology Paidotribo. 2017. ISBN: 978-84-9910-5 2. Olmedilla, A., Abenza, L., Boladeras, A. and Ortín, F.J. Handbook of the Psychology of Physical Activity and Sport Murcia: Diego Marín. 2012. ISBN: 978-84-8425-9 3. Weinberg, R. S. and Weinberg, R. S. Fundamentals of Sport and Exercise Psychology 4th ed. Médica Panamericana. 2012. ISBN: 9788498352078 Supplementary: 4.- Beauchamp, M.R. and Eys, M.A. Foundations of Sport and Exercise Psychology Human Kinetics. 2015. ISBN: 9780736064675 5. Goleman, D. Leadership: The Power of Emotional Intelligence Novoprint. 2018. ISBN: 9788490194324 6. Moran, A. and Toner, J. Sports Psychology Manual Moderno. 2018. ISBN: 9786074486919 7. Rotella, B. How Champions Think, in Sport and in Life Tutor Editions. 2017. ISBN: 9788416676224 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0330605 | Public Health | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Public HealthCódigo: 0330605 Imprimir Course 3. First-semester module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The overall objective is to provide students with the conceptual foundations of Public Health, which will serve as the basis for their core and common training as health sciences professionals and, at the same time, as a starting point for their subsequent specialisation as physiotherapy professionals. The specific objectives for the programme’s thematic modules are: 1. The concept of health and the factors that influence it. 2. Health education and the most important means of changing behaviour. 3. Scientific methods for identifying and analysing health problems. 4. Assessment of the main health problems affecting individuals. 5. Planning and programme development in public health. Prerequisites Not applicable Learning outcomes Not applicable Learning outcomes RK11 To understand and identify the psychological and physical problems arising from gender-based violence, in order to equip students with the skills to prevent, detect at an early stage, provide support for and rehabilitate victims of this form of violence RK15 To understand the fundamental concepts of health and the role played by the physiotherapist within the healthcare system RK16 To understand health-related factors and issues pertaining to physiotherapy within the fields of primary care, specialist care and occupational health RC6 To intervene in the areas of health promotion, prevention, protection and recovery RC18 Promote healthy lifestyles through health education. RS17 Understand and develop effective communication, teamwork, analytical thinking, creativity and ethical leadership from a cross-cutting perspective, clearly inspired by democratic principles and values, as well as the Sustainable Development Goals, in order to conduct oneself with integrity in the professional sphere and apply guidelines for good clinical practice RODS Develop effective communication, teamwork, analytical thinking, creativity and ethical leadership from a cross-disciplinary perspective, clearly inspired by democratic principles and values, as well as the Sustainable Development Goals, in order to conduct oneself with integrity in the professional sphere. Course content description 1. Describes and identifies the concept of public health and health demography. 2. Describe and identify the concept and aims of epidemiology. 3. Describe and identify models of causality; measures of frequency, association and impact; main epidemiological designs; the concept of validity and reproducibility of diagnostic tests; and health applications and disease prevention. 4. Describe and identify models of health education. 5. Describe and identify the environmental determinants of health: the physical, socio-economic and cultural environment; and understand the principles of environmental conservation. 6. Assesses the influence of lifestyle on health. (Diet and public health. Physical activity and health. The impact of drug use on health. Risk behaviours. Occupational health. Health issues associated with gender and different age groups. Health promotion and programmes. Health screenings). 7. Assesses the biological determinants of health (the influence of genetics on health; growth, development and ageing). 8. Understands and applies the Spanish Health System, the health organisation within the Autonomous Community, and international health organisation within the European Union and globally to their work. 9. Is able to represent, calculate and compare basic demographic indicators. 10. Is able to correctly determine and interpret the most common measures of frequency, association and impact in public health. 11. Identifies and evaluates the design of an epidemiological study. 12. Carries out a basic analysis of an epidemiological study. 13. Is familiar with methods of group health education and individual health education for the promotion of healthy habits. 14. Identifies healthy lifestyle patterns. Diagnosis of risk behaviours. Training activities Expressed in hours of training activities and % of face-to-face delivery P1. – Lecture sessions 45 h 100% P2. Interactive classes 7 h 100% P3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities 7 hours 100% P4 – Completing assignments or projects and solving challenges 15 hours 0% P5. – Independent study, solving case studies or problems, and bibliographic research. 70 h 0% P6. Tutorials 3 h 100% P7. Knowledge tests 3 hours 100% Total of 150 hours of training activities Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the corresponding weighting as specified in the course syllabus REGULAR EXAMINATION PERIOD: The final mark for the module will be calculated as follows: theory exam (70%) + continuous assessment (attendance (10%) + coursework (10%) + test (10%)). The theory exam will be a multiple-choice test comprising 30 questions. Each question will have four options, only one of which is correct. Each correct answer is worth one mark, and each incorrect answer results in a deduction of 0.33 marks. Continuous assessment will consist of a written test comprising 20 multiple-choice questions, of which only one is correct. A minimum of 10 correct answers is required to pass; incorrect answers will not result in a mark deduction. A group project, involving an oral presentation, will serve as the second assessment. At the end of each presentation, there will be a question-and-answer session for the audience, during which the presenters will clarify and answer any queries. Class attendance will be assessed positively only if it exceeds 70 per cent. EXTRA SESSION: A final examination for the module will be held, covering both the theoretical concepts and the practical skills acquired by the students. This examination will consist of a multiple-choice test comprising 30 questions, of which only one is correct. A final mark of five is required to pass. Correct answers are worth 1 mark, whilst incorrect answers result in a negative mark (0.33 per incorrect answer). This examination alone will account for 100 per cent of the final mark for the module in the supplementary examination session. SE1. Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. – Final knowledge assessments 50 70 SE3. – Laboratory practical workbook 5 10 SE4. – Portfolio 5 10 Total 60 120 Bibliography Core: 1. I. Hernández Aguado; B. Lumbreras Lacarra Manual of Epidemiology and Public Health for Health Sciences Degrees (3rd Edition) 3rd ed. Panamericana. 2018. ISBN: 9788491101734 2.- Jesús Seco Calvo; Natalia Burgos Alonso Community Physiotherapy and Public Health Panamericana. 2022. ISBN: 9788491108030 3. Juan Luis Londoño F. Methodology of Epidemiological Research (6th Edition) Manual Moderno. 2018. ISBN: 9789588993133 4. Leonardo Briceño-Ayala Preventive, Occupational and Environmental Medicine Manual Moderno Publishing. 2022. ISBN: 9789588993768 5. Martínez Hernández, Juan Fundamentals of Public Health, 2nd Edition (e-book) 2nd ed. Madrid: Díaz de Santos, 2014. 2014. ISBN: 9788499697925 6. Piédrola Gil Preventive Medicine and Public Health, 12th edition Barcelona: Elsevier Masson, 2015. 2015. ISBN: 9788445826058 7. Rafael Álvarez Alva; Pablo Kuri Morales Public Health and Preventive Medicine (5th edition) Manual Moderno. 2018. ISBN: 9786074486582 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 16 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
SECOND FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0230606 | Integrated Physiotherapy I | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Integrated Physiotherapy ICódigo: 0230606 Imprimir Course 3. Second-term module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives To integrate protocols for the assessment and physiotherapy management of: - General physiotherapy intervention procedures - Kinesitherapy - Medical and surgical conditions - Biomechanics - Professional communication and documentation - English Prerequisites Not applicable Skills NOT APPLICABLE Learning outcomes Outcomes of the training and learning process: Knowledge, Skills and Competences: RK1. To know and understand the morphology, physiology, pathology and behaviour of people, both healthy and unwell, in their natural and social environments RK2. To know and understand the sciences, models, techniques and instruments on which physiotherapy is based, structured and developed RK6. To understand and apply communication theory and interpersonal skills RK7. To understand the learning theories applicable to health education and to the process of lifelong learning itself RK9. To be familiar with the physiological and structural changes that may occur as a result of the application of physiotherapy RS1. Design a physiotherapy intervention plan in accordance with criteria of appropriateness, validity and efficiency RS6. Identify the factors involved in teamwork and leadership situations RS9. Identify the changes resulting from physiotherapy intervention RC16. Encourage the participation of the patient and their family in the recovery process. RC1. Acquire the appropriate clinical experience to develop intellectual abilities and technical and manual skills; to facilitate the incorporation of ethical and professional values; and to develop the ability to integrate the knowledge acquired; so that, upon completion of their studies, students are able to apply this knowledge both to specific clinical cases in hospital and non-hospital settings, and to interventions in primary and community care. RC2. To assess the patient’s functional status, taking into account physical, psychological and social aspects. RC3. Carry out diagnostic assessments for physiotherapy care in accordance with standards and using internationally recognised validation tools RC7. Be able to work within professional teams as a basic unit in which healthcare professionals and other staff within healthcare organisations are organised in a mono-, multi- or interdisciplinary manner. Description of the content Specific content of the modules comprising the subject: 1. Is able to participate orally and spontaneously in conversations in a foreign language during physiotherapy consultations 2. Is able to communicate professionally, conduct interviews efficiently and work effectively as part of a team, whilst managing their time. 3. Is able to deliver effective presentations and lead productive meetings 4. Is able to apply active listening techniques. 5. Is able to use the main sources of biomedical information, assessing the validity and relevance of academic and scientific information. 6. Is able to cite and reference bibliographies. 7. Has acquired the knowledge to explore and formulate a physiotherapy diagnosis 8. Has demonstrated the ability to develop an intervention methodology and apply clinical practice guidelines at each stage of the various processes 9. Has demonstrated maturity and responsibility in setting therapeutic objectives and prioritising treatment 10. Has demonstrated the knowledge required to assess the patient’s therapeutic needs in relation to the application of electrotherapeutic agents 11. Has been able to apply therapeutic and preventive guidelines, as well as to design and implement therapeutic procedures 12. Is able to apply the appropriate physiotherapy techniques to the various processes and stages of recovery. 13. Is able to instruct the patient in the practice of hygiene and self-care standards in physiotherapy 14. Is able to apply the knowledge acquired in communication and interpersonal skills when dealing with patients 15. Is able to identify short-, medium- and long-term physiotherapy objectives 16. Is able to interact effectively with all members of the multidisciplinary team Training Activities Face-to-Face Training Activities Hours per Training Activity Percentage of face-to-face time Face-to-face hours per credit P1. – Lectures 30 100% 5 P2. – Interactive classes 5 100% 0.83 P3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities 30 100% 5 P4. – Preparation of assignments or projects and problem-solving 5 0% 0 P5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, literature reviews. 74 0% 0 P6. Tutorials 3 100% 0.5 P7. Knowledge assessments 3 100% 0.5 Total 150 11.83 Assessment system and criteria SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, Uax Skill School, etc.) 0 40 % AS2.- Final knowledge assessments 50 % SE3.- Laboratory practical logbook 5 % SE4.- Portfolio 5 % Attendance is compulsory: 70% for theory and 100% for practical work; failure to comply with this requirement will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment Bibliography Essential: 1. Blaise Dubois 1, Jean-François Esculier 2. Soft-tissue injuries simply need PEACE and LOVE SaltWrap. 2021. ISBN: 1735728500 2. Delgado Ojeda, María Antonia Rehabilitation and Physiotherapy in Geriatrics Alcalá la Real (Jaén): Formación Alcalá, 2004. 2004. ISBN: 8496224414 3. Ehmer, B. Physiotherapy in orthopaedics and traumatology Interamericana. 2005. ISBN: 8448606566 4. Einsingbach, Thomas Muscle Recovery in Physiotherapy and Rehabilitation Barcelona: Paidotribo, 1994. 1994. ISBN: 8480191236 5. Esther Díaz Mohedo Manual of Physiotherapy in Traumatology Elsevier. 2015. ISBN: 9788490229699 6. Halima Shakil Scoliosis: a review of types of curves, aetiological theories and conservative treatment Springer. 2021. ISBN: 9789813363298 7. Hüter-Becker, A. Physiotherapy: description of techniques and treatment Barcelona: Paidotribo, 2003. 2003. ISBN: 848019667X 8. James T. S. Meadows Differential Diagnosis in Physiotherapy Elsevier. 2010. ISBN: 9788535226485 9. Jesús Seco Calvo Clinical Specialities in Physiotherapy Panamericana. 2021. ISBN: 9788491106128 10. Kapandji, A.I Joint Physiology II Panamericana. 2006. ISBN: 9788479003743 11. Kapandji, A.I Joint Physiology: Trunk and Spine Panamericana. 2007. ISBN: 978898350470 12. Kapandji, I.A. Notebooks on Joint Physiology, 6th edition: Volume I: Upper Limb Panamericana Medical Publishers. 2006. ISBN: 9788498350029 13. Kendall, Florence Peterson Kendall’s Muscles: Tests, Functions and Postural Pain Madrid: Marban, 2005. 2005. ISBN: 8471015277 14. Klaus Buckup Clinical Tests for Bone, Joint and Muscle Disorders (6th ed.): Examinations, Signs and Symptoms Elsevier. 2019. ISBN: 8491134883 15. Lemes, Daza Clinical and Functional Assessment of Human Movement Panamericana. 2007. ISBN: 9589181614 16. López Román, Antonio Fundamentals of General Physiotherapy Bellisco. 2009. ISBN: 9788495277022 17. López Román, Antonio Learning Physiotherapy Concepts Through Reasoning Bellisco. 2007. ISBN: 9788496486 18. M. TORRES, J. SALVAT A Guide to Massage Therapy for Physiotherapists Panamericana. 2006. ISBN: 8479037733 19. Michael Boyle Advances in Training Panamericana. 2018. ISBN: 9781931046626 20. Millán Calenti Gerontology and Geriatrics: Assessment and Intervention Panamericana. 2010. ISBN: 9788498352 21. Reichel, Hilde Sabine Physiotherapy: Clinical Practice Barcelona: Paidotribo, 2003. 2003. ISBN: 8480195975 22. Rodríguez Martín Electrotherapy in Physiotherapy Panamericana. 2004. ISBN: 9788479037536 23. Serge Tixa Atlas of Palpatory Anatomy. Volume 2. Lower Limb Elsevier Masson. 2014. ISBN: 9788445825815 24. Vilar Orellana, Eduard Physiotherapy of the Musculoskeletal System Madrid: McGraw-Hill, 2005. 2005. ISBN: 8448605381 Supplementary: 25.- Adian, MJ/ Cooper, JM. Biomechanics of Human Movement Brown. 1995. ISBN: 978-0-470-398 26. Alvarez Rey, G. New Developments in Sports Medicine Applied to Sport, Health and High-Performance Sport Panamericana. 2004. ISBN: 84-609-0795-3 27. Beni Ayerbe, I Fundamentals of Tactics and Motor Action in Sport Síntesis. 2010. ISBN: 9788497566810 28. Bettina Paeth Experiences with the Bobath concept Panamericana. 2001. ISBN: 8479035714 29. Bryan S Williams 1, Steven P Cohen 4. Greater trochanteric pain syndrome: a review of anatomy, diagnosis and treatment journal. 2009. 30. Cristancho Gómez, Wiliam Fundamentals of respiratory physiotherapy and mechanical ventilation. Bogotá: El manual moderno Bogotá: El Manual Moderno. 2003. ISBN: 9789589446256 31. Fitzgerald, RH; Kaufer, H; Malkani, AL Orthopaedics Panamericana Medical. 2004. 32. Fucci, Sergio Biomechanics of the musculoskeletal system applied to fitness training Madrid [etc.]: Elsevier, 2003. 2003. ISBN: 8481746452 33. Gwendolyn Vuurberg 2. Diagnosis, treatment and prevention of ankle sprains: update of an evidence-based clinical guideline British Journal of Sports Medicine. 2018. 34.- Hafelinger, U. Coordination and proprioceptive training Paidotribo. 2010. ISBN: 9788480196754 35. Izquierdo, Mikel Biomechanics and neuromuscular foundations of physical activity and sport Editorial Médica Panamericana. 2008. ISBN: 9788498350234 36. José Rubens Rebelatto Geriatric Physiotherapy McGraw-Hill. 2005. ISBN: 84-481-9849-2 37. Macias Merlo, M. Lourdes Paediatric Physiotherapy 2nd ed. Madrid [etc.]: McGraw-Hill Interamericana, 2002. 2002. ISBN: 8448604679 38. Mariscal Ortiz Preventive Aspects of Physical Education *Educación Siglo XX* magazine. 1987. 39.- Miralles I. Clinical biomechanics of musculoskeletal injuries Masson. 2007. 40. Miralles Sariola, J Combat sports: Boxing, Judo, Wrestling and Taekwondo. History of different disciplines and variants, most common injuries and preventative measures Menarini Publications on Health and Sport. 2008. ISBN: B.12837-08 41. Mora Amérigo, Enrique Physiotherapy of the musculoskeletal system Síntesis. 1998. ISBN: 9788477385790 42.- Nayra Deise Dos Anjos Rabelo, Paulo Roberto Garcia Lucareli Do hip muscle weakness and dynamic knee valgus matter for the clinical evaluation and decision-making process in patients with patellofemoral pain? Brazilian Journal of Physiotherapy. 2018. 43.- Nikos Malliaropoulos Soft tissue injuries remain a challenge in musculoskeletal sports and exercise medicine Teton NewMedia. 2015. ISBN: 978-189344127 44. – Pecci, MC / Herrero, T / López, M / Mozos, A Children’s play and its methodology MacGraw-Hill. 2010. 45. Platonov, Vladimir Nikolaievich General Theory of Olympic Sports Training Barcelona: Paidotribo, 2001. 2001. ISBN: 8480195711 46. S H Liu, T M Nguyen Ankle Sprains and Other Soft Tissue Injuries Amazon Media. 2021. ISBN: B09PH82C8S 47. Sanchez Buñuelos Health-oriented physical activity Biblioteca Nueva. 1996. ISBN: 978847030423 48. Sirvet Belando, J. Anthropometric assessment of body composition. Kinanthropometry University of Alicante, Publications Service. 2009. ISBN: 9788497170529 49. Verjoshanky, Y. Overtraining Paidotribo. 2000. ISBN: 978-84-8019-4 50. Weiss, Hans Rudolf Physiotherapy for Scoliosis Based on Diagnosis Barcelona: Paidotribo, 2004. 2004. ISBN: 8480197315 51.- Wilmore, JH./Costill, DL Physiology of Exercise and Sport Paidotribo. 2004. ISBN: 84-8019-749-8 52. Zatsiorsky, V Science and Practice of Strength Training. Human Kinetics Champaign. 1995. ISBN: 978-073605628 Others: 53. Lisa M. Tibor, M.D., and Jon K. Sekiya, M.D. Differential Diagnosis of Pain Around the Hip Joint The Journal of Arthroscopic and Related Surgery, 2008. Links UAX PUBLICATIONS – Publications in the UAX online journal. BIOSCIENCES: for the following sections: – original articles – review articles – clinical cases – book reviews – scientific writing Enquiries to the Professional Association of Physiotherapists of the Community of Madrid – To access articles and information from the journal *30 días de Fisioterapia*, please follow the link provided by the Physiotherapy Association |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0330516 | Sports legislation | OB | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Sports legislationCódigo: 0330516 Imprimir Course 3. Second-term module. Compulsory. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives To provide effective training in current legislation relating to physical activity and sport. National and international sports organisations. This module aims to equip students with the basic knowledge and tools regarding the Spanish legal framework as it relates to the work of professionals in physical activity and sport. An overview of the various existing legal institutions will be provided, taking into account both their territorial scope and their legal nature (public and private). This module will cover content relating primarily to administrative law, and the different powers of legal institutions in the public and private sectors, as well as an understanding of the legal structure of the law. Furthermore, students will be introduced to basic legislative concepts and their hierarchy, ranging from the Constitution and Organic Laws to Ministerial Orders, Regulations and Statutes. Sports regulation at international, national, regional and local levels, covering both public and private sports organisations Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Learning Outcomes The main competences related to the subjects covered in this module that students will acquire upon completion are as follows: 1) C.E.87. To be familiar with the most recent concepts and techniques relating to the management of organisations, with particular emphasis on those applicable to sports organisations. 2) C.E.88. To understand and apply a strategic management methodology that can be applied to sports organisations. 3) C.E.89. To have a thorough understanding of the basic types of facilities where students carry out their work activities, in order to subsequently analyse their needs and resource options in each of them. 4) C.E.90. To understand and apply organisational variables according to the types of competition and activity, in line with the prevailing trends in sport today: social, technical and economic. 5) C.E.91. Understand and apply the principles of managing and promoting different events: sporting, social and mixed. 6) Learning Outcome 92. To understand current legislation and its application in the field of physical activity and sport. This module specifically contributes to the following competences defined for the degree programme as a whole, although there are other competences to which it may also contribute: 1) C.E.11. To manage, supervise and evaluate programmes of recreational physical and sporting activities. 2) C.E.12. Manage a sports organisation, body or facility. Learning outcomes The elements that may be used to assess the competences in terms of learning outcomes will include, amongst others, the following: - Demonstrating sufficient knowledge of the various content modules covered by answering theoretical and practical questions. - Carry out assignments and practical work applying the subject matter. - Carrying out and analysing a market study. - Planning a project to set up a sports business. - Knowledge of the various strategies for sports management and marketing. - Make appropriate use of ICT and other resources to find information relating to the management of sports resources. - Manage, administer and oversee the technical direction of various sports organisations. - Understanding and applying the principles of sports facility maintenance. Description of the content THEORETICAL MODULE Topic 1. Introduction to the structure of the national and regional sports system. Topic 2. Powers of public authorities in the field of sport. Topic 3. Powers and legislation relating to doping. National and international. Topic 4. Sports organisations and associations. SAD. Topic 5. Sports federations. Topic 6. International sports organisations. Topic 7. Sport Discipline. Regulations. TAD Topic 8. CAS Topic 9. Elite sport. Regulations and operation. Topic 10. Competencies of graduates with a Bachelor’s degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences. Topic 11. Labour Relations. Topic 12. Entry into the civil service. Employment with the public administration. Topic 13. Introduction to professional responsibility. Topic 14. Working with minors. Topic 15. Responsibilities of those involved in the athlete’s environment. PRACTICAL MODULE 1. Comparison of the Spanish structure with that of neighbouring countries. 2. Research and comparison of regional competences. 3. Analysis of the World Anti-Doping Code. How to apply for and obtain therapeutic use exemptions. 4. Setting up a basic or entry-level sports club? 5. Transforming a club into a SAD. Steps to follow. 6. Structure of international federations, comparison with national federations. 7. How to conduct disciplinary proceedings 8. CAS rulings. Dispute resolution – arbitration – TEAD. 9. Understanding ADO. What it is and how it works 10. Learning to distinguish between one’s own remit and that of other professionals in the field of physical activity. Unauthorised practice. 11. Distinguishing between civil and employment service contracts. Understanding the differences and similarities, and detecting legal fraud. 12. How to create jobs. Self-employment and the self-employed. 13. Understanding the legal frameworks governing professional, civil, criminal, administrative and employment liability. 14. Criminal and administrative liability. 15. Criminal, administrative and professional disciplinary consequences. Understanding and analysing these. Training activities The training activities designed to enable students to acquire the intended competences during this module and to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: 1) Lectures on concepts relating to the management and organisation of physical, sporting and recreational activities (30 hours). 2) Seminars, workshops and assignments (15 hours). 3) Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). 4) Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work carried out both individually and in groups, etc. (60 hours). 5) Oral, written and practical assessments (6 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- 1-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT This applies to students who attend classes and meet the required attendance percentage in accordance with Faculty regulations. It consists of the following components: -Final knowledge assessments 60% (based on the syllabus covered during the course) -Portfolio: 40%, It will be essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in the practical component in order to calculate the average with the theoretical component. It is essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in the theoretical component in order for it to be averaged with the practical component. 2-NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT (final): For those students who do not meet the minimum attendance requirement (70%) 100 per cent of the final mark is based on a theoretical and practical examination, with the following breakdown: -Theoretical part: 60% (based on the syllabus covered during the course) -Practical part: 40% (based on the practical work carried out during the course) It is essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in the theoretical part in order for it to be averaged with the practical part. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0330517 | Injury prevention and first aid | OB | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Injury prevention and first aidCódigo: 0330517 Imprimir Course 3. Second-term module. Compulsory. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives - To understand the scope and limitations of a coach’s responsibility when providing first aid to an injured athlete. - To learn the basic techniques of cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR). - To learn how to draw up an emergency action plan for the evacuation of an injured person. - To understand the most serious emergencies that may arise in a sporting context. - To learn how to put together a first-aid kit. - To understand basic functional assessments to prevent injuries - Learn how to administer first aid in the emergency treatment of some of the most common traumatic injuries in sport. - To identify and eliminate risk factors that predispose athletes to injury and which can be modified through appropriate training planning and periodisation. - To understand proprioceptive training for injury prevention. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Competencies C.E.24. To understand the most common injuries and traumas in different sports and during physical activity, as well as how to prevent them. C.E.25. Understand the procedures to follow in the event of a sports-related accident. Learning Outcome 26. Be familiar with the minimum contents of a first-aid kit and the instructions for use of the substances and medicines it contains. Learning Outcome 27. Recognise high-risk situations and know how to respond during the acute phase of a sports injury. C.E.28. Identify the health risks arising from the practice of inappropriate physical activities amongst people who engage in health-oriented physical activity. Learning outcomes The elements that can be used to assess competences in terms of learning outcomes will include, amongst others, the following: - Demonstrating sufficient knowledge of the various content areas covered by answering theoretical questions. - Carry out assignments applying the concepts covered in class. - Applying what is covered in class at a theoretical level to real-life situations through practical scenarios. - Independently explore any topic through research and personal study. - Make appropriate use of ICT. Description of the content BLOCK I: EMERGENCIES & FIRST AID IN SPORT - TOPIC 1: Introduction to first aid -TOPIC 2: Basic Life Support. -TOPIC 3: Advanced Life Support (Use of an AED) -TOPIC 4: Traumatic injuries -TOPIC 5: First aid for traumatic injuries -TOPIC 6: Sports injuries. -TOPIC 7: Mobilisation and immobilisation of these injuries BLOCK II: Functional assessments. Topic 8: The injury process. Characteristics and stages TOPIC 9: Main tests (Deep Squat, Hurdle Step, In-Line Lunge) TOPIC 10: Secondary tests (Shoulder Mobility, Active Straight, Trunk Stability, Rotational Stability). Topic 11: Proprioception. Topic 12: Eccentric training. Topic 15: Injury prevention in team sports. Training activities The training activities designed to enable students to acquire the intended competences during this module and to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: • Lectures on concepts relating to the fundamentals of human motor function: biological, mechanical, behavioural, social and scientific (15 hours). • Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). • Practical sessions in laboratories or sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making (30 hours). • Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work, both individually and in groups, etc. (70 hours). • Oral, written and practical assessments (5 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official examination period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will be carried out taking into account the various learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed learning outcomes has been achieved: With regard to continuous assessment: This applies to students who attend classes and meet the required attendance rate. It is structured around the following sections: 1. Final knowledge assessments (60%) 2. Practical activities (20%) 3. Portfolio (20%). With regard to the non-continuous (final) assessment: 100 per cent of the final mark is based on a theoretical and practical assessment, broken down as follows: It is essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in the practical component in order to have this averaged with the theoretical component. Theoretical section: 60% Practical part: 40% Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
Bibliography Core: 1. Ben Kibler W ACSM Sports Medicine Paidotribo. 1998. ISBN: 9788480193412 2.- Sherry E. The Oxford Handbook of Sports Medicine Paidotribo. 2002. ISBN: 9788499100197 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 14 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Year 4
ANNUAL SUBJECTS
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0330602 | Clinical placements I | OB | 8 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Clinical placements ICódigo: 0330602 Imprimir Year 4. Annual module. Compulsory. 8 credits. Profesores
Objectives The primary objective of Clinical Placements I is to undertake pre-professional placements in the form of an independent clinical rotation, culminating in a final assessment of competencies at health centres, hospitals and other healthcare facilities, with the aim of integrating all the knowledge, skills, abilities, attitudes and values acquired across all subjects. All professional competencies will be developed, equipping students to provide effective physiotherapy care. Prerequisites Not applicable Competencies Not applicable Learning outcomes RCPAE Pre-professional placements in the form of an independent clinical rotation, culminating in a final assessment of competencies at health centres, hospitals and other healthcare facilities, with the aim of integrating all the knowledge, skills, abilities, attitudes and values acquired across all subjects; and to develop all professional competencies, equipping students to provide effective physiotherapy care RS4 Acquire clinical management skills, including the efficient use of healthcare resources, and carry out planning, management and monitoring activities within healthcare units where physiotherapy is provided, and understand its relationship with other healthcare services. RODS Develop effective communication, teamwork, analytical thinking, creativity and ethical leadership from a cross-disciplinary perspective, clearly inspired by democratic principles and values, as well as the Sustainable Development Goals, in order to operate with integrity within the professional sphere Description of course content 1. Apply the fundamental knowledge, skills and attitudes acquired across all subjects and interpret the general aspects of medical conditions with different aetiologies relevant to physiotherapy. 2. Apply physiotherapy intervention models in practice, understand the theoretical basis of functional tests and assessments, and identify the anatomical and behavioural changes that occur as a result of physiotherapy intervention. 3. Select and carry out general physiotherapy procedures applicable to medical conditions affecting all the systems and apparatus of the human body, both in the promotion and maintenance of health and in the prevention of disease. 4. Consult and apply the principles that underpin problem-solving and clinical reasoning. 5. Effectively and accurately document a complete physiotherapy clinical record, containing all relevant information from the patient’s/user’s initial appointment through to the physiotherapy discharge report. 6. Be able to apply physiotherapy assessment procedures by interpreting electrical and manual tests to determine outcomes such as: the degree of nerve function impairment, muscle strength, functional abilities and range of joint motion. 7. Present the relevant data recorded in the clinical record and establish a physiotherapy diagnosis, taking into account regulations and internationally validated assessment tools. 8. To implement, manage and coordinate the Physiotherapy Intervention Plan, taking into account the principle of the user’s individuality and utilising the therapeutic tools specific to physiotherapy. 9. Report on the progress of the results achieved through physiotherapy treatment in relation to the set objectives and established outcome criteria. 10. Design and implement therapeutic exercises using specialised methods for cardiorespiratory, orthopaedic, traumatological, paediatric, rheumatological and geriatric conditions and injuries, as well as sports-related injuries, spinal disorders, urinary and faecal incontinence, and pre- and post-natal exercises. 11. Design and apply procedures involving kinesitherapy, mobilisation, manipulation, massage therapy and manual therapy, as well as the various modalities of electrotherapy, thermotherapy and cryotherapy, phototherapy, ultrasound therapy, vibrotherapy, magnetotherapy, ergotherapy and pressotherapy, hydrotherapy, balneotherapy, climatotherapy and thalassotherapy. 12. Design and apply the various modalities of reflex therapeutic methods and techniques, as well as other specific alternative or complementary manual therapies relevant to the field of physiotherapy. 13. To organise and deliver group treatment to patients with similar problems. 14. Encourage the participation of the patient and their family in their recovery process. 15. Prevent and avoid risks during the administration of treatment and establish a plan of guidelines to be followed throughout the treatment. 16. To incorporate scientific research and evidence-based practice as part of the professional culture, as well as to establish lines of research within the profession’s scope of competence and disseminate them within the research group; to participate in local research groups; to disseminate research work and its conclusions within the scientific and professional community; establish physiotherapy care protocols based on scientific evidence and promote all professional activities that contribute to the advancement of research in physiotherapy. 17. To play an active role in the training of physiotherapy professionals; to participate in the development and delivery of educational programmes related to physiotherapy aimed at professional groups, interdisciplinary teams and/or the general public. Training activities Expressed in hours of training activities and as a percentage of face-to-face sessions P5. – Personal study, case or problem-solving, and literature reviews. 168 h 0% P6. Tutorials 10 h 100% P7. Knowledge tests 2 hours 100% P10. External academic placement 200 h 100% Assessment system and criteria Each student’s GRADE is calculated as the average of the marks awarded at each of the centres. To achieve a PASS grade, it is essential to submit the CLINICAL PLACEMENT REPORT. The final mark for the module will be calculated according to the following criteria: - External tutor’s report (clinical placement centre) 50% - Academic tutor’s report (course tutor) 20% - Clinical placement report 30% If the placements are carried out at several centres, the mark will be calculated as the average of these. 4.1 INSTITUTIONAL ASSESSMENT Assessment will be based on the development and acquisition of the competences detailed in the teaching guide for the relevant module, in which various aspects are assessed, such as the examples given below: YES NO Attendance and punctuality. Uniform and personal hygiene Teamwork and collaboration Compliance with the rules 0–10 Initiative Patient relations Technical and manual skills Theoretical knowledge and knowledge of pathologies Knowledge and Skills Acquired Physiotherapy Clinical Record The practical competence demonstrated in the Clinical Record is assessed against the following criteria • Systematically recording significant data from the information gathered and clearly set out in the Physiotherapy Clinical Record. • Identify data and describe potential and actual abnormalities, functional limitations and disabilities. • To recognise, through examination, patients with disabilities and functional limitations relating to: o Skin o Musculature (Daniel’s) o Differential diagnosis (orthopaedic tests) o Joint range of motion (goniometry) o Spine ;;;;; 4.2 Submission of CLINICAL PLACEMENT REPORT Failure to pass the Clinical Placements may be due to the following reasons: o Final mark below 5 o Failure to meet the course objectives o Repeated and unjustified absences and/or tardiness. o Obvious lack of interest. o Irresponsibility in carrying out assigned tasks o Inappropriate behaviour towards service users, those responsible for their training and centre staff. o Inadequate development of skills and abilities In the event of a fail at any assigned centre during the Clinical Placements, whether due to poor attendance or other reasons, the Clinical Placements module will be failed. SE7.—Report from the external academic placement tutor 50 50 SE8.- Report from the academic supervisor for external academic placements 20 20 SE9. Assessment of the placement report 30 30 Total 100 100 Bibliography Basic: 1. Blaise Dubois 1, Jean-François Esculier 2. Soft-tissue injuries simply need PEACE and LOVE SaltWrap. 2021. ISBN: 1735728500 2. National Physiotherapy Congress (13th, 2000, Barcelona) Updates in Physiotherapy: 13th National Congress of Physiotherapy Madrid: Panamericana, 2002. 2002. ISBN: 8479036249 3. Cristancho Gómez, William Fundamentals of Respiratory Physiotherapy and Mechanical Ventilation Bogotá: El Manual Moderno, 2003. 2003. ISBN: 9589446078 4. Delgado Ojeda, María Antonia Rehabilitation and Physiotherapy in Geriatrics Alcalá la Real (Jaén): Formación Alcalá, 2004. 2004. ISBN: 8496224414 5. Donatelli, Robert Physiotherapy of the shoulder Barcelona: Jims, 1993. 1993. ISBN: 847092317X 6. Ehmer, B. Physiotherapy in Orthopaedics and Traumatology Interamericana. 2005. ISBN: 8448606566 7. Einsingbach, Thomas Muscle Recovery in Physiotherapy and Rehabilitation Barcelona: Paidotribo, 1994. 1994. ISBN: 8480191236 8. Esther Díaz Mohedo Manual of Physiotherapy in Traumatology Elsevier. 2015. ISBN: 9788490229699 9. Haarer-Becker, R. Manual of Physiotherapy Techniques: (Application in Traumatology) Barcelona: Paidotribo, 2001. 2001. ISBN: 8480195061 10. Halima Shakil Scoliosis: A Review of Types of Curves, Aetiological Theories and Conservative Treatment Springer. 2021. ISBN: 9789813363298 11. Hüter-Becker, A. Physiotherapy: description of techniques and treatment Barcelona: Paidotribo, 2003. 2003. ISBN: 848019667X 12. Hüter-Becker, A. Physiotherapy: massage, first aid, bandaging techniques Barcelona: Paidotribo, 2004. 2004. ISBN: 8480196645 13. James T. S. Meadows Differential Diagnosis in Physiotherapy Elsevier. 2010. ISBN: 9788535226485 14. Jesús Seco Calvo Clinical Specialities in Physiotherapy Panamericana. 2021. ISBN: 9788491106128 15. José Rubens Rebelatto Geriatric Physiotherapy McGraw-Hill. 2005. ISBN: 8448198492 16. Josya Sijmonsma Neuro-Muscular Taping ANEID PRESS. 2007. ISBN: 9.78973E 12 17. Kaltenborn, Freddy M. Manual Physiotherapy: The Spine Madrid: McGraw-Hill, 2004. 2004. ISBN: 8448602404 18. Kaltenborn, Freddy M. Manual Physiotherapy: Limbs Madrid [etc.]: McGraw-Hill Interamericana de España. 2004. ISBN: 8448602412 19. Kapandji, A.I. Joint Physiology II Panamericana. 2006. ISBN: 9788479003743 20. Kapandji, A.I Joint Physiology: Trunk and Spine Panamericana. 2007. ISBN: 978898350470 21. Kapandji, I.A. Notebooks on Joint Physiology, 6th edition: Volume I: Upper Limb Panamericana Medical Publishers. 2006. ISBN: 9788498350029 22. Kendall, Florence Peterson Kendall’s Muscles: Tests, Functions and Postural Pain Madrid: Marban, 2005. 2005. ISBN: 8471015277 23. Klaus Buckup Clinical Tests for Bone, Joint and Muscle Disorders MASSON. 2002. ISBN: 8445804545 24. Klaus Buckup Clinical Tests for Bone, Joint and Muscle Disorders (6th ed.): Examinations, Signs and Symptoms Elsevier. 2019. ISBN: 8491134883 25. Lemes, Daza Clinical and Functional Assessment of Human Movement Panamericana. 2007. ISBN: 9589181614 26. López Román, Antonio Fundamentals of General Physiotherapy Bellisco. 2009. ISBN: 9788495277022 27. López Román, Antonio Learning Physiotherapy Concepts Through Reasoning Bellisco. 2007. ISBN: 9788496486 28. M. TORRES, J. SALVAT A Guide to Massage Therapy for Physiotherapists Panamericana. 2006. ISBN: 8479037733 29. Mercado Rus, Marisé Manual of Respiratory Physiotherapy Madrid: Ergon, 2003. 2003. ISBN: 8484731448 30. Michael Boyle Advances in Training Panamericana. 2018. ISBN: 9781931046626 31. Millán Calenti Gerontology and Geriatrics. Assessment and Intervention Panamericana. 2010. ISBN: 9788498352 32. Nara, Isao Physiotherapy in Stroke: Focusing on the Tokyo: Ishiyaku, 2003. 2003. ISBN: 8495803135 33. Pérez Ares, Javier Physiotherapy of the Shoulder Joint Complex: Assessment Barcelona: Masson, 2004. 2004. ISBN: 8445813706 34. Reichel, Hilde Sabine Physiotherapy: clinical practice Barcelona: Paidotribo, 2003. 2003. ISBN: 8480195975 35. Rodríguez Martín Electrotherapy in Physiotherapy Panamericana. 2004. ISBN: 9788479037536 36. Serge Tixa Atlas of Palpatory Anatomy. Volume 2. Lower Limb Elsevier Masson. 2014. ISBN: 9788445825815 37. Stephenson, Rebecca G. Physiotherapy in Obstetrics and Gynaecology Madrid: McGraw-Hill, 2003. 2003. ISBN: 8448605624 38. Vilar Orellana, Eduard Physiotherapy of the Musculoskeletal System Madrid: McGraw-Hill, 2005. 2005. ISBN: 8448605381 39. Walker, Carolina Physiotherapy in Obstetrics and Urogynaecology 2nd ed. Masson. 2013. ISBN: 9788445821022 40. Weiss, Hans Rudolf Diagnosis-Based Physiotherapy for Scoliosis Barcelona: Paidotribo, 2004. 2004. ISBN: 8480197315 Supplementary: 41.- Adian, MJ/ Cooper, JM. Biomechanics of Human Movement Brown. 1995. ISBN: 978-0-470-398 42.- Alvarez Rey, G. New Developments in Sports Medicine Applied to Sport, Health and High-Performance Sport Panamericana. 2004. ISBN: 84-609-0795-3 43.- Beni Ayerbe, I Fundamentals of Tactics and Motor Action in Sport Síntesis. 2010. ISBN: 9788497566810 44.- Bettina Paeth Experiences with the Bobath concept Panamericana. 2001. ISBN: 8479035714 45. Bryan S Williams 1, Steven P Cohen 4. Greater trochanteric pain syndrome: a review of anatomy, diagnosis and treatment journal. 2009. 46. – Cristancho Gómez, Wiliam Fundamentals of respiratory physiotherapy and mechanical ventilation. Bogotá: El manual moderno Bogotá: El Manual Moderno. 2003. ISBN: 9789589446256 47. – Fitzgerald, RH / Kaufer, H / Malkani, AL Orthopaedics Panamericana Medical. 2004. 48. Fucci, Sergio Biomechanics of the musculoskeletal system applied to fitness training Madrid [etc.]: Elsevier, 2003. 2003. ISBN: 8481746452 49. Gwendolyn Vuurberg 2. Diagnosis, treatment and prevention of ankle sprains: update of an evidence-based clinical guideline British Journal of Sports Medicine. 2018. 50. Hafelinger, U. Coordination and proprioceptive training Paidotribo. 2010. ISBN: 9788480196754 51. Izquierdo, Mikel Biomechanics and the neuromuscular foundations of physical activity and sport Editorial Médica Panamericana. 2008. ISBN: 9788498350234 52. José Rubens Rebelatto Geriatric Physiotherapy McGraw-Hill. 2005. ISBN: 84-481-9849-2 53. Macias Merlo, M. Lourdes Paediatric Physiotherapy 2nd ed. Madrid [etc.]: McGraw-Hill Interamericana, 2002. 2002. ISBN: 8448604679 54. Mariscal Ortiz Preventive Aspects of Physical Education *Educación Siglo XX* journal. 1987. 55.- Miralles I. Clinical Biomechanics of Musculoskeletal Injuries Masson. 2007. 56. Miralles Sariola, J Combat sports: Boxing, Judo, Wrestling and Taekwondo. History of different disciplines and variants, most common injuries and preventative measures Menarini Publications on Health and Sport. 2008. ISBN: B.12837-08 57. Mora Amérigo, Enrique Physiotherapy of the musculoskeletal system Síntesis. 1998. ISBN: 9788477385790 58.- Nayra Deise Dos Anjos Rabelo, Paulo Roberto Garcia Lucareli Do hip muscle weakness and dynamic knee valgus matter for the clinical evaluation and decision-making process in patients with patellofemoral pain? Brazilian Journal of Physiotherapy. 2018. 59. Nikos Malliaropoulos Soft tissue injuries remain a challenge in musculoskeletal sports and exercise medicine Teton NewMedia. 2015. ISBN: 978-189344127 60. – Pecci, MC / Herrero, T / López, M / Mozos, A Children’s play and its methodology MacGraw-Hill. 2010. 61. Platonov, Vladimir Nikolaievich General Theory of Olympic Sports Training Barcelona: Paidotribo, 2001. 2001. ISBN: 8480195711 62. S H Liu, T M Nguyen Ankle Sprains and Other Soft Tissue Injuries Amazon Media. 2021. ISBN: B09PH82C8S 63. Sanchez Buñuelos Health-oriented physical activity Biblioteca Nueva. 1996. ISBN: 978847030423 64. Sirvet Belando, J. Anthropometric assessment of body composition. Cineanthropometry University of Alicante, Publications Service. 2009. ISBN: 9788497170529 65.- Verjoshanky, Y. Supertraining Paidotribo. 2000. ISBN: 978-84-8019-4 66. Wilmore, JH./Costill, DL Exercise and Sports Physiology Paidotribo. 2004. ISBN: 84-8019-749-8 67. Zatsiorsky, V Science and Practice of Strength Training. Human Kinetics Champaign. 1995. ISBN: 978-073605628 Others: 68. Lisa M. Tibor, M.D., and Jon K. Sekiya, M.D. Differential Diagnosis of Pain Around the Hip Joint The Journal of Arthroscopic and Related Surgery, 2008. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0330603 | Physiotherapy in Clinical Specialities I | OB | 8 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Physiotherapy in Clinical Specialities ICódigo: 0330603 Imprimir Year 4. Annual module. Compulsory. 8 credits. Profesores
Objectives Objectives The aim of the module is for students to acquire the theoretical and practical foundations required to practise in the clinical specialisms of paediatric physiotherapy, early intervention, gynaecology, uroproctology and rheumatology. Prerequisites Not applicable Learning Outcomes Not applicable Learning outcomes RS3 Prepare the discharge report for physiotherapy care once the proposed objectives have been met RS13 Identify the most appropriate physiotherapy treatment for various conditions, as well as for health prevention and promotion, and for growth and development processes RS14 Assess the patient’s/user’s condition through a physiotherapy assessment, planning interventions and evaluating their effectiveness within a collaborative working environment with other health professionals. RS15 Understand and apply specific methods and techniques relating to the musculoskeletal system (including manual therapies, joint manipulation therapies, osteopathy and chiropractic), neurological processes, the respiratory system, the cardiovascular system, and disorders of statics and dynamics RC3 Carrying out diagnostic assessments for physiotherapy care in accordance with standards and using internationally recognised validation tools RC4 Implement, manage and coordinate the physiotherapy intervention plan, using appropriate therapeutic tools and taking into account the individual needs of the patient. RC17 Understand and apply guidelines for good clinical practice. Description of the content 1. Systematically draw up and complete the full Physiotherapy Clinical Record, as applied to the specialist fields of early intervention, paediatrics, gynaecology, uroproctology and rheumatology. 2. Carry out an assessment of the functional status of the patient/user in the Early Intervention, Paediatrics, Gynaecology, Uroproctology and Rheumatology units, which includes: welcoming the patient, collecting and assessing subjective information provided by the patient and/or significant others in their care network. applying the appropriate physiotherapy assessment procedures in each of these specialist fields. identifying the data and describing the actual and potential impairments, functional limitations and disabilities found; recording the relevant details from the information gathered and accurately documenting them in the Physiotherapy Clinical Record. 3. To implement, manage and coordinate the physiotherapy intervention plan within the Early Intervention, Paediatrics, Gynaecology, Uroproctology and Rheumatology teams, whilst respecting the principle of the patient’s individuality and utilising the therapeutic tools specific to physiotherapy in these fields. This involves: Establishing and applying the appropriate physical therapeutic measures in each specific case for individuals presenting with a condition, a developmental disorder or who are at risk of developing one. Carrying out specific physiotherapy treatment techniques for children aged between zero and six, school-age children or adolescents, depending on the different conditions, and applying intervention procedures within their environment. Designing and applying mobilisation and physical care procedures. To design and apply the various forms of reflex therapeutic methods and procedures, as well as other specific, alternative or complementary manual therapies relevant to the field of physiotherapy. Encourage the participation of the patient and their family in the recovery process. Prevent and avoid any potential risks arising from the application of treatment. Establish a plan of guidelines to be followed during the intervention. Prepare the discharge report. 4. To provide effective physiotherapy care, delivering comprehensive support to patients/users of Early Intervention, Paediatrics, Uroproctology and Rheumatology services, for which the following will be necessary: Interpreting medical prescriptions. Prepare the environment in which the physiotherapy sessions will take place so that it is adapted to the needs of the patient/service user. Explain to the patient/service user, in an appropriate manner and tailored to their level of understanding, the objectives of each intervention, whilst seeking their cooperation at all times. Record the physiotherapy treatment provided, the patient’s progress and any incidents on a daily basis. Identify the signs and symptoms of impaired biological functions related to physiotherapy care in these clinical specialities and those related to the remit of other disciplines. Monitor and interpret vital signs during the physiotherapy session. Guide activities and the approach taken in relation to the patient/user. 5. Apply procedures for the prevention, early detection and monitoring of possible impairments in the child’s overall development. 6. Assess the child’s developmental status, distinguishing between normal and pathological conditions. 7. Provide support and technical advice in early years education centres with children on inclusion programmes. 8. Apply the physiotherapy assessment process and physiotherapy techniques in gynaecological settings in a practical manner. 9. Design and lead a antenatal preparation programme. 10. Recognise the importance of physiotherapy during the postnatal period. 11. Be able to apply and supervise physiotherapy techniques in pelvic floor rehabilitation. 12. Apply the physiotherapy assessment process and physiotherapy techniques in practice to rheumatological conditions. 13. To apply the physiotherapy assessment process and physiotherapy techniques in practice to urological and proctological conditions. Training activities Expressed in hours of training activities and % of face-to-face delivery P1. – Lecture sessions 30 h 100% P2. Interactive classes 7 h 100% P3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities 45 hours 100% P4 – Preparation of assignments or projects and problem-solving 15 h 0% P5. – Independent study, solving case studies or problems, and bibliographic research. 93 hours 0% P6. Tutorials 6 h 100% P7. Knowledge tests 4 hours 100% Total of 200 hours of training activities Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities (100 per cent for work placements and TRABS), which require the student’s physical or virtual presence, will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment in the standard examination session. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- ASSESSMENT CRITERIA The assessment system will consist of: oral examinations, practical demonstrations, written multiple-choice tests and/or written essay-style tests, the completion and presentation of assignments, tutorial supervision, and attendance and participation in seminars. The assessment criteria will be weighted according to the teaching and learning methodology used and the teaching load of each component, in accordance with the following criteria: • Assessment of practical concepts: 45%. • Assessment of theoretical concepts: 45 per cent. • Seminar activities and other distance learning activities: 10 per cent. The final mark for the module will be the sum of all the components, with a mark of 5 being considered a pass, provided that a mark of 5 is achieved independently in both the assessment of ‘practical concepts’ and the assessment of ‘theoretical concepts’, a mark of 5 is achieved independently, with both parts having to be passed separately. If a student fails to achieve the minimum mark of 5 required to pass the module, but has achieved a mark of 5 in both the theoretical and practical components, they must undertake an additional activity to obtain the necessary mark, which will be at the lecturer’s discretion, depending on the student’s performance and progress throughout the course. 1. ATTENDANCE CRITERIA: Students will be required to attend a minimum percentage of the theoretical or practical sessions in which teaching takes place. In the Faculty of Health Sciences, this minimum attendance requirement for teaching activities is 70 per cent for THEORETICAL sessions and 100 per cent for PRACTICAL sessions and TRAB. Failure to attend will result in the loss of the benefits of continuous assessment; consequently, marks derived from it will not be taken into account. Attendance at practical classes and practical sessions is therefore COMPULSORY (100 per cent attendance is required, unless duly justified). Justification for absences must be provided via the channels and within the deadlines set by the university. 2. Assessment of THEORETICAL CONCEPTS will be carried out as follows: throughout the two semesters, a series of eliminatory tests will be held on the subject matter covered up to that point. In order to pass the material covered in each semester, students must achieve a mark of 6 or above in these tests. One test may be used to make up for another, provided that a mark of at least 5 has been obtained. The minimum required percentage of class attendance must be met for continuous assessment to be taken into account. If the final mark for the qualifying assessments is below 6, the student must sit an examination covering the entire syllabus taught in that semester during the official examination sessions. The mark for this theoretical component will account for 45% of the final mark for the module. 3. The assessment of PRACTICAL CONCEPTS will be carried out as follows: a. Continuous assessment: there will be two continuous assessment tests, each worth 10 per cent. The attendance requirement must be met. Under no circumstances will these assessments exempt students from the final exams; all students must sit the final exams for each semester, although these assessments will account for a total of 20 per cent of the final mark. b. A practical examination at the end of the semester, worth a maximum of 80% of the practicals mark. This will assess whether the student possesses sufficient knowledge and skill in each of the techniques covered in the practical sessions. Attendance, as well as the student’s attitude and participation during classes, will also be taken into account. This examination is still considered part of continuous assessment. c. If, from the set of questions posed, a student leaves one of them completely or partially unanswered, it is as if they had failed to carry out a clinical procedure with a patient; for this reason, they will not pass the assessment. The student may be made aware of this, and it will be their responsibility to decide whether or not to continue with the assessment. d. The minimum required percentage of class attendance must be met for the continuous assessment to be taken into account. e. The mark for this component will account for 45 per cent of the final mark for the module. 4. SEMINARS (ASSIGNMENTS): Students will explore the content covered in greater depth, both in theoretical and practical classes, by conducting research and critical analysis of the most relevant scientific literature. Students must carry out a series of activities, such as searching for and commenting on articles, and giving ORAL PRESENTATIONS or PRESENTING ASSIGNMENTS throughout the semester. These will be assessed provided the work is submitted on time. The following will be taken into account: a. Explanation of concepts b. Bibliography consulted c. Quality and presentation methods d. Compliance with the specific guidelines for the assignment or presentation e. Participation of group members, etc. f. Class attendance. The final mark for the seminars (TRAB) will account for 10% of the final mark for the module. The minimum required percentage of class attendance must be met for the seminar mark to be taken into account. Otherwise, the seminar mark (TRABS) will not be included in the overall calculation of the end-of-year mark. 5. OTHER DISTANCE-LEARNING ACTIVITIES will be activities proposed by the lecturer or the university, in which the student’s participation will be assessed. Examples of these activities include: a. Participation in symposia, university conferences, lectures, events organised by the university, etc. These activities will be assessed provided they are deemed beneficial according to the lecturer’s criteria, and provided that the theoretical and practical aspects of the module have been successfully completed. b. Completing case studies, questions, collaborative tasks and/or tests posted on the course portal. SEMESTER AND FINAL EXAMS: THEORY: if a student has not passed the theoretical part of the module through the eliminatory tests held throughout the semester, or does not meet the minimum attendance requirement, they must sit an exam covering the entire syllabus taught that semester, during the official examination sessions scheduled by the university. PRACTICAL WORK: As regards the practical component, as with the theoretical component, if a student fails to pass the course through the continuous assessment tests, or does not meet the minimum attendance requirement, they must sit an examination covering the entire syllabus taught that semester, during the official examination sessions scheduled by the university. If a student fails to pass the module for either semester under continuous assessment, covering both the theoretical and practical components, they must sit the official May–June examination (ordinary sitting), in which they will be examined solely on the failed semester. For the theoretical component, if a student has failed both semesters, they must sit two examinations, one for each semester, and must pass both examinations independently (minimum mark of 5) in order to pass the course. As regards the practical component, if a student needs to be examined on both semesters, a single examination covering both semesters will be held. If the student fails any part of that examination, they will have to sit the June–July examination session (extraordinary session) for the entire subject they have failed (Theory and/or Practical), covering both the first and second semesters (the full course), even if one of the two semesters had previously been passed. For the practical component, in both the ordinary and extraordinary examination sessions, it is reiterated that if, from the set of questions posed, a student fails to complete one of them either fully or partially, this is equivalent to failing to carry out a clinical procedure with a patient; for this reason, they will not pass the test. This matter may be brought to the student’s attention, and it will be their responsibility to decide whether or not to continue with the examination. SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective and Structured Clinical Examination (OSCE) 50 70 SE3. – Laboratory practical workbook 5 10 SE4. – Portfolio 5 10 Total 60 120 Bibliography Primary: 1. Inés Ramírez García, Laia Blanco Ratto, Stephanie Kauffmann Female Pelvic Floor Rehabilitation: Evidence-Based Clinical Practice Panamericana. 2021. ISBN: 8491104755 2. Macias Merlo, M. Lourdes. Paediatric Physiotherapy 2nd ed. Editorial Médica Panamericana. 2018. ISBN: 9788491102137 3. Métayer, Michel Le Cerebro-motor Re-education of Young Children – Therapeutic Education Elsevier-Masson. 2009. ISBN: 844580247X 4. Miller, Freeman; Bachrach, Steven; Lennon, Nancy; O’Neil, Margaret E. Cerebral Palsy, Second Edition Springer. 2020. ISBN: 978-3-319-745 5. Todd W. Vanderah, PhD, Douglas J. Gould, PhD The Human Brain: An Introduction to Its Functional Anatomy, 7th Edition Elsevier. 2016. ISBN: 978-1-4557-28 6. Tornero, J., Blanco, J. SER Treatise on Rheumatic Diseases Editorial Médica Panamericana S.A. 2019. ISBN: 9788491102816 7. Vojta, Václav The Vojta Principle Springer. 2000. ISBN: 8407001414 8. Walker, Carolina Physiotherapy in Obstetrics and Urogynaecology 2nd ed. Masson. 2013. ISBN: 9788445821022 Supplementary: 9. Anne Shumway-Cook, Marjorie H. Woollacott Motor Control: From Research to Clinical Practice: From Research to Clinical Practice Ovid Technologies. 2019. ISBN: 8417370854 10. Cano de la Cuerda, Roberto Neurorehabilitation. Specific methods of assessment and treatment Editorial Médica Panamericana. 2012. ISBN: 9788498354102 11. Esther Díaz Mohedo, Esther Mª Medrano Sánchez, Carmen Mª Suárez Serrano Clinical Practice Guide for Physiotherapists on Female Urinary Incontinence Digitmedia. 2013. ISBN: 978-84-616-49 12. Frank H. Netter Atlas of Human Anatomy 7th ed. Elsevier 2019. 2019. ISBN: 8491134689 13. Kari Bø, Bary Berghmans, Siv Mørkved, Marijke Van Kampen Evidence-Based Physical Therapy for the Pelvic Floor: Bridging Science and Clinical Practice. Bridging Science and Clinical Practice Churchill Livingstone. 2015. ISBN: 978-0-7020-44 14. Novak et al. State of the Evidence Traffic Lights 2019: Systematic Review of Interventions for Preventing and Treating Children with Cerebral Palsy Current Neurology and Neuroscience Reports. 2020. ISBN: 1528-4042 15. Peña Segura JL, Abenia Usón P, Alonso Curco X, Vidal Valls J, Ortiz Madiaveitia S, Ponte Mittelbrunn J. Early Intervention Diagnostic and Therapeutic Protocols in Paediatrics. 2022. ISBN: 2171-8172 16.- Raquel Chillón, Javier Merino, Jone Miren Noain, Concepción Cardona, Rita Pilar Romero, Francisco Javier Rego, Lourdes Macias, Kattalin Sarasola, Rocío Palomo Physiotherapy in Early Intervention. Framework Document. General Council of Physiotherapists’ Associations of Spain. 2020. ISBN: 978-84-09-238 17.- Sandra L. Kaplan, Colleen Coulter, Barbara Sargent Physical Therapy Management of Congenital Muscular Torticollis: A 2018 Evidence-Based Clinical Practice Guideline from the APTA Academy of Paediatric Physical Therapy Pediatric Physical Therapy. 2018. ISBN: 0898-5669 18. WHO Multicentre Growth Reference Study Group WHO Motor Development Study: windows of achievement for six gross motor development milestones Acta Paediatrica. 2006. ISBN: 1651-2227 Links Hip assessment in infants – Examination of hip mobility, Barlow’s and Ortolani’s manoeuvres, and Galeazzi’s sign. Brain ventricles – The brain consists of a network of four cavities filled with circulating cerebrospinal fluid (CSF). These comprise the two large lateral ventricles, the third ventricle and a cerebral aqueduct that connects to the fourth ventricle Adapted seating systems in paediatrics – Adapted seating systems in paediatrics Evidence-Based Practices in Paediatric Physiotherapy – In this video, the SEFIP Early Intervention Committee explains which interventions, based on scientific evidence, are used for the multidisciplinary treatment of children with motor disorders. Family-Centred Practices in Early Intervention – The Early Intervention Committee has produced this video explaining the most recommended practices in Early Intervention according to scientific evidence: Family-Centred Practices. GAIT REHABILITATION 1/2. PAEDIATRIC PHYSIOTHERAPY. CEREBRAL PALSY. PROPRIOCEPTION – GAIT REHABILITATION 1/2. PAEDIATRIC PHYSIOTHERAPY. CEREBRAL PALSY. PROPRIOCEPTION GAIT REHABILITATION 2/2. PAEDIATRIC PHYSIOTHERAPY. CEREBRAL PALSY. PROPRIOCEPTION. - GAIT REHABILITATION 2/2. PAEDIATRIC PHYSIOTHERAPY. CEREBRAL PALSY. PROPIOCEPTION. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430510 | Functional assessment of physical and sporting performance | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Functional assessment of physical and sporting performanceCódigo: 0430510 Imprimir Year 4. Annual module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The learning outcomes for this module are: 1. To outline the methodological foundations of measurement and assessment. 2. To explain the benefits, limitations and interpretation of the main functional assessment tests used in the fields of health and sport. 3. To learn how to apply and interpret the main tests used in the functional and technical-tactical assessment of physical and sporting performance. 4. To carry out practical functional assessments of those abilities that can be evaluated through testing (e.g. strength, endurance, speed, etc.). 5. To learn how to draw conclusions, based on test results, regarding an individual’s state of health and/or physical fitness. 6. To learn how to apply test results to exercise prescription and personalised training planning, as well as to predicting potential competition outcomes. 7. To learn to critically analyse articles in the scientific literature dealing with different aspects of exercise physiology and the functional assessment of physical and sporting performance. 8. To learn the methodological foundations for designing research protocols applied to sports science. Description of the course content DESCRIPTION OF CONTENT THEORETICAL CONTENT • Topic 1. Objectives of Physical Performance Assessment. • Topic 2. Fundamentals of Measurement and Assessment. • Topic 3. Assessment of Jumping Ability. • Topic 4. Assessment and Monitoring of Strength. • Topic 5. Assessment and Monitoring of Endurance. • Topic 6. Assessment of Body Composition. • Topic 7. Speed Assessment. PRACTICAL CONTENT The practical modules to be undertaken are: - Module 1. Assessment of Jumping Ability. The following tests will be covered: o CMJ. o SJ. o Abalakov. - Module 2. Assessment and monitoring of strength, power and movement speed. o Progressive load tests (bench press and squat). o Maximum repetitions test at a relative intensity (bench press and squat). - Block 3. Assessment of Endurance Performance. The following practical exercises will be carried out within this block: o Determination of ventilatory thresholds and maximum oxygen consumption. o Determination of the lactate threshold. o Determination of maximum steady-state lactate concentration o Determination of anaerobic power: Wingate test. o Calculation of Functional Threshold Power (FTP). o Heart Rate Variability. - Module 4. Body Composition Assessment. TRAINING ACTIVITIES - Lectures. - Practical sessions (facilities, laboratory, etc.). - Individual and group tutorials. - Independent study. - Written and practical assessments. Learning activities The learning activities that students will undertake throughout the module are as follows: - Lectures or masterclasses (30 hours). - Practical classes (facilities, laboratory, etc.) (30 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (7 hours). - Assessment (7 hours). - Students’ independent work (study, e-learning, literature review, etc.) (76 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities requiring the student’s physical or virtual presence will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. Students assessed through continuous assessment (a minimum mark of 5 out of 10 must be obtained in each section to pass the module): - Final knowledge tests (50 per cent): these tests will consist of multiple-choice questions and/or short-answer or essay questions, as well as possible practical scenarios based on the content covered. - Practical activities (30 per cent): Within this section, students’ participation in classes will be assessed based on the activities carried out during those sessions, whether they are TRAB or LB sessions. These activities may include practical scenarios, group projects or proposals designed to ensure students have properly assimilated the methodology for assessing the subjects. - Portfolio (20%): this portfolio will be a document containing a record of all the theoretical and practical sessions undertaken, which will serve as a guide to the correct completion of the various assessments. Students not subject to continuous assessment – that is, those with an exemption, an attendance rate of less than 70 per cent, or who do not submit the portfolio (it will be an essential requirement to obtain a minimum mark of 5 out of 10 in the practical component in order to have this averaged with the theoretical component): - Theoretical component (60 per cent): this assessment will consist of multiple-choice questions and/or short-answer or essay-style questions to be answered by the student. - Practical component (40 per cent): this assessment will consist of practical scenarios that apply, in a practical manner, all the content covered in the module. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430511 | Master’s in Sport | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Master’s in SportCódigo: 0430511 Imprimir Year 4. Annual module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The objectives of the degree programme are aligned with the competences/learning outcomes set out in the Resolution of 18 September 2018 of the General Secretariat for Universities, publishing the Agreement of the Council of Universities of 17 September 2018, which sets out recommendations for universities’ proposals for verification reports for the official Bachelor’s degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences. In this regard, the following objectives are set out: • To understand, develop and be able to apply the procedures, strategies, activities, resources, techniques and methods involved in the teaching-learning process efficiently, carrying out the entire course of action across all areas of professional practice in physical activity and sport (formal and informal physical and sporting education; physical and sports training; physical exercise for health; management of physical activity and sport). • To be able to guide, design, implement and evaluate physical exercise and physical fitness at an advanced level, based on scientific evidence, across different settings, contexts and types of activities for the entire population, with an emphasis on specific groups such as: older people (the elderly), schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking gender and diversity into account. • To identify, communicate and apply scientific anatomical, physiological and biomechanical criteria at an advanced level of proficiency in the design, development and technical-scientific evaluation of appropriate procedures, strategies, actions, activities and guidelines; to prevent, minimise and/or avoid health risks associated with the practice of physical activity and sport across all population groups. • Design and implement, with fluency, ease, awareness and consistency, physical exercise and physical conditioning programmes that are appropriate, efficient, systematic, varied and based on scientific evidence, to facilitate the processes of adaptation and improvement or rehabilitation of specific abilities in each individual in relation to human movement and its optimisation; with the aim of being able to solve unstructured, increasingly complex and unpredictable problems, with an emphasis on special populations. • Demonstrate an advanced level of proficiency in the analysis, design and evaluation of tests for assessing and monitoring physical fitness and physical and sporting performance. • Demonstrate an advanced level of competence in the planning, implementation, monitoring and evaluation of physical and sports training programmes. • To articulate and apply, with rigour and a scientific approach, the rationale upon which to consistently and professionally develop, support, substantiate and justify all actions, decisions, processes, procedures, interventions, activities, tasks, conclusions, reports and professional performance. • To understand and be able to apply ethical and deontological principles and those of social justice in professional conduct and engagement, as well as to maintain habits of scientific and professional rigour and a consistent attitude of service to the public in the exercise of their professional practice, with the aim of achieving improvement, excellence, quality and efficiency. • Understand, develop and be able to apply the ethical and professional standards, structural and organisational frameworks, professional performance requirements and regulations governing the professional practice of graduates in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences, across any professional sector within physical activity and sport (formal and informal physical and sporting education; physical and sports training; physical exercise for health; management of physical activity and sport); as well as being able to carry out multidisciplinary work • To understand, explain and promote the roles, responsibilities and importance of a competent graduate in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences, as well as to analyse, understand, identify and reflect critically and independently on their professional identity, training and performance in order to achieve the aims and benefits of physical activity and sport in an appropriate, safely, healthily and efficiently in all physical and sports services offered and provided, and in any professional sector within physical activity and sport. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been established Course content • Advanced General Principles • History, Terminology and Advanced General Aspects • Interpretation and application of the Laws of the Game • General and specific dynamic coordination. Specific skills and abilities. • Advanced sport technique and tactics. • Regulations Training Activities The training activities designed to enable students to acquire the intended competences during this module and to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: 1) Lectures on concepts relating to the fundamentals of human motor skills: sport, games, dance, physical expression, etc. (30 hours). 2) Practical sessions in laboratories or sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making (30 hours). 3) Individual and group tutorials (7 hours). 4) Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work carried out both individually and in groups, etc. (77 hours). 5) Oral, written and practical assessments (6 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- For each sport, the general assessment criteria shall be as follows: CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: To be eligible for this type of assessment, attendance at theoretical and practical classes must be at least 70 per cent, on the understanding that attendance is compulsory and essential for the best possible learning of the course content. Final knowledge assessments (50%) - Written examinations covering the full range of learning activities carried out in the classroom. Practical activities (50%) - Assessments that follow the learning process and evaluate the skills the student acquires as they progress. NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: - A final examination covering both the practical and theoretical content of the module. This examination will account for 100% of the final mark. Similarly, this exam will comprise a theoretical section, worth 60 per cent of the total mark, and a practical section, worth 40 per cent of the total mark. Furthermore, students must pass the practical section in order to pass the module. This non-continuous assessment method will take place solely and exclusively on official examination dates, whether ordinary or supplementary. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430512 | Sports planning and management | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Sports planning and managementCódigo: 0430512 Imprimir Year 4. Annual module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives 1. To develop a sufficient understanding of how sports organisations are managed: their composition, structure, hierarchy, programme development and planning. 2. To familiarise oneself with the key aspects of the management and administration of sports facilities. 3. To learn how to lead and manage sports organisations 4. To facilitate the development of medium-scale marketing campaigns 5. Make sound decisions that affect a sports organisation as a whole 6. To improve the capabilities and financial performance of a sports organisation 7. Develop a sports business model as a manager. Course content Theory: Management, strategic planning, business organisation, budgeting, strategic thinking, new management models, teamwork, leadership, quality and excellence, analysis, etc. Practical: 1. Development of the main project, presented and explained in class. Annual timetable. 2. Supplementary assignments listed and outlined in the timetable, to be carried out during the course Learning activities The learning activities to be undertaken by students throughout the module will be as follows: - Lectures or masterclasses (30 hours). - Seminars, workshops, etc. (30 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (8 hours). - Assessment (5 hours). - Students’ independent work (study, e-learning, literature review, etc.) (61 hours). Assessment system and criteria The final mark for the module will be out of 10, which may be obtained through continuous assessment throughout the course or by sitting a non-continuous assessment. The assessment process for the Sports Planning and Management module is as follows: CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT Final knowledge assessments (50%) • THEORETICAL EXAMS. There will be two theoretical exams. These exams will account for 50 per cent of the final mark. Students must achieve a minimum mark of 5 in each exam to pass that section of the course. Otherwise, the section will be carried over to the next exam. Students must achieve a minimum mark of 5 in this section to pass the module; otherwise, the module will be marked as failed. Portfolio (50%) • The presentation, development and display of practical work will be divided into the following: 1. Practical assignment Q1 = 15% 2. Practical assignment Q2 REAL PROJECT = 15% • During the theory classes, internal assignments related to the syllabus we are covering are set each week. Completion of these micro-assignments and correct presentation throughout the course (20%) NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT Students who do not meet the attendance requirements may be assessed via the non-continuous assessment mechanism, which will be processed as follows. • Exam in June comprising: 1. Theory section – 60% 2. Practical component – 40% It is an ESSENTIAL requirement to achieve a minimum mark of 5 out of 10 in the practical component. SPECIAL ASSESSMENT Students who need to sit this stage will be assessed as follows. 1. Those who meet the attendance and continuous assessment requirements will sit a theory exam covering the part they have failed. This will then be combined with the rest of the course for a final mark. 2. Students who do not meet the requirements for continuous assessment will be examined in exactly the same way as in the non-continuous assessment. Appendix 1. Acosta Hernández, R. Leadership, Management and Administration of Sports Organisations. Paidotribo. 1999 2. Rodríguez Romo, G; Mestre Sancho, J.A. The Sports Manager and Sports Facilities. Inde. 2007. 3. Cepeda Camión, G.A.; Martelo Landroguez, S. Administration and Management of Sports Organisations. Pirámide. 2018. 4. Díaz Morán, J. Management of Sports Facilities. IC Editorial. 2021. 5. Quesada Rettschlag, S; Díez García, M.D. Management of sports centres. Key roles and skills of the sports director. Paidotribo. 2012 6. Dorado Suárez, A. Management Strategies for Achieving Excellence. Circulo de gestores. 2005 7. Gallardo Guerrero, L. Handbook of Sports Facility Management. New Challenges for the Future. Circulo de gestores. 2005 8. Sánchez Buján, P. Towards quality management in sports centres. Gymnos. 2004 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430517 | External academic placements | OB | 12 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
External academic placementsCódigo: 0430517 Imprimir Year 4. Annual module. Compulsory. 12 credits. Profesores
Objectives The objectives of the degree programme are aligned with the competences/learning outcomes set out in the Resolution of 18 September 2018 of the General Secretariat for Universities, publishing the Agreement of the Council of Universities of 17 September 2018, which sets out recommendations for universities’ proposals for verification reports for the official Bachelor’s degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences. In this regard, the following objectives are set out: • To verify the specific knowledge acquired and set out in the degree programme’s learning outcomes, in real-life situations during external placements. • To apply the specific knowledge acquired in the different professional profiles (Sports Coaching, Physical Education Teaching, Sports Management and Recreation, Physical Activity and Quality of Life) in a professional capacity through external work placements. • The ability to analyse and synthesise the work carried out, as well as the ability to communicate through the presentation of written professional reports and presenting them orally. • Skills relating to information management. • Ability to offer constructive criticism and analysis. • Motivation for high-quality work and professional development. • Ability to learn independently and to self-assess. • Ethical and personal commitment and engagement. Description of the content The content of the external work placements to be undertaken by students will be based on work experience at a centre related to the training of any of the professional development profiles associated with Physical Activity and Sport Sciences. These organisations have a direct link with the University through an agreement which expressly sets out the external placement activities to be carried out at that organisation. The chosen topic will be finalised before the student’s placement begins. Internship selection criteria The selection of the placement organisation will be carried out in two ways: • A proposal from the University based on existing agreements with companies, clubs, educational institutions and other organisations related to the professional field of the degree programme. • A proposal by a student for a centre that meets the criteria relating to the degree programme’s professional development pathways, subject to the signing of a new work placement agreement and provided that a professional in the field of Physical Activity and Sport Sciences is present to supervise the student during their external academic work placement. Should several students apply to the same organisation, and the number of places be limited, selection will be based on the average mark achieved to date. Before allocating the placement organisation, a brief personal interview will also be conducted with the student. Training activities The training activities to be undertaken by the student throughout the module will be as follows: - Placement at the host organisation (240 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). - Student’s independent work (study, e-learning, literature review, etc.) (55 hours). Assessment system and criteria Assessment system and criteria The assessment process will be carried out taking into account the various competences. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been acquired: a) Report from the external work placement supervisor: Assessment by the company supervisor (external) regarding the work carried out at the external organisation: punctuality, commitment, work ethic, relationships with colleagues, relationships with superiors, level of engagement, etc. 50% b) Report from the academic supervisor of the external academic placement: Assessment by the academic supervisor, broken down into two sections. • Assessment of the final report submitted, organisational skills and the level of maturity demonstrated throughout the process of monitoring the student during the placement. 40% • Complementary training activities offered as part of this module, as well as written, practical and oral examinations. 10% The placement report is intended to be a document that reflects the knowledge acquired, the practical experiences gained, and the reflection and conclusions arising from the professional placement. It shall include the following sections: 1. Introduction 2. Description and analysis of the organisation and its structure 3. Description and analysis of the project or programme within which the student’s professional activities are carried out. 4. Description of the tasks carried out, in the form of a diary. 5. Analysis and assessment of the activities carried out 6. Personal contributions 7. Conclusions (these will include an overall assessment of the external academic placement) 8. Appendices 9. Bibliography |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 46 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
FIRST FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0230607 | Introduction to Research and Critical Analysis | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Introduction to Research and Critical AnalysisCódigo: 0230607 Imprimir Course 4. First-term module. Foundation course. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives ¬ To become familiar with research methods and techniques in Health Sciences and the use of scientific reasoning and the scientific method. ¬ To identify health-related problems suitable for research, taking into account their importance and relevance. ¬ To understand the different study designs used in health sciences research in order to select the most appropriate design for investigating the problem under investigation. ¬ The process of measurement and data collection. ¬ Use the statistical tools required for the correct analysis and interpretation of data obtained in a research study. ¬ Read, write and publish a scientific article. Prerequisites Not applicable Competencies Not applicable Learning outcomes RS2 Assess the progress of the results achieved through treatment in relation to the set objectives RS10 Understand and apply manual and instrumental assessment methods and procedures in Physiotherapy and Physical Rehabilitation, as well as the scientific evaluation of their usefulness and effectiveness RC9 Participate in the development of evidence-based physiotherapy care protocols, promoting professional activities that stimulate research in physiotherapy Course content 1. Applies the scientific method in basic and applied research programmes. 2. Applies qualitative and quantitative methodology to professional practice whilst respecting ethical considerations 3. Identifies and utilises the possibilities offered by new technologies in the management and quantitative processing of information. 4. Describes the main databases of interest in the biomedical sciences. 5. Is able to critically analyse clinical situations. Teaching activities These are expressed in terms of learning activities and the percentage of face-to-face teaching P1. Lecture sessions 45 h 100% P2. Interactive classes 7 hours 100% P3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities 7 hours 100% P4 – Carrying out assignments or projects and solving challenges 8 hours 0% P5. – Independent study, solving case studies or problems, and conducting literature reviews. 77 h 0% P6. Tutorials 3 h 100% P7. Knowledge tests 3 hours 100% Total hours of training activities 150 Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities requiring the student’s physical or virtual presence will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment. In this case, the examination to be held during the official examination period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment system for this module will consist of: oral tests, practical demonstrations, multiple-choice and/or essay-style written tests, the completion and presentation of assignments, tutorial supervision, and attendance and participation in seminars The assessment criteria will be weighted according to the teaching and learning methodology used and the teaching workload of each component, in accordance with the following criteria: - Assessment or testing of practical concepts + laboratory activities: 25 per cent - Assessment or testing of theoretical concepts: 60% - Seminar activities (assignments) and other distance learning activities: 15 per cent The final mark for the module will be the sum of all the components, with a mark of 5 being considered a pass, provided that a mark of 5 is achieved independently in both the assessment of ‘practical concepts’ and the assessment of ‘theoretical concepts’, a mark of 5 is achieved independently, with both parts having to be passed separately. If a student fails to achieve the minimum mark of 5 required to pass the course, but has achieved a mark of 5 in both the theoretical and practical components, they must undertake an additional activity to obtain the necessary mark; this will be at the lecturer’s discretion, depending on the student’s performance and progress throughout the course. The aspects to be assessed are: 1. ATTENDANCE: this academic year, students in all modules will be required to attend a minimum percentage of the theoretical or practical sessions in which teaching takes place. In the Faculty of Health Sciences, this minimum attendance requirement for teaching activities is 70 per cent. Failure to attend will result in the loss of the benefits of continuous assessment. Attendance at practical sessions is also COMPULSORY (100% attendance is required, unless duly justified). Failure to attend practical sessions may result in students being unable to sit the continuous assessment tests for those sessions. Justification for absences must be provided via the channels specified by the university. 2. Assessment of THEORETICAL CONCEPTS will be carried out as follows: throughout the semester, a series of eliminatory assessments covering the material taught up to that point will be held (a total of 2). In order to pass the relevant module, students must achieve a mark of 6 or above in these assessments. A mark in one assessment may be offset by a mark in another, provided that a mark of at least 5 has been obtained. This mark is subject to compliance with the attendance requirement mentioned in point 1. If the final mark for the qualifying tests is below 6 (or the minimum attendance requirement is not met), the student must sit an examination covering the entire course material during the official examination sessions. Each exam, whether a make-up exam or part of the regular examination session, consists of a total of 30 multiple-choice questions. The mark for this theoretical component will account for 60 per cent of the final mark for the module. 3. The assessment of PRACTICAL CONCEPTS will be based on two criteria: 1- Provided the student meets the class attendance requirement, they must sit a test, which accounts for 15% of the final mark. 2- The submission of each activity carried out during practical classes. Each task will be marked ‘0’ if not submitted or incorrect; ‘0.5’ if satisfactory; and ‘1’ if correct in terms of both content and format. This accounts for 10% of the total mark. The final mark for the practical component will account for 25 per cent of the final mark for the module. 4. SEMINARS (PROJECTS): these will explore certain aspects of the course in greater depth, focusing on topics of particular relevance to the student’s education. Students must undertake a research project culminating in the production of a scientific poster, a presentation and an ORAL PRESENTATION. These will be assessed provided the work is submitted on time, taking into account: - Explanation of concepts - Sources consulted - Quality and presentation methods - Compliance with the specific guidelines for the project or presentation - Attendance and participation of members, etc. In order for the seminar mark to be taken into account, students must, once again, meet the minimum attendance requirement set by the university. If this is not the case, the seminar mark (Trabs) will not be taken into account when calculating the overall end-of-year mark. The final mark for the practical component will account for 15 per cent of the final mark for the module. 5. OTHER DISTANCE-LEARNING ACTIVITIES will be proposed by the lecturer or the university; these will assess the student’s active participation and will enable them to improve their mark. Examples of such activities include: - Participation in symposia, university conferences, lectures, events organised by the university, etc. These activities will be assessed provided that the lecturer deems them to have been beneficial, and provided that students have mastered the theoretical and practical concepts of the module and met the minimum attendance requirement. - Completing case studies, questions, collaborative tasks and/or tests posted on the course portal. SEMESTER AND FINAL EXAMS If a student has not passed the theoretical part of the module through the eliminatory tests held throughout the semester, or does not meet the minimum attendance requirement, they must sit an examination covering the entire syllabus during the official examination sessions scheduled by the university. If they fail any part of that examination, they will have to sit an examination covering the entire syllabus during the July resit session. The assessment criteria for this module are subject to the provisions of the Student Assessment Regulations in force at this University. ATTENDANCE: During this academic year, students on all modules will be required to meet a minimum attendance rate for the lectures or practical sessions in which teaching takes place. In the Faculty of Health Sciences, this minimum attendance rate for teaching activities is 70 per cent. Failure to attend will result in the loss of the benefits of continuous assessment. SPECIAL EXAMINATION SESSION: There will be a supplementary examination session comprising a final exam for the module, which will cover both the theoretical concepts and the practical skills acquired by the students. The exam will consist of a multiple-choice test comprising 40 questions. SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. – Final knowledge assessments 50 70 SE3. – Laboratory practical workbook 5 10 SE4. – Portfolio 5 10 Total 60 120 Bibliography Core: 1. Argimón Pallás JM, Jiménez Villa J. Methods of Clinical and Epidemiological Research. Elsevier. 2000. ISBN: 978-84-8086-9 2. Delgado M, Llorca J, Domenech JM Methodological and statistical fundamentals Graunt. 2022. ISBN: 978-848049716 3. Hernández-Aguado Manual of Epidemiology and Public Health Panamericana. 2011. ISBN: 9788498353587 4. Martínez González, M.A. Biostatistics Made Easy, 4th ed. 4th ed. Elsevier. 2020. ISBN: 9788491134077 5. Miguel Delgado Rodríguez, Josep Maria Doménech i Massons Á, Francisco Javier Llorca Díaz Scientific Research: Methodological and Statistical Foundations Signo. 2003. ISBN: 84-8049-482-4 6. Milton JS Statistics for Biology and Health Sciences McGraw-Hill. 1994. ISBN: 9788448159962 7. Polit, Denise F; Hungler, Bernadette Scientific Research in Health Sciences McGraw-Hill Interamericana. 2000. ISBN: 970102690X 8. Santa Palella Stracuzzi, Feliberto Martins Pestana Methodology of Quantitative Research Fedupel. 2006. ISBN: 980-273-445-4 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430514 | Choreographed activities and fitness training set to music | OB | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Choreographed activities and fitness training set to musicCódigo: 0430514 Imprimir Course 4. First-semester module. Compulsory. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives The objectives of the degree programme are aligned with the competences/learning outcomes set out in the Resolution of 18 September 2018 of the General Secretariat for Universities, publishing the Agreement of the Council of Universities of 17 September 2018, which sets out recommendations for universities’ proposals for verification reports for the official Bachelor’s degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences. Accordingly, the following objectives are set out: • To communicate and interact appropriately and efficiently in the fields of physical activity and sport, across a range of intervention contexts, demonstrating teaching skills in a conscious, natural and sustained manner. • To adapt educational intervention to the individual characteristics and needs of the entire population, with an emphasis on specific groups such as: schoolchildren, older people (the elderly), people with reduced mobility, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), whilst taking gender and diversity into account. • Be able to guide, design, implement and evaluate physical exercise and physical fitness at an advanced level, based on scientific evidence, across different fields, contexts and types of activities for the entire population, with an emphasis on specific groups such as: older people (senior citizens), schoolchildren, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking gender and diversity into account. • To design and implement, with fluency, naturalness, awareness and consistency, physical exercise and physical conditioning programmes that are appropriate, efficient, systematic, varied and based on scientific evidence, for the development of processes of adaptation and improvement or rehabilitation of specific abilities in each individual in relation to human movement and its optimisation; with the aim of resolving unstructured, increasingly complex and unpredictable problems, with an emphasis on special populations. • Demonstrate an advanced level of proficiency in the analysis, design and evaluation of tests for assessing and monitoring physical fitness and physical and sporting performance. SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES OF THE MODULE: For students to acquire the ability to: • Select the most appropriate music for different choreographic compositions suitable for use in group fitness programmes with musical accompaniment, identifying their structural elements and potential applications. • Identify the rhythmic parameters (tempo, accent, metre) that enable the execution and cadence of specific choreographic patterns to be adapted to music of various styles. • When faced with specific musical compositions, analyse their potential for application in aerobics and related activities. • Design choreographies and choreographic sequences typical of group fitness with musical accompaniment, for use in group fitness programmes with musical accompaniment. Description of the content CONTENT PROGRAMME TOPIC 1: FITNESS. 1.1 Trends in fitness. 1.2 Leading organisations in the fitness sector. TOPIC 2: SPECIALISED GROUP ACTIVITIES WITH MUSICAL ACCOMPANIMENT. 2.1 Characteristics of group activities set to music: 2.1.1 Indoor cycling. Introduction and basics. 2.1.2 Aerobics. 2.1.3 Step aerobics. 2.1.4 Aerobox. 2.2 Profile of the sports coach specialising in these types of activities. 2.3 Communication techniques. 2.4 Criteria for selecting sportswear. TOPIC 3: MUSICAL ACCOMPANIMENT. 3.1 Musical composition. 3.2 Tempo of the music. 3.3 Music planning. 3.4 Software for music editing and audio mixing. TOPIC 4: CHOREOGRAPHY DESIGN. 4.1 Choreography Composition. Types. Choreography notation systems. 4.2 Specific methodology for teaching choreography. 4.3 Structure of group activity sessions with music. TOPIC 5: LEADING SPECIALISED GROUP ACTIVITY SESSIONS WITH MUSICAL ACCOMPANIMENT. 5.1 Specific techniques and potentially injurious movements. 5.2 Parameters and basic rules for safe use. Safety regulations for step and aerobics. Appropriate technique for step training. TOPIC 6: OTHER DISCIPLINES. 6.1 Unstable surfaces. 6.2 TRX. 6.3 Resistance bands. Training activities 1. Lectures (SESSIONS) on concepts relating to sports training, as well as those relating to the technical and tactical aspects applied to sports training (15 hours). 2. Practical classes (LB) in laboratories and sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making within the field of sports training and the functional assessment of physical performance (30 hours). 3. Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). 4. Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work carried out both individually and in groups, etc. (79 hours). 5. Oral, written and practical assessment tests (6 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the ordinary examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: Continuous assessment is the most recommended method for evaluating each student’s learning process: Final knowledge assessments (50 per cent): - 50% of the Continuous Assessment mark. - This will cover all the theoretical content covered in the lectures and practical sessions. - This will be assessed via a face-to-face theory exam. - The exam will consist of multiple-choice questions and essay questions. Practical activities (50%): - 50% of the Continuous Assessment mark: 20% Creation and presentation of a group choreography, delivered in person and submitted in writing via the campus platform. The final laboratory session will be assessed. 30% Teaching two sessions to their classmates. Students must work in pairs and/or individually. This will be assessed in person and in writing via the campus platform. NOTE 1: A minimum attendance rate of 70% is required to be eligible for continuous assessment. Any student who does not meet this first requirement must sit the examination in the ordinary January sitting. NOTE 2: The final mark must be 5 out of 10 or higher in each section; otherwise, the student must sit the examination during the ordinary January examination session for the failed section. NOTE 3: For choreography activities, the theoretical component, the practical component and the practical case study (class dictation) must all be passed with a mark of 5 or above. If a student fails any of these components, no average will be calculated and they must sit the exam in the REGULAR examination session. NOTE 4: Students who have passed the continuous assessment but have not passed the theory exam may retake only that exam in the REGULAR EXAM SESSION, whilst the practical component is retained as part of their continuous assessment. Otherwise, they must follow the regulations for the Ordinary and Extraordinary examination sessions (as explained in the table below). NOTE 5: In the EXTRAORDINARY EXAMINATION SESSION, no marks are carried over and students must sit all parts (practical and theoretical) without exception, as explained below. NOTE 6: In the event of injury, a medical certificate must be submitted to justify non-participation in the practical part of the session. An injured student is not exempt from attending classes, unless exceptionally so on the express advice of a doctor. NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: Students who forfeit their right to, or choose to opt out of, continuous assessment must sit the Ordinary examination in JANUARY and/or the Extraordinary examination in JULY, as a non-continuous assessment. The mark will be based on a single final theoretical and practical examination held during that examination period: Theoretical Part (60%): 60% of the final mark. - This involves a test of theoretical knowledge. - It will be assessed via a face-to-face theoretical examination. - The exam consists of two parts: an essay section and a multiple-choice section. Practical Part (40%): 40% of the final mark. - This involves the presentation of an individual choreography based on the topics covered in class and the presentation of a practical case study. NOTE 1: The final mark for the module will be the sum of the marks obtained in the theoretical, practical and supplementary components, provided that each of these has been passed with 5 or more marks out of 10. Addendum CONTEXT OF THE COURSE: Among the services available at clubs and fitness and health centres are so-called ‘GUIDED ACTIVITIES’, which are characterised by being carried out in a group setting, with an instructor or coach leading the activity. They form a fundamental part of the services offered by these establishments for various reasons; amongst them, the fact that the activity takes place in a group creates a distinctive atmosphere that undoubtedly reinforces the social values of exercise, increasing motivation and, consequently, adherence to the practice. Thus, Group Fitness is also understood as a specific response to the needs of the people for whom it is intended. Group classes cater to a large number of clients with little time available for physical training, who, for various reasons, choose to train in a group. For this reason, a specific professional profile is required: an instructor who teaches and educates, who delivers a variety of classes that complement one another, and who can organise training sessions and motivate clients to achieve their desired results. Indeed, in the module in question, our primary aim is to build a solid, broad and diverse foundation of specific movement experiences that contributes to the training of both the instructor and the participants, with a thorough mastery of the fundamentals, methodology, technique and possibilities for future application in both formal and non-formal settings. The approach of this module encompasses both theoretical and practical content. The former provide the framework upon which the practical content is based. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 10 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
SECOND FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0330606 | Integrated Physiotherapy II | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Integrated Physiotherapy IICódigo: 0330606 Imprimir Course 4. Second-term module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives GENERAL OBJECTIVE: • To acquire theoretical and practical knowledge, skills and competences in Manual Physiotherapy for disorders of the musculoskeletal system, based on clinical reasoning. SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES: • To recognise the fundamental principles underpinning the application of Manual Physiotherapy to the musculoskeletal system. • To integrate the assessment and treatment methodology of Manual Physiotherapy guided by Clinical Reasoning. • To apply clinical reasoning to disorders of the cervical, thoracic and lumbar spine. • To distinguish the structures and processes involved in disorders of the musculoskeletal system. • Develop the manual skills required for the assessment and treatment of disorders of the musculoskeletal system. • Apply the knowledge and skills acquired to the resolution of clinical cases. Prerequisites Not applicable Competencies Not applicable Learning outcomes RK1 To know and understand the morphology, physiology, pathology and behaviour of people, both healthy and unwell, in their natural and social environments RK2 To know and understand the sciences, models, techniques and instruments on which physiotherapy is based, structured and developed RK6 To understand and apply communication theory and interpersonal skills RK7 To understand the learning theories applicable to health education and to the process of lifelong learning itself RK9 To be familiar with the physiological and structural changes that may occur as a result of the application of physiotherapy RS1 Design a physiotherapy intervention plan in accordance with criteria of appropriateness, validity and efficiency RS6 Identify the factors involved in teamwork and leadership situations RS9 Identify the changes resulting from physiotherapy intervention RC1 Acquire the appropriate clinical experience to develop intellectual abilities and technical and manual skills; to facilitate the incorporation of ethical and professional values; and to develop the ability to integrate the knowledge acquired; so that, upon completion of their studies, students are able to apply this knowledge both to specific clinical cases in hospital and non-hospital settings, and to interventions in primary and community care RC2 Assess the patient’s functional status, taking into account physical, psychological and social aspects. RC3 Carry out diagnostic assessments for physiotherapy care in accordance with standards and using internationally recognised validation tools RC7 Be able to work within professional teams as a basic unit in which professionals and other staff within healthcare organisations are organised in a mono-, multi- or interdisciplinary manner RC16 Encourage the participation of the patient and their family in their recovery process Description of the content 1. Is able to integrate knowledge, skills and competences by assessing a patient’s state of health and recording this in a clinical record 2. Is able to integrate knowledge, skills and competences by establishing an appropriate physiotherapy intervention and treatment programme using basic and specific methods and techniques 3. Is able to integrate knowledge, skills and abilities by applying specific physiotherapy working methods and treatments to different conditions, as well as to the different phases of the processes. 4. Is able to integrate knowledge, skills and abilities by establishing and implementing preventive measures to avoid the development of conditions, as well as their complications and sequelae. 5. Is able to integrate knowledge, skills and abilities by encouraging the participation of the patient and their family in their recovery process 6. Is able to integrate knowledge, skills and abilities by evaluating the results obtained from specific physiotherapy interventions for different conditions. 7. Is able to integrate knowledge, skills and abilities by interacting effectively with all members of the multidisciplinary team. 8. Is able to integrate knowledge, skills and abilities to analyse injuries in the context of criminal, civil and employment law (offences involving bodily harm, assessment and compensation for personal injury, workplace accidents and occupational diseases). 9. Is able to integrate knowledge, skills and abilities by determining, interpreting, identifying, assessing and conducting an epidemiological study, and by applying health education methods to groups and individuals to promote healthy habits 10. Is able to integrate knowledge, skills and competences by incorporating the main legal documents into their practice Training activities Expressed in hours of training activity and % of face-to-face teaching P1. – Lectures 30 h 100% P2. Interactive classes 5 h 100% P3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities 30 hours 100% P4 – Preparation of assignments or projects and problem-solving 5 h 0% P5. – Independent study, solving case studies or problems, and bibliographic research. 74 h 0% P6. Tutorials 3 h 100% P7. Knowledge tests 3 hours 100% Total of 150 hours of training activities Assessment system and criteria 9. *Assessment systems and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. Assessment methods MINIMUM MAXIMUM SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. Final knowledge assessments Objective and Structured Clinical Examination (OSCE) 50 70 SE3. – Laboratory practical logbook 5 10 SE4.- Portfolio 5 10 Total 60 120 ASSESSMENT CRITERIA The assessment criteria will be weighted according to the teaching and learning methodology used and the teaching workload for each component, in accordance with the following criteria, based on the maximum 100 marks available: • Assessment of ‘theoretical’ concepts, 40 marks. • Assessment of ‘practical’ concepts: 40 marks. • Seminar activities: 10 marks. • Oral presentations, class participation and/or presentation of work: 10 points. THEORY (Lectures): - Two continuous assessment tests. - Each test will consist of 30 multiple-choice questions with four options and a single correct answer. - Incorrect answers will result in a deduction of 0.33 marks. - Conditions for exemption: - Achieve a mark higher than 6 in each of the exemption assessments. - An average will be calculated to allow for compensation between the two assessment tests, with a minimum score of 5. - If either part is not passed, the student will sit only the part they have not passed in the final exam; in other words, the mark from the qualifying exam is retained. PRACTICALS (Laboratory): - Continuous Assessment Tests (20% of the final laboratory mark): Only students with 100% attendance at classes may sit these tests. - Structured Objective Clinical Examination (OSCE) / Final Examination (70% of the final laboratory mark). - Clinical Case Studies. - Two questions assessing the student’s ability and skill in applying sound clinical reasoning and proposing the most appropriate treatment for the case in question. - HVSUAX PRACTICAL (10% of the final laboratory mark) SEMINARS: In ORAL PRESENTATIONS OR PROJECT PRESENTATIONS, provided the work is submitted on time, the following will be assessed: - Explanation of concepts (3 marks). - References consulted (2 marks). - Quality and presentation methods (1 mark). - Adherence to the time limit and/or length of the written assignment (1 mark). - Compliance with the specific guidelines for the assignment or presentation: (3 marks). FINAL THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL ASSESSMENTS: If a student has not passed the theoretical part of the module through the assessment tests held throughout the term, they must sit a final examination in which they will be tested again on the part not yet passed; this will take place during the ordinary examination period (May/June). If they fail to pass any part of that exam, they will have to sit an exam covering the entire syllabus during the July examination period. Therefore, the final mark is based on a range of factors, covering all their activities and assessments. SE1. Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. Final knowledge assessments Objective and Structured Clinical Examination (OSCE) model / Examen clinique objectif structuré (OSCE) 50 70 SE3. – Laboratory practical workbook 5 10 SE4. – Portfolio 5 10 Total 60 120 Bibliography Primary: 1. Carolyn Kisner, Lynn Allen Colby Therapeutic Exercise: Fundamentals and Techniques Panamericana. 2011. ISBN: 9789500600965 2. Álvaro José Rodríguez Domínguez Neuroscience and Pain: Neuroplastic Changes and Rehabilitation in Chronic Pain PUNTO ROJO. 2021. ISBN: 9788418654466 3. Andrés Quevedo, Alexandra Alonso, José Luis Alonso ORTHOPAEDIC MANUAL THERAPY IN PAIN MANAGEMENT Elsevier. 2022. ISBN: 9788413820200 4. Bucher-Dollenz, G. – Wiesner, R. THE MAITLAND CONCEPT. ITS APPLICATION IN PHYSIOTHERAPY PANAMERICANA. 2020. ISBN: 9788498352139 5. David S. Butler, Lorimer Moseley Explaining Pain NOI Group Publications. 2003. ISBN: 9780975091081 6. Deborah Falla, Jeremy Lewis, Christopher McCarthy, Michelle Sterling, Charles Cook Grieve’s Modern Musculoskeletal Physiotherapy Elsevier. 2024. ISBN: 9780702080906 7. Gwendolen Jull Whiplash, Headache and Neck Pain Elsevier. 2009. ISBN: 9788480864336 8. Jeffrey D. Boyling Grieve, A Contemporary Manual of Physical Therapy Masson. 2006. ISBN: 9788445816059 9. R. Torres Cueco The Cervical Spine: Clinical Assessment and Therapeutic Approaches Panamericana. 2008. ISBN: 9788479037086 10. Surós, A. Medical Semiology and Diagnostic Techniques 8th ed. Masson. 2001. ISBN: 8445810804 11. Vilar Orellana, Eduard Physiotherapy of the Musculoskeletal System Madrid: McGraw-Hill, 2005. 2005. ISBN: 8448605381 Supplementary: 12.- Cesar Fernandez de las Penas Kinesitherapy: Physiological Principles and Practical Application Elsevier. 2013. ISBN: 9788490220115 13.- Dahl, H. FUNDAMENTALS OF MANUAL THERAPY PAIDOTRIBO. 2021. ISBN: 9788480197816 14. David S. Butler Mobilisation of the Nervous System Paidotribo. 2009. ISBN: 9788480199988 15. Eduardo Zamorano Neuromeningeal Mobilisation Panamericana. 2013. ISBN: 9788479039707 16. Gwendolen Jull, Anne Moore, Deborah Falla, Jeremy Lewis, Christopher McCarthy, Michelle Sterling Grieve’s Modern Musculoskeletal Physiotherapy ELSEVIER. 2021. ISBN: 9780702051524 17. Jerome E. Bickenbach Basic ICF Sets Elsevier. 2014. ISBN: 9788490225271 18. Laso FJ Introduction to Clinical Medicine. 2nd ed. 4th ed. Elsevier. 2020. ISBN: 9788491133520 19. Michael Shacklock Clinical Neurodynamics: A New System for Musculoskeletal Treatment Elsevier. 2007. ISBN: 9788480862219 20. Nicola J. Petty; Ann P. Moore Neuromusculoskeletal Examination and Assessment Churchill Livingstone. 2001. ISBN: 044307061X 21. Xhardez, Yves Handbook of Kinesiotherapy and Functional Rehabilitation: Techniques Buenos Aires: El Ateneo, 2002. 2002. ISBN: 9500203758 Links ASIA International Classification – Documentation with photographs and a description of the ASIA scale |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0330607 | Health Legislation and Administration | OB | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Health Legislation and AdministrationCódigo: 0330607 Imprimir Course 4. Second-term module. Compulsory. 3 credits. Profesores
Objectives 1) For students to become familiar with the essential legal provisions of our legal system and its various levels 2) To ensure that students understand that all professional activities are subject to the various regulatory frameworks 3) For students to identify specific technical and legal aspects to which they will be subject during their professional practice 4) To understand the existence of ethical principles and their significance in their professional practice 5) To be familiar with and understand the main taxes and how to calculate them 6) To have a basic understanding of the management of professional activities and quality assurance processes in professional practice Prerequisites Not applicable Competencies Not applicable Learning outcomes RK11 To know and understand the morphology, physiology, pathology and behaviour of people, both healthy and unwell, in their natural and social environments RK17 To be familiar with the Spanish Health System and aspects relating to the management of health services, particularly those involving physiotherapy RK18 To understand and analyse the management processes of a physiotherapy service or unit RK19 To understand the ethical and legal foundations of the profession within a changing social context RK20 Understand professional codes of ethics and conduct RC8 Incorporate the ethical and legal principles of the profession into professional practice, whilst integrating social and community aspects into decision-making. RC9 Participate in the development of evidence-based physiotherapy care protocols, promoting professional activities that stimulate research in physiotherapy RODS Develop effective communication, teamwork, analytical thinking, creativity and ethical leadership from a cross-cutting perspective, clearly inspired by democratic principles and values, as well as the Sustainable Development Goals, in order to conduct oneself with integrity in the professional sphere Description of the content 1. Describes the historical evolution of the administrative process and the various forms taken by healthcare management and healthcare provision in Spain and within the Autonomous Community. 2. Describes the Spanish Social Security benefits with the greatest impact on the profession. 3. Describes the administrative authorisation requirements for the establishment and operation of healthcare centres, as well as the various management tools. 4. Understands the concepts of quality and the assessment of healthcare products. 5. Be familiar with the administrative and organisational context in which the profession operates. The nature of professional bodies and associations. The code of ethics of professional bodies. 6. Be familiar with aspects relating to medical records and professional confidentiality. 7. Explain the general concepts of law. Crimes and offences. Criminal offences relating to the profession. Health and employment legislation 8. Understands the current legal and administrative framework for carrying out the duties and responsibilities of the profession, making appropriate use of social, healthcare and economic resources. 9. Apply and incorporate the ethical and legal principles of the profession. 10. Understand the basic elements of managing services within the profession. 11. Understand the professional, ethical and legal context of the profession, recognising and responding to ethical dilemmas and issues in daily practice. Training activities Expressed in hours of training activities and % of face-to-face delivery P1. – Lectures 15 h 100% P2. Interactive classes 7 h 100% P4. – Carrying out assignments or projects and tackling challenges 9 hours 0% P5. – Independent study, solving case studies or problems, and conducting literature reviews. 38 h 0% P6. Tutorials 3 h 100% P7. Knowledge tests 3 hours 100% Total hours of training activities 60 Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s theoretical classes, and 100% of the practical classes requiring the student’s physical or virtual presence, will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment in the ordinary examination session. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- REGULAR EXAMINATION PERIOD: The final mark for the module will be calculated as follows: a) Two assessed and qualifying tests (60%). To be exempt from the course material covered by each test during the academic year, students must achieve a mark of 5/10 in each. Should a student fail either of the two tests, they must sit the continuous assessment exam. b) Six individual practical assignments (30%), to be completed and handed in in class. THESE CANNOT BE RESIT ON AN ALTERNATIVE DATE, UNLESS JUSTIFIED BY THE TUTOR. The dates for these will be announced at the start of the course. It is a compulsory requirement to have submitted at least 2 practical assignments in order to sit the first assessed test and 4 practical assignments in order to sit the second assessed test. For the official ordinary assessment period, an average will be calculated based on the two assessments, the practical assignments submitted and class attendance; any student who does not achieve a minimum mark of 5 will have to sit the ordinary assessment. Students who fail the ordinary examination session will have to sit the supplementary examination session, which covers 100 per cent of the course content. c) Continuous assessment and attendance (10%) Both the assessed and exempting tests, as well as the final exam for the ordinary and extraordinary examination sessions, will be multiple-choice. Each question will have four options, of which only one will be correct. For every four questions answered incorrectly, the value of one correct answer will be deducted. The examinations will cover the main concepts taught during teaching activities (lectures, seminars or laboratory sessions). Continuous assessment will consist of students’ attendance and active participation through answering various questions during the teaching activities. With regard to lectures, students will be provided with lecture notes for each topic via the Virtual Campus; however, these are in no way a substitute for the course notes, so students must attend lectures and take notes during them. It is also recommended that students consult the bibliography listed in the syllabus as supplementary reading, although this is not compulsory. EXTRAORDINARY EXAM SESSION: A multiple-choice exam which will account for 100% of the final mark for the module in the supplementary examination session. SE1. Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. – Final knowledge assessments 50 70 SE4. – Portfolio 10 20 Total 60 120 Bibliography Primary: 1. Fernández Rosa, Luis. Estañ Torres, Carmen. Notes on Legislation for Physiotherapists San Pablo CEU University Foundation. 2016. ISBN: 9788416477333 2. Álvarez Nebreda, Carlos. Healthcare Administration and Health Systems Síntesis. 2008. ISBN: 9788477382331 3. Aranaz Andrés, JM Healthcare Management. Quality and Patient Safety Diaz De Santos. 2008. ISBN: 9788479788902 4. GAMERO CASADO, EDUARDO Administrative Law for Non-Law Students Tecnos. 2012. ISBN: 9788430955282 5. José Francisco Blasco Lahoz Basic Legislation on Healthcare Tirant lo Blanch. 2012. ISBN: 9788490047316 6. Lamata, F Handbook of Healthcare Administration and Management Diaz de Santos. 2003. ISBN: 847978346X 7. Mediuris Law for Healthcare Staff MarcialPons. 2011. ISBN: 9788497689038 8. Rodriguez Rivera Spanish Healthcare Legislation MAD. 2012. ISBN: 9788467600421 Supplementary: 9.- Martínez, V. – Rosado, P. – González, J. – Igual, C. – Blasco, J. – Blasco, C. HEALTH LEGISLATION AND ETHICS FOR PHYSIOTHERAPISTS Various authors. 2012. ISBN: 9788469497357 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430516 | Final-Year Project | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Final-Year ProjectCódigo: 0430516 Imprimir Course 4. Second-term module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The objectives of the Final Year Project are: - To manage, supervise and evaluate programmes of recreational physical and sporting activities. - To manage a sports organisation, body or facility. - To select and know how to use sports materials and equipment appropriate for each type of recreational physical and sporting activity. - To assess physical fitness and prescribe health-oriented physical exercises. - To promote and evaluate the development of lasting and independent habits of physical activity and sport amongst the adult population, older people and people with disabilities. - Identify the health risks arising from the practice of inappropriate physical activities amongst people engaging in health-oriented physical activity. - To plan, develop and monitor the training process at its various levels. - Apply physiological, biomechanical and behavioural principles when supervising sports training. - To design, develop and evaluate teaching and learning processes relating to physical activity and sport, taking into account the individual and contextual characteristics of participants. - To promote and evaluate the development of lasting and independent habits of physical activity and sport amongst schoolchildren. . Upon completion of the course, the student must present and defend their work before an examination board comprising lecturers from the degree programme. The expected outcomes must demonstrate the student’s competence and acquisition of the general and specific knowledge required for the degree. Prerequisites Students enrolled on this module may not present or defend their Final Year Project until they have passed the remaining compulsory and optional ECTS credits required to complete the degree. Competencies The final-year project must demonstrate that the student has acquired the following competences: - The general skills and competences described in the objectives of this degree programme. - Specific skills relating to academic orientation or professional development, based on each of the established career pathways. Learning Outcomes The elements that may be used to assess these competences in terms of learning outcomes include, amongst others, the following: - Submission of a written report on the Final-Year Project - Defending the dissertation before an academic panel comprising lecturers from the degree programme, presenting it coherently and demonstrating mastery of the concepts and procedures, as well as the attitudes required for its preparation. To assist students with the methodological, documentation and communication aspects of their final-year projects, students will have access to suitable workspaces. This work must be carried out under the appropriate supervision of the teaching staff responsible for the Bachelor’s Degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences. Description of the content The content will be specific and relate to the topic covered by the final project and the specialisation chosen by the student. The Final Year Project will be selected by the student, and the Head of Studies will be responsible for assigning the appropriate tutor-supervisor. The supervisor will be responsible for planning, supervising, monitoring and assigning tasks to the student. This project will be based on the skills acquired in accordance with the chosen career path. It must be designed in such a way that the student’s total commitment corresponds to the 6 ECTS credits allocated to this module. The final project must be supervised by a tutor from the degree programme. Once the final project has been completed, the student must present and defend it before an examination board comprising lecturers from the degree programme. The expected outcomes must demonstrate the student’s competence and acquisition of the general and specific knowledge required for the degree programme. Learning activities The learning activities to be carried out to ensure that students acquire the intended competences during this module and are able to achieve the intended learning outcomes of the project will be: 1) Individual and group tutorials to introduce the concepts related to the preparation of the dissertation (12 hours). 2) Students’ independent work (study, e-learning, literature reviews, etc.) (134 hours) 3) Assessment (2 hours). 4) Introductory session and presentation of the Final Year Project (2 hours). Assessment system and criteria ASSESSMENT CRITERIA 1. FINAL YEAR PROJECT REPORT In order to submit the TFG, students must obtain their tutor’s approval based on the following criteria: - Adherence to and completion of the programme (effective use of tutorials) - Content of the Final Year Project document (FYP assessment) The tutor’s mark (0–10 marks) will account for 40% of the final mark. 2. DEFENCE AND PRESENTATION BEFORE THE EXAMINATION BOARD Following the submission of the Final Year Project, students will defend it before an Examination Board comprising lecturers from the degree programme, of whom at least the chair must hold a PhD. The panel’s mark (0–10 points) will account for 60 per cent of the final mark. Addendum The Final Year Project (TFG) or Master’s Thesis (TFM) must be an unpublished document, for which the student bears full responsibility as the sole author. The use of artificial intelligence (AI)-based tools in its preparation is restricted to auxiliary functions such as grammar checking, the generation of outlines or the search for general information. Any use of AI must be properly cited, specifying the tool used, its specific function and when it was applied. The use of AI to draft substantial content, carry out critical analysis or interpret results compromises the originality and authorship of the work. Checks for plagiarism and/or the use of AI will be carried out using the tool provided on the virtual campus and will be assessed by the tutor to verify the integrity of the work submitted. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 15 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
ELECTIVE COURSES
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS |
|---|---|---|---|
| N/A | Elective | OP | 18 |
| TOTAL: | 18 | ||
Year 5
ANNUAL SUBJECTS
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0330601 | Medical and Surgical Conditions 2 | OB | 9 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Medical and Surgical Conditions 2Código: 0330601 Imprimir Year 5. Annual module. Compulsory. 9 credits. Profesores
Objectives 1. To understand the pathophysiology of diseases by identifying the symptoms that arise throughout the disease process, as well as medical and surgical treatments, with a particular focus on their physiotherapeutic and orthopaedic aspects. 2. To understand the morphology, physiology, pathology and behaviour of people, both healthy and unwell, in their natural and social environments. 3. To be able to work within professional teams as a basic unit, in which healthcare professionals and other staff within healthcare organisations are organised in a mono-, multi- or interdisciplinary manner. 4. To recognise life-threatening situations and be able to perform basic and advanced life-support procedures. 5. To recognise and identify the psychological and physical problems arising from gender-based violence, in order to equip students with the skills for the prevention, early detection, care and rehabilitation of victims of this form of violence. 6. To understand the importance of keeping up to date with the knowledge, skills, abilities and attitudes that make up the professional competencies of a physiotherapist. 7. To communicate effectively and clearly, both orally and in writing, with users of the healthcare system as well as with other professionals. Prerequisites Not applicable Competencies Not applicable Learning outcomes RK1 To know and understand the morphology, physiology, pathology and behaviour of people, both healthy and unwell, in their natural and social environments RK10 To understand the pathophysiology of diseases, identifying the manifestations that appear throughout the process, as well as medical and surgical treatments, primarily in terms of their physiotherapeutic and orthopaedic aspects./ RK11 To recognise and identify the psychological and physical problems arising from gender-based violence, in order to equip students with the skills to prevent, detect at an early stage, provide support for and rehabilitate victims of this form of violence RS8 Identify the factors involved in teamwork and leadership situations. RC7 Be able to work within professional teams as a basic unit in which professionals and other staff within care organisations are organised in a mono-, multi- or interdisciplinary manner Description of the content 1. Identifies and describes the main nosological conditions of the nervous system that are amenable to rehabilitation treatment. 2. Identify and describe the main nosological conditions of the musculoskeletal system that are amenable to rehabilitation treatment. 3. Identify and describe the main infectious nosological conditions amenable to rehabilitation treatment. 4. Identifies and describes the main paediatric nosological conditions amenable to rehabilitation treatment. 5. Apply basic clinical principles to interdisciplinary practice in the field of healthcare, and in particular in the field of rehabilitation. 6. Understands the main changes resulting from the various treatments applied 7. Is familiar with the methods of examination and diagnosis of the nervous system, the musculoskeletal system, infectious diseases and paediatric conditions. 8. Identifies and describes, in basic terms, medical, orthopaedic, rehabilitation and surgical treatments, as well as the mechanisms for preventing various paediatric, infectious, neurological and musculoskeletal conditions requiring rehabilitation treatment. 9. Interpret clinical documentation produced by various healthcare professionals. 10. Is able to assess the functional status of the patient/service user, identifying the need for rehabilitation as the patient’s condition progresses. 11. Is able to seek solutions in the field of pathology and evaluate the progress of the results obtained from the treatment provided, based on the set objectives and established outcome criteria. 12. Applies clinical reasoning and scientific information management skills. 13. Keeps the knowledge and skills acquired up to date by critically analysing the methods, protocols and treatments used for different conditions from a scientific perspective. 14. Is able to communicate with people who are not experts in the field (primarily patients/service users, family members and carers). 15. Acquisition of the behaviours necessary for disease prevention and for encouraging the participation of the patient and their family in the recovery process. Training activities Expressed in hours of training activities and % of face-to-face delivery P1. – Lecture sessions 60 h 100% P2. Interactive classes 15 h 100% P3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities 15 hours 100% P4 – Preparation of assignments or projects and problem-solving 20 hours 0% P5. – Independent study, solving case studies or problems, and bibliographic research. 105 h 0% P6. Tutorials 6 100% P7. Knowledge tests 4 h 100% Total hours of training activities 225 Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ASSESSMENT CRITERIA: The student’s final mark will be derived from the following components: A. Theoretical lectures (maximum 60 marks). B. Practical sessions (maximum 20 marks). C. Seminars (maximum 10 marks). D. Attendance at lectures (maximum 2.5 marks). E. Attendance at practical sessions (maximum 2.5 marks). F. Seminar attendance (maximum 2.5 marks). G. Other activities (maximum 2.5 marks). ‘Other activities’ shall be taken to mean those which the lecturer considers to enhance students’ training and knowledge of the subject (e.g. attendance at conferences, courses, conducting literature reviews, publications, etc.). ASSESSMENTS: LECTURES AND PRACTICAL SESSIONS: Marking for lectures will be based on mid-term, term-end, regular and resit examinations. Halfway through each term (two), on a date to be determined, students will sit a MID-TERM EXAM, covering both theoretical and practical material (multiple-choice), which will count towards the final mark provided they achieve 70 per cent of the answers correctly (0.33 points will be deducted for each incorrect answer) At the end of each term (two), an OFFICIAL TERM EXAM will be held, covering the entire term’s syllabus, in which each student will be assessed on the material taught, except for that exempted in the corresponding mid-term exam. At the end of the academic year, the REGULAR OFFICIAL EXAMINATION will be held, to be sat by students who have not passed the module during the academic year. In this examination, exempted material will not be taken into account, and students must be examined on the entire module. Students who do not pass the official ordinary examination may sit the OFFICIAL EXTRAORDINARY EXAMINATION, in which they must also be examined on the entire subject. SEMINARS: Seminar marks will be assessed in accordance with the established criteria, with the lecturer providing an assessment of the materials and presentations given. ATTENDANCE: Marks for attendance at lectures, practical sessions and seminars (5 marks each) will be awarded provided the student does not exceed 3 absences per term. GRADE: The mark for each term will be based on the components outlined above (theoretical exam + practical exam + seminar assessment + attendance at lectures, practical sessions and seminars + other activities). To PASS the term, students must obtain a minimum of 50 points out of a possible 100. Of these 50 points, it is essential to obtain at least 30 points out of a possible 60 in the theory section and 10 points out of a possible 20 in the practical section, in the examinations corresponding to each term. The final mark will be calculated as the average of both terms; if a student fails to pass both terms, it will be based on the mark obtained in the final examination during the ordinary or supplementary examination period. To PASS THE COURSE, students must achieve a minimum of 50 marks in each term or a minimum of 50 marks in the final exam. In all examinations, marks are deducted for incorrect answers – 0.33 for each question answered incorrectly. SE1.—Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. – Final knowledge assessments 50 70 SE3. – Laboratory practical workbook 5 10 SE4. – Portfolio 5 10 Total 60 120 Bibliography Core: 1. Alonso, A. Diagnostic and Treatment Techniques in Rheumatology 1st ed. Panamericana. 2004. ISBN: 9788479039042 2. Cloherty, Eicheenwald and Stark Manual of Neonatal Care 4th ed. Masson. 2005. ISBN: 8445814532 3. Duró, J. CLINICAL RHEUMATOLOGY 1st ed. Elsevier. 2010. ISBN: 9788480866453 4. FULLER, G. EASY NEUROLOGICAL EXAMINATION 4th ed. Elsevier. 2010. ISBN: 9788480867252 5. Laso FJ Introduction to Clinical Medicine. 2nd ed. 4th ed. Elsevier. 2020. ISBN: 9788491133520 6. Merck Sharp Merck Manual Oceano. 2010. ISBN: 9788449433115 7. Muñoz, B. CLINIGUIA 2012. UPDATE ON DIAGNOSIS AND TREATMENT 7th ed. EviScience. 2012. ISBN: 9788493652456 8. Prieto Valtueña, J BALCELLS: THE CLINIC AND THE LABORATORY 20th ed. Masson. 2006. ISBN: 9788445816127 9. Prieto Valtueña, J. M PRACTICAL CLINICAL EXAMINATION 27th ed. ELSEVIER. 2011. ISBN: 9788445820513 10. Ramos Álvarez, J. J.; Jiménez Herranz, E. Handbook of Specialised Medical and Surgical Practice 1st ed. Bellisco. Technical and Scientific Publications. 2009. ISBN: 9788495277039 11. Rozman, C. FARRERAS AND ROZMAN’S INTERNAL MEDICINE, 19th ed. 19th ed. ELSEVIER. 2020. ISBN: 9788480868969 12. SERMF, SERI Paediatric Rehabilitation 1st ed. Panamericana. 2012. ISBN: 9788498353440 13.- Surós, A. Medical Semiology and Diagnostic Techniques 8th ed. Masson. 2001. ISBN: 8445810804 14. Yáñez, A. Fundamentals of Neurology 1st ed. MEDITERRANEO. 2011. ISBN: 9789562203180 Supplementary: 15.- Campistol, J. NEUROLOGY FOR PAEDIATRICIANS. A PRACTICAL APPROACH AND MANAGEMENT Editorial Médica Panamericana S.A. 2011. ISBN: 9788498353594 16.- Cano, R. NEUROREHABILITATION. SPECIFIC METHODS OF ASSESSMENT AND TREATMENT 1st ed. Editorial Médica Panamericana S.A. 2012. ISBN: 9788498354102 17.- J. Larry Jameson, Anthony S. Fauci, Dennis L. Kasper, Stephen L. Hauser, Dan L. Longo, Joseph Loscalzo Harrison: Principles of Internal Medicine, 2nd edition. McGraw-Hill Interamericana de España. 2018. ISBN: 9781456264864 18. Linnard-Palmer, L. NOTES ON PAEDIATRICS 1st ed. MCGRAW HILL. 2012. ISBN: 9786071506689 19. Rolak, L. NEUROLOGY. SECRETS 5th ed. ELSEVIER. 2011. ISBN: 9788480867559 20. Vojta, V. THE DISCOVERY OF IDEAL MOTOR SKILLS 1st ed. MORATA, PUBLISHERS. 2011. ISBN: 9788471126467 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0330604 | Specialised Physiotherapy 2 | OB | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Specialised Physiotherapy 2Código: 0330604 Imprimir Year 5. Annual module. Compulsory. 20 credits. Profesores
Objectives This module provides the theoretical and practical foundations required to apply physiotherapy in the treatment of the main conditions affecting the musculoskeletal system, as well as in patients who have undergone amputation or who suffer from neurological, cardiovascular and respiratory conditions. Prerequisites Not applicable Learning Outcomes Not applicable Learning outcomes RK1 To know and understand the morphology, physiology, pathology and behaviour of people, both healthy and unwell, in their natural and social environments RK9 To understand the physiological and structural changes that may occur as a result of the application of physiotherapy RS6 Identify the factors involved in teamwork and leadership situations. RS10 Understand and apply manual and instrumental assessment methods and procedures in Physiotherapy and Physical Rehabilitation, as well as the scientific evaluation of their usefulness and effectiveness RS15 Understand and apply the specific methods and techniques relating to the musculoskeletal system (including manual therapies, joint manipulation therapies, osteopathy and chiropractic), neurological processes, the respiratory system, the cardiovascular system, and disorders of statics and dynamics RS17 Analyse, plan and apply movement as a therapeutic measure, promoting the patient’s/user’s participation in their treatment process RC3 Diagnostic assessment of physiotherapy care in accordance with standards and using internationally recognised validation tools Description of the content 1. Be able to apply the fundamental concepts of physiotherapy to patients experiencing pain. 2. Be able to identify the indications and contraindications of the technique according to the specific condition. 3. Be able to incorporate basic physiotherapy techniques for the musculoskeletal system into the treatment of each patient. 4. Be able to distinguish between the various orthotic or prosthetic measures required by a patient at any given time. 5. Be able to recommend appropriate interventions for patients requiring physiotherapy due to conditions or sequelae of various rheumatological or traumatological syndromes. 6. Be able to use and develop the various therapeutic interventions for amputee patients. 7. Be able to recommend the appropriate assistive devices for patients according to their level of amputation. 8. Be able to identify and incorporate the various walking aids for amputees. 9. Be able to describe and explain functional rehabilitation in amputees. 10. Be able to distinguish between and select, for appropriate treatment, the most common orthopaedic, osteoarticular and muscular disorders associated with neurological, cardiovascular and respiratory conditions. 11. Be able to assess and identify patients with conditions or sequelae of various congenital and/or acquired neurological syndromes, involving psychomotor impairments. 12. Be able to identify and prioritise disability and levels of dependency. 13. Be able to facilitate the rehabilitation of compensatory activities of daily living. 14. Be able to justify and identify the need for home care. 15. Be able to distinguish between and select the various physiotherapy interventions for people with conditions or their sequelae arising from various respiratory or cardiovascular syndromes, whether congenital or acquired. 16. Be able to distinguish between and select the various physiotherapy applications for people with conditions or their sequelae arising from various syndromes, in relation to statics and dynamics. 17. Be able to apply and develop reflex therapeutic techniques and specific alternative or complementary manual techniques relevant to the field of physiotherapy, the safety and efficacy of which are established in accordance with the current state of scientific knowledge. Training activities Expressed in hours of training activities and as a percentage of face-to-face teaching P1. – Lectures 90 h 100% P2. Interactive classes 14 hours 100% P3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities 120 hours 100% P4 – Preparation of assignments or projects and problem-solving 8 h 0% P5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. 258 h 0% P6. Tutorials 6 h 100% P7. Knowledge tests 4 hours 100% Total of 500 hours of training activities Assessment system and criteria The assessment system for this module will consist of: oral examinations, practical demonstrations, multiple-choice and/or essay-style written examinations, the completion and presentation of assignments, tutorial supervision, and attendance and participation in seminars The assessment criteria will be weighted according to the teaching and learning methodology used and the teaching load of each component, in accordance with the following criteria: - Assessment of practical concepts: 45% - Assessment of theoretical concepts: 40% - Seminar activities (assignments): 15% The final mark for the module will be the sum of all the components, with a mark of 5 being considered a pass, provided that a mark of 5 is achieved independently in both the assessment of ‘practical concepts’ and the assessment of ‘theoretical concepts’, a mark of 5 is achieved independently, with both parts required to be passed separately. If a student fails to achieve the minimum mark of 5 required to pass the module, but has achieved a mark of 5 in both the theoretical and practical components, they must undertake an additional activity to obtain the necessary mark; this will be at the lecturer’s discretion, depending on the student’s performance and progress throughout the course. 1. ATTENDANCE: Students will be required to attend a minimum percentage of the theoretical or practical sessions in which teaching takes place. In the Faculty of Health Sciences, this minimum attendance requirement for teaching activities is 70 per cent for theoretical sessions and 100 per cent for practical sessions and practical work (Trabs). Failure to attend will result in the loss of the benefits of continuous assessment. Attendance at practical classes and practical sessions is therefore COMPULSORY (100 per cent attendance is required, unless duly justified). Failure to attend practical sessions may result in students being unable to sit the continuous assessment tests for those sessions. Justification for absences must be provided via the channels and within the timeframes specified by the university. 2. Assessment of THEORETICAL CONCEPTS will take place as follows: throughout the two semesters, a series of eliminatory assessments will be held covering the material taught up to that point. In order to pass the module for each semester, students must achieve a minimum mark of 6 or above in these assessments. A mark from one assessment may be used to compensate for another, provided that a mark of at least 5 has been obtained. This mark is subject to compliance with the attendance requirement mentioned in point 1. If the final mark for the qualifying assessments is below 6 (or the minimum attendance requirement is not met), the student must sit an examination covering the entire syllabus taught in that semester during the official examination sessions. The mark for this theoretical component will account for 40% of the final mark for the module. 3. The assessment of PRACTICAL CONCEPTS will be based on two criteria: 1- Provided the student meets the class attendance requirement, they must complete two continuous assessment tests, each of which accounts for 10% of the practical mark for that term. 2- A practical examination at the end of the semester, worth a maximum of 80% of the practicals mark. This examination will assess whether the student possesses sufficient knowledge and proficiency in each of the techniques covered in the practical classes. The student’s attitude and participation during classes, as well as the submission of the practical workbook and other activities set during the course, will be taken into account when calculating the overall mark. The final mark for the practical component will account for 45% of the final mark for the module. 4. SEMINARS (TRABS): These will explore certain aspects of the course in greater depth, which are of particular relevance to the student’s education. Students will be required to carry out a series of activities, such as researching and commenting on articles, solving case studies, and giving ORAL PRESENTATIONS OR PRESENTING ASSIGNMENTS throughout the semester. These will be assessed provided the work is submitted on time, taking into account: - Explanation of concepts - Sources consulted - Quality and presentation methods - Compliance with the specific guidelines for the assignment or presentation - Attendance and participation of members, etc. In order for the seminar marks to be taken into account, students must, once again, meet the minimum attendance requirement set by the university. Otherwise, the seminar marks will not be included in the overall calculation of the end-of-year mark. 5. OTHER DISTANCE-LEARNING ACTIVITIES will be proposed by the lecturer or the university; these will assess the student’s active participation and will enable them to improve their mark. Examples of such activities include: - Participation in symposia, university conferences, lectures, events organised by the university, etc. These activities will be taken into account when the lecturer deems them to have been beneficial, provided that students have mastered the theoretical and practical concepts of the module and met the minimum attendance requirement. - Completing case studies, questions, collaborative tasks and/or tests posted on the course portal. SEMESTER AND FINAL EXAMS If a student has failed to pass the theoretical part of the module through the eliminatory tests held throughout the semester, or does not meet the minimum attendance requirement, they must sit an examination covering the entire syllabus taught that semester, during the official examination sessions scheduled by the university. If a student fails to pass the course for any of the semesters, covering both the theoretical and practical components, they must sit the official June examination, in which they will be examined solely on the failed semester. If, in that examination, they fail to pass either part, they will have to sit the July supplementary examination covering the entire subject they have failed (Theory or Practical). Addendum Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities (100 per cent for practical sessions and coursework), which require the student’s physical or virtual presence, will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the ordinary examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the corresponding weighting as specified in the course syllabus. SE1.—Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. Final knowledge assessments 50 70 SE3. – Laboratory practical workbook 5 10 SE4. – Portfolio 5 10 Total 60 120 Bibliography Core: 1. Berg, Kristian Illustrated Guide to Therapeutic Stretching : Tutor. 2012. ISBN: 9788479028961 2. Bisbe Gutiérrez, Marta Physiotherapy in Neurology : : Médica Panamericana. 2012. ISBN: 9788498353068 3. Cano de la Cuerda New Technologies in Neurorehabilitation: Médica Panamericana. 2018. ISBN: 9788491102397 4. Cano, R. NEUROREHABILITATION. SPECIFIC METHODS OF ASSESSMENT AND TREATMENT 1st ed. Editorial Médica Panamericana S.A. 2012. ISBN: 9788498354102 5. Díaz Mohedo, Esther. Manual of Physiotherapy in Traumatology / Elsevier. 2015. ISBN: 9788490228715 6. Gjelsvik, Bente E The Bobath Concept in Adult Neurology GEORG THIEME. 2008. ISBN: 9783131454515 7. Jesús Seco Medical and Surgical Conditions for Physiotherapists: Editorial Médica Panamericana. 2017. ISBN: 9788498359459 8. Jesús Seco Calvo Clinical Specialities in Physiotherapy Panamericana. 2021. ISBN: 9788491106128 9. Juan José Ramos Álvarez A Practical Guide to Functional Bandaging Publixed. 2013. ISBN: 9788494098758 10. Smith, Mandy Cardiovascular and Respiratory Rehabilitation : Harcourt. 2001. ISBN: 8481744891 Supplementary: 11. Ana Ruz Esclarín Spinal Cord Injury: A Multidisciplinary Approach Panamericana. 2021. ISBN: 9788491106333 12. Bettina Paeth Experiences with the Bobath approach Panamericana. 2001. ISBN: 8479035714 13. Díaz Mancha, Juan Antonio Clinical Diagnosis of the Upper Limb in Manual Therapy Elsevier, 2017. ISBN: 9788491130499 14. Jesús Calvo The Nervous System: Methods, Clinical Physiotherapy and Conditions for Physiotherapists Panamericana. 2019. ISBN: 9788491103639 15. Jesús Seco Calvo Respiratory system: methods, clinical physiotherapy and conditions for physiotherapists Panamericana. 2018. ISBN: 9788491102649 16. Joseph Muscolino Manual of bone and muscle palpation with trigger points, reference patterns and stretches Panamericana. 2017. ISBN: 8498358183 17. Maria Stokes Physiotherapy in Neurological Rehabilitation Elsevier. 2013. ISBN: 9788490223062 18. Sheila Lennon, Gita Ramdharry, Geert Verheyden, Physiotherapy in Neurological Rehabilitation Elsevier. 2025. ISBN: 9788413827889 19. Tony Bové Functional Bandaging Elsevier. 2021. ISBN: 9788491135210 20. Zambudio Periago Prostheses, Orthoses and Assistive Devices, by Ramón. Ed Masson. 2009. ISBN: 9788445819692 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430601 | Clinical Placements II | OB | 32 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Clinical Placements IICódigo: 0430601 Imprimir Year 5. Annual module. Compulsory. 32 credits. Profesores
Objectives The primary objective of Clinical Placements II is to undertake pre-professional placements in the form of an independent clinical rotation, culminating in a final assessment of competencies at health centres, hospitals and other healthcare facilities, with the aim of integrating all the knowledge, skills, abilities, attitudes and values acquired across all subjects. All professional competencies will be developed, equipping students to provide effective physiotherapy care. Prerequisites Not applicable Competencies Not applicable Learning outcomes RCPAE Pre-professional placements in the form of an independent clinical rotation, culminating in a final assessment of competencies at health centres, hospitals and other healthcare facilities, with the aim of integrating all the knowledge, skills, abilities, attitudes and values acquired across all subjects; and to develop all professional competencies, equipping students to provide effective physiotherapy care RS4 Acquire clinical management skills, including the efficient use of healthcare resources, and carry out planning, management and monitoring activities within healthcare units where physiotherapy is provided, and understand its relationship with other healthcare services. RODS Develop effective communication, teamwork, analytical thinking, creativity and ethical leadership from a cross-disciplinary perspective, clearly inspired by democratic principles and values, as well as the Sustainable Development Goals, in order to operate with integrity within the professional sphere Description of course content 1. Apply the fundamental knowledge, skills and attitudes acquired across all subjects and interpret the general aspects of medical conditions with different aetiologies relevant to physiotherapy. 2. Apply physiotherapy intervention models in practice, understand the theoretical basis of functional tests and assessments, and identify the anatomical and behavioural changes that occur as a result of physiotherapy intervention. 3. Select and carry out general physiotherapy procedures applicable to medical conditions affecting all the systems and apparatus of the human body, both in the promotion and maintenance of health and in the prevention of disease. 4. Consult and apply the principles that underpin problem-solving and clinical reasoning. 5. Effectively and accurately document a complete physiotherapy clinical record, containing all relevant information from the patient’s/user’s initial appointment through to the physiotherapy discharge report. 6. Be able to apply physiotherapy assessment procedures by interpreting electrical and manual tests to determine outcomes such as: the degree of nerve function impairment, muscle strength, functional abilities and range of joint motion. 7. Present the relevant data recorded in the clinical record and establish a physiotherapy diagnosis, taking into account regulations and internationally validated assessment tools. 8. To implement, manage and coordinate the Physiotherapy Intervention Plan, taking into account the principle of the user’s individuality and utilising the therapeutic tools specific to physiotherapy. 9. Report on the progress of the results achieved through physiotherapy treatment in relation to the set objectives and established outcome criteria. 10. Design and implement therapeutic exercises using specialised methods for cardiorespiratory, orthopaedic, traumatological, paediatric, rheumatological and geriatric conditions and injuries, as well as sports-related injuries, spinal disorders, urinary and faecal incontinence, and pre- and post-natal exercises. 11. Design and apply procedures involving kinesitherapy, mobilisation, manipulation, massage therapy and manual therapy, as well as the various modalities of electrotherapy, thermotherapy and cryotherapy, phototherapy, ultrasound therapy, vibrotherapy, magnetotherapy, ergotherapy and pressotherapy, hydrotherapy, balneotherapy, climatotherapy and thalassotherapy. 12. Design and apply the various modalities of reflex therapeutic methods and techniques, as well as other specific alternative or complementary manual therapies relevant to the field of physiotherapy. 13. To organise and deliver group treatment to patients with similar problems. 14. Encourage the participation of the patient and their family in their recovery process. 15. Prevent and avoid risks during the administration of treatment and establish a plan of guidelines to be followed throughout the treatment. 16. To incorporate scientific research and evidence-based practice as part of the professional culture, as well as to establish lines of research within the profession’s scope of competence and disseminate them within the research group; to participate in local research groups; to disseminate research work and its conclusions within the scientific and professional community; establish physiotherapy care protocols based on scientific evidence and promote all professional activities that contribute to the advancement of research in physiotherapy. 17. To play an active role in the training of physiotherapy professionals; to participate in the development and delivery of educational programmes related to physiotherapy aimed at professional groups, interdisciplinary teams and/or the general public. Training activities Expressed in hours of training activities and as a percentage of face-to-face sessions P5. – Personal study, case or problem-solving, and literature reviews. 168 h 0% P6. Tutorials 10 h 100% P7. Knowledge tests 2 hours 100% P10. External academic placement 600 h 100% Assessment system and criteria Each student’s GRADE is calculated as the average of the marks awarded at each of the centres. In order to pass the module, it is essential to submit the CLINICAL PLACEMENT REPORT. If this is not submitted and the module is completed within the estimated timeframe, the mark for Clinical Placements will be recorded as FAIL The final mark for the module will be calculated according to the following criteria: - Report from the external tutor (placement centre) 50% - Academic tutor’s report (course tutors) 20% - Practical placement report 30% If the placements are carried out at several centres, the mark will be calculated as the average of these. 4.1 INSTITUTIONAL ASSESSMENT Assessment will be based on the development and acquisition of the competences detailed in the teaching guide for the relevant module, in which various aspects are assessed, such as the examples given below: YES NO Attendance and punctuality. Uniform and personal hygiene Teamwork and collaboration Compliance with the rules 0–10 Initiative Patient relations Technical and manual skills Theoretical knowledge and knowledge of pathologies Knowledge and Skills Acquired The ‘Physiotherapy Clinical Record’ will be assessed on the following points: • Systematically recording significant data from the information gathered and specifically set out in the Physiotherapy Clinical Record. • Identify data and describe potential and actual abnormalities, functional limitations and disabilities. • Recognise, through examination, patients with disabilities and functional limitations relating to: o Skin o Musculature (Daniel’s) o Differential diagnosis (orthopaedic tests) o Joint range of motion (goniometry) o Spine ;;; 4.2. PRACTICAL TRAINING REPORT Students must submit the clinical case reports prepared at each of the centres. This report will be assessed by the academic tutor. Failure to pass the clinical placements may be due to the following reasons: o A final mark below 5 o Failure to meet the course objectives o Repeated and unjustified absences and/or tardiness. o Obvious lack of interest. o Irresponsibility in carrying out assigned tasks o Inappropriate behaviour towards service users, those responsible for their training and centre staff. o Inadequate development of skills and abilities In the event of a fail at any assigned centre during the Clinical Placements, whether due to poor attendance or other reasons, the Clinical Placements module will be failed. SE7.—Report from the external academic placement tutor 50 50 SE8.- Report from the academic supervisor for external academic placements 20 20 SE9. Assessment of the placement report 30 30 Total 100 100 Bibliography Basic: 1. Blaise Dubois 1, Jean-François Esculier 2. Soft-tissue injuries simply need PEACE and LOVE SaltWrap. 2021. ISBN: 1735728500 2. Delgado Ojeda, María Antonia Rehabilitation and Physiotherapy in Geriatrics Alcalá la Real (Jaén): Formación Alcalá, 2004. 2004. ISBN: 8496224414 3. Ehmer, B. Physiotherapy in orthopaedics and traumatology Interamericana. 2005. ISBN: 8448606566 4. Einsingbach, Thomas Muscle Recovery in Physiotherapy and Rehabilitation Barcelona: Paidotribo, 1994. 1994. ISBN: 8480191236 5. Esther Díaz Mohedo Manual of Physiotherapy in Traumatology Elsevier. 2015. ISBN: 9788490229699 6. Halima Shakil Scoliosis: a review of types of curves, aetiological theories and conservative treatment Springer. 2021. ISBN: 9789813363298 7. Hüter-Becker, A. Physiotherapy: description of techniques and treatment Barcelona: Paidotribo, 2003. 2003. ISBN: 848019667X 8. James T. S. Meadows Differential Diagnosis in Physiotherapy Elsevier. 2010. ISBN: 9788535226485 9. Jesús Seco Calvo Clinical Specialities in Physiotherapy Panamericana. 2021. ISBN: 9788491106128 10. Kapandji, A.I Joint Physiology II Panamericana. 2006. ISBN: 9788479003743 11. Kapandji, A.I Joint Physiology: Trunk and Spine Panamericana. 2007. ISBN: 978898350470 12. Kapandji, I.A. Notebooks on Joint Physiology, 6th edition: Volume I: Upper Limb Panamericana Medical Publishers. 2006. ISBN: 9788498350029 13. Kendall, Florence Peterson Kendall’s Muscles: Tests, Functions and Postural Pain Madrid: Marban, 2005. 2005. ISBN: 8471015277 14. Klaus Buckup Clinical Tests for Bone, Joint and Muscle Disorders (6th ed.): Examinations, Signs and Symptoms Elsevier. 2019. ISBN: 8491134883 15. Lemes, Daza Clinical and Functional Assessment of Human Movement Panamericana. 2007. ISBN: 9589181614 16. López Román, Antonio Fundamentals of General Physiotherapy Bellisco. 2009. ISBN: 9788495277022 17. López Román, Antonio Learning Physiotherapy Concepts Through Reasoning Bellisco. 2007. ISBN: 9788496486 18. M. TORRES, J. SALVAT A Guide to Massage Therapy for Physiotherapists Panamericana. 2006. ISBN: 8479037733 19. Michael Boyle Advances in Training Panamericana. 2018. ISBN: 9781931046626 20. Millán Calenti Gerontology and Geriatrics: Assessment and Intervention Panamericana. 2010. ISBN: 9788498352 21. Reichel, Hilde Sabine Physiotherapy: Clinical Practice Barcelona: Paidotribo, 2003. 2003. ISBN: 8480195975 22. Rodríguez Martín Electrotherapy in Physiotherapy Panamericana. 2004. ISBN: 9788479037536 23. Serge Tixa Atlas of Palpatory Anatomy. Volume 2. Lower Limb Elsevier Masson. 2014. ISBN: 9788445825815 24. Vilar Orellana, Eduard Physiotherapy of the Musculoskeletal System Madrid: McGraw-Hill, 2005. 2005. ISBN: 8448605381 Supplementary: 25.- Adian, MJ/ Cooper, JM. Biomechanics of Human Movement Brown. 1995. ISBN: 978-0-470-398 26. Alvarez Rey, G. New Developments in Sports Medicine Applied to Sport, Health and High-Performance Sport Panamericana. 2004. ISBN: 84-609-0795-3 27. Beni Ayerbe, I Fundamentals of Tactics and Motor Action in Sport Síntesis. 2010. ISBN: 9788497566810 28. Bettina Paeth Experiences with the Bobath concept Panamericana. 2001. ISBN: 8479035714 29. Bryan S Williams 1, Steven P Cohen 4. Greater trochanteric pain syndrome: a review of anatomy, diagnosis and treatment journal. 2009. 30. Cristancho Gómez, Wiliam Fundamentals of respiratory physiotherapy and mechanical ventilation. Bogotá: El manual moderno Bogotá: El Manual Moderno. 2003. ISBN: 9789589446256 31. Fitzgerald, RH; Kaufer, H; Malkani, AL Orthopaedics Panamericana Medical. 2004. 32. Fucci, Sergio Biomechanics of the musculoskeletal system applied to fitness training Madrid [etc.]: Elsevier, 2003. 2003. ISBN: 8481746452 33. Gwendolyn Vuurberg 2. Diagnosis, treatment and prevention of ankle sprains: update of an evidence-based clinical guideline British Journal of Sports Medicine. 2018. 34.- Hafelinger, U. Coordination and proprioceptive training Paidotribo. 2010. ISBN: 9788480196754 35. Izquierdo, Mikel Biomechanics and neuromuscular foundations of physical activity and sport Editorial Médica Panamericana. 2008. ISBN: 9788498350234 36. José Rubens Rebelatto Geriatric Physiotherapy McGraw-Hill. 2005. ISBN: 84-481-9849-2 37. Macias Merlo, M. Lourdes Paediatric Physiotherapy 2nd ed. Madrid [etc.]: McGraw-Hill Interamericana, 2002. 2002. ISBN: 8448604679 38. Mariscal Ortiz Preventive Aspects of Physical Education *Educación Siglo XX* magazine. 1987. 39.- Miralles I. Clinical biomechanics of musculoskeletal injuries Masson. 2007. 40. Miralles Sariola, J Combat sports: Boxing, Judo, Wrestling and Taekwondo. History of different disciplines and variants, most common injuries and preventative measures Menarini Publications on Health and Sport. 2008. ISBN: B.12837-08 41. Mora Amérigo, Enrique Physiotherapy of the musculoskeletal system Síntesis. 1998. ISBN: 9788477385790 42.- Nayra Deise Dos Anjos Rabelo, Paulo Roberto Garcia Lucareli Do hip muscle weakness and dynamic knee valgus matter for the clinical evaluation and decision-making process in patients with patellofemoral pain? Brazilian Journal of Physiotherapy. 2018. 43.- Nikos Malliaropoulos Soft tissue injuries remain a challenge in musculoskeletal sports and exercise medicine Teton NewMedia. 2015. ISBN: 978-189344127 44. – Pecci, MC / Herrero, T / López, M / Mozos, A Children’s play and its methodology MacGraw-Hill. 2010. 45. Platonov, Vladimir Nikolaievich General Theory of Olympic Sports Training Barcelona: Paidotribo, 2001. 2001. ISBN: 8480195711 46. S H Liu, T M Nguyen Ankle Sprains and Other Soft Tissue Injuries Amazon Media. 2021. ISBN: B09PH82C8S 47. Sanchez Buñuelos Health-oriented physical activity Biblioteca Nueva. 1996. ISBN: 978847030423 48. Sirvet Belando, J. Anthropometric assessment of body composition. Kinanthropometry University of Alicante, Publications Service. 2009. ISBN: 9788497170529 49. Verjoshanky, Y. Overtraining Paidotribo. 2000. ISBN: 978-84-8019-4 50. Weiss, Hans Rudolf Physiotherapy for Scoliosis Based on Diagnosis Barcelona: Paidotribo, 2004. 2004. ISBN: 8480197315 51.- Wilmore, JH./Costill, DL Physiology of Exercise and Sport Paidotribo. 2004. ISBN: 84-8019-749-8 52. Zatsiorsky, V Science and Practice of Strength Training. Human Kinetics Champaign. 1995. ISBN: 978-073605628 Others: 53. Lisa M. Tibor, M.D., and Jon K. Sekiya, M.D. Differential Diagnosis of Pain Around the Hip Joint The Journal of Arthroscopic and Related Surgery, 2008. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430602 | Physiotherapy in Clinical Specialisms II | OB | 14 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Physiotherapy in Clinical Specialisms IICódigo: 0430602 Imprimir Year 5. Annual module. Compulsory. 14 credits. Profesores
Objectives The aim of this module is to familiarise students with and help them understand the methods, procedures and practices of physiotherapy, aimed both at therapy itself – to be applied in clinical settings for rehabilitation or functional recovery – and at carrying out activities designed to promote and maintain health. It also aims to equip students with the skills to identify the most appropriate physiotherapy treatment for various conditions, as well as for health prevention and promotion, and for processes of growth and development. 1. To identify the most appropriate physiotherapy treatment in the various processes relating to health disorders, prevention and health promotion, as well as in the processes of growth and development, within the framework of community care. 2. To identify the most appropriate physiotherapy treatment in the various processes relating to health impairment, prevention and promotion, as well as in the processes of growth and development. 3. Assess the patient’s/user’s condition through a physiotherapy care assessment, planning interventions and evaluating their effectiveness within a collaborative working environment alongside other health professionals. 4. Understand and apply specific methods and techniques relating to the musculoskeletal system (including manual therapies, joint manipulation therapies, osteopathy and chiropractic), neurological processes, the respiratory system, the cardiovascular system, and disorders of posture and movement 5. To be familiar with and apply guidelines for good clinical practice. 6. To equip students with the knowledge required to treat the most common conditions in geriatric patients. 7. To equip students with the knowledge required to treat cancer patients. 8. To equip students with the knowledge required to treat the main conditions addressed within the framework of primary healthcare 9. To equip students with the knowledge required to treat sports-related injuries 10. To acquire clinical management skills, including the efficient use of healthcare resources, and to carry out planning, management and monitoring activities in the care units where physiotherapy is provided, and to understand its relationship with other healthcare services 11. To evaluate the progress of treatment outcomes in relation to the set objectives. Prerequisites Not applicable Competencies Not applicable Learning outcomes RK1 To know and understand the morphology, physiology, pathology and behaviour of people, both healthy and unwell, in their natural and social environments RK3 To know and understand physiotherapy methods, procedures and interventions, aimed both at therapy proper—to be applied in clinical practice for functional rehabilitation or recovery—and at carrying out activities aimed at promoting and maintaining health. RK16 To understand the factors relating to health and the issues associated with physiotherapy in the fields of primary care, specialist care and occupational health. RS2 To evaluate the progress of treatment outcomes in relation to the set objectives RS3 Prepare the discharge report for physiotherapy care once the proposed objectives have been met RS4 Acquire clinical management skills, including the efficient use of healthcare resources, and carry out planning, management and monitoring activities in healthcare units where physiotherapy is provided, taking into account their relationship with other healthcare services. RS13 Identify the most appropriate physiotherapy treatment for various conditions, as well as for health promotion and prevention, and for processes of growth and development RS14 Assess the patient’s/user’s condition through a physiotherapy care assessment, planning interventions and evaluating their effectiveness within a collaborative working environment alongside other health professionals. RS15 Understand and apply specific methods and techniques relating to the musculoskeletal system (including manual therapies, joint manipulation therapies, osteopathy and chiropractic), neurological processes, the respiratory system, the cardiovascular system, and alterations in statics and dynamics RS16 Specific methods and techniques that take into account the implications of orthopaedics in physiotherapy, reflex therapeutic techniques, as well as other alternative and/or complementary methods and techniques whose safety and efficacy have been demonstrated in accordance with the current state of scientific knowledge RC3 Diagnostic assessment of physiotherapy care in accordance with standards and using internationally recognised validation tools RC4 Implement, manage and coordinate the physiotherapy intervention plan, using appropriate therapeutic tools and taking into account the individual needs of the patient. RC6 To work in the areas of health promotion, prevention, protection and recovery RC10 Carry out physiotherapy interventions based on a holistic approach to healthcare, involving multi-professional cooperation, the integration of processes and continuity of care RC16 Encourage the participation of the patient and their family in their recovery process/ RC17 Understand and apply guidelines for good clinical practice Description of course content 1. Systematically draw up and complete the full Physiotherapy Clinical Record, as applied to the fields of specialisation in Primary Care, Geriatrics, Sports Physiotherapy, Oncology and Veterinary Physiotherapy. 2. Carry out an assessment of the functional status of patients/users in Primary Care, Geriatrics, Sports Physiotherapy, Oncology and Veterinary Physiotherapy units, which includes: Receiving the patient, collecting and assessing subjective information provided by the patient and/or significant others in their care network. Applying the appropriate physiotherapy assessment procedures in each of these fields. Identifying the findings and describing the actual and potential impairments, functional limitations and disabilities identified. Recording the relevant details from the information gathered and accurately documenting them in the Physiotherapy Medical Record. 3. Implement, manage and coordinate the physiotherapy intervention plan within the Primary Care, Geriatrics, Oncology, Sports Physiotherapy and Veterinary Physiotherapy teams, taking into account the principle of the patient’s individuality and using the therapeutic tools specific to physiotherapy in these fields. This involves: Establishing and applying the appropriate physical therapeutic measures in each specific case for individuals who present with a condition or who are at risk of developing one. Carrying out specific physiotherapy treatment techniques on the patient/user, according to the different conditions, and applying intervention procedures to their environment. Designing and applying mobilisation and physical care procedures. Designing and applying the various forms of therapeutic methods and procedures specific to physiotherapy, as well as other specific, alternative or complementary manual therapies related to the field of physiotherapy. Encourage the participation of the patient and their family in the recovery process. To prevent and avoid any potential risks arising from the application of treatment. Draw up a plan of guidelines to be followed during the intervention. Prepare the discharge report. 4. To provide effective physiotherapy care, delivering comprehensive support to patients/clients in Primary Care, geriatric, sports, oncological and veterinary physiotherapy services, for which the following will be necessary: Interpret medical prescriptions. Prepare the environment in which the physiotherapy sessions will take place so that it is adapted to the needs of the patient/service user. Explain to the patient/service user, in an appropriate manner and tailored to their level of understanding, the objectives of each intervention, whilst seeking their cooperation at all times. Record the physiotherapy treatment provided, the patient’s progress and any incidents on a daily basis. Identify the signs and symptoms of impaired biological functions related to physiotherapy care in these clinical specialities and those related to the remit of other disciplines. Monitor and interpret vital signs during the physiotherapy session. Guide activities and approaches in relation to the patient/service user. Design and develop social, healthcare and educational awareness campaigns: physiotherapy programmes in schools and across various professional settings, ‘Back School’ programmes, etc. Incorporate communication skills in geriatrics and interact appropriately with older people. Conduct a comprehensive geriatric assessment correctly, with particular emphasis on function. Recognise the different types of geriatric patients and be able to adapt the application of physiotherapy treatment and communication with older people. Assess the appropriate placement of older people within the relevant level of healthcare and/or social care. Assess an athlete’s physical capabilities. Identify the mechanism by which an injury occurs during sporting activity. Be able to take immediate action in the event of a sports-related emergency at the scene of a sports injury. To promote effective coordination and communication when working as part of a team with other professionals involved in patient/service user care. Training activities Expressed in hours of training activities and % of face-to-face delivery P1. – Lecture sessions 60 h 100% P2. Interactive classes 7 h 100% P3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities 60 hours 100% P4 – Completing assignments or projects and solving challenges 20 h 0% P5. – Independent study, solving case studies or problems, and bibliographic research. 193 h 0% P6. Tutorials 6 h 100% P7. Knowledge tests 4 hours 100% Total hours of training activities 350 Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any different requirements that may be set out in the relevant study programme, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities requiring the student’s physical or virtual presence will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment. In such cases, the examination taken during the official period set by the University will constitute the sole assessment criterion, weighted according to the percentage specified in the study programme. Assessment systems MINIMUM MAXIMUM SE1.— Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. – Final knowledge assessments 50 70 SE3. – Laboratory practical logbook 5 10 SE4.- Portfolio 5 10 Teaching methodologies 1. Lecture (traditional teaching method) 2. Case study method 3. Problem-based learning 4. Simulation environments 5. Experiential learning 6. Workshop-based teaching and practical skills 7. Collaborative learning The assessment system will consist of: oral examinations, multiple-choice written examinations, essay-type written examinations, the completion and presentation of assignments, tutorial supervision, and attendance and participation in seminars and practical demonstrations. The assessment criteria will be weighted according to the teaching and learning methodology used and the teaching workload for each component, in accordance with current legislation. Students must pass each and every one of the assessment criteria and achieve an overall mark of over 50% to be considered to have passed the course. The module is divided into two practical blocks and two theoretical blocks; the final mark for the module is the average of the practical and theoretical components, each accounting for 50 per cent. The marks for the lectures and practical workshops will be recorded separately during the relevant ordinary examination periods for the academic year. Both the lecture-based and practical components may be exempted by sitting two exemption examinations, provided the marks for these are 6 or above. MARKS IN EXAMS TO EXEMPT STUDENTS FROM FURTHER ASSESSMENTS MAY NOT BE ROUNDED, EXCEPT FOR MARKS OF 5.9 OR ABOVE, IN WHICH CASE MATHEMATICAL ROUNDING WILL BE APPLIED. It is emphasised that, in the practical examination, it is important for students to answer all questions on average in order to achieve a ‘PASS’, that is to say, they must not leave any questions unanswered or demonstrate a profound lack of understanding of any part of the subject matter, as this would result in significant shortcomings in their learning and development of the practical aspects of the subject. It is essential that students attend 100 per cent of the classes relating to the practical workshops to maximise their learning potential. In the case of the dry needling module, an assessment cannot be carried out if the student has not attended class and has therefore not acquired the minimum skills required to perform the procedure safely. SE1. Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. – Final knowledge assessments 50 70 SE3. – Laboratory practical workbook 5 10 SE4. – Portfolio 5 10 Total 60 120 Bibliography Core: 1. Luigi Stecco and Carla Stecco Fascial Manipulation: Practical Guide Amolca. 2011. ISBN: 9789587550092 2. Andrejz Pilat MYOFASCIAL INDUCTION. AN ANATOMICAL APPROACH TO THE TREATMENT OF FASCIAL DYSFUNCTION, VOL. 1: UPPER BODY Journal Editions. 2023. ISBN: 978-987-8452- 3. Andrés Quevedo García Orthopaedic Manual Therapy in the Treatment of Pain Elsevier. 2022. ISBN: 978-841382020 4. Andrzej Pilat Myofascial Induction McGraw Hill. 2003. ISBN: 8448605594 5. Bucher-Dollenz G, Wiesner R The Maitland Concept: Its Application in Pan-American Physiotherapy Panamericana. 2010. ISBN: 9788498352139 6. Carlos López Cubas Neurodynamics in clinical practice Wolters Kluwer. 2022. ISBN: 978-841889206 7. César Fernández de las Peñas Dry needling of myofascial trigger points Elsevier. 2013. ISBN: 9788490223871 8. David S. Butler Mobilisation of the Nervous System Paidotribo. 2009. ISBN: 9788480199988 9. Donald A. Neumann Fundamentals of Physical Rehabilitation Paidotribo. 2007. ISBN: 9788480198134 10. Eduardo Zamorano Neuromeningeal Mobilisation Panamericana. 2013. ISBN: 9788479039707 11. Fernando Queipo Moreno Myofascial Chains: The Method for Treating and Preventing the Source of Pain. Fernando Queipo. 2018. ISBN: 8409033992 12. Invasive Physiotherapy for Myofascial Pain Syndrome Invasive Physiotherapy for Myofascial Pain Syndrome Médica Panamericana. 2021. ISBN: 978-849110395 13.- Francisco Javier Castillo Montes Principles and Applications of Neuromuscular Taping Alcala Publishing Group. 2012. ISBN: 9788415485230 14. James Earls Myofascial Induction for Structural Balance Paidotribo. 2013. ISBN: 9788499102405 15. Jeffrey D. Boyling Grieve, Contemporary Manual Therapy Masson. 2006. ISBN: 9788445816059 16. Luchau, T. Advanced Myofascial Techniques Journal. 2019. ISBN: 9789874922090 17. Michael Shacklock Clinical Neurodynamics: A New System for Musculoskeletal Treatment Elsevier. 2007. ISBN: 9788480862219 18. Philippe Campignion Muscle and Joint Chains: The GDS Method, Volume 1, Antero-Medial Chains Lencina Verdu. 2010. ISBN: 9788461389315 19. Philippe Campignion Muscle and Joint Chains: The GDS Concept, Basic Principles Author-publisher. 2001. ISBN: 9788460754831 20. – Philippe Campignion Muscle and joint chains: the GDS method, Volume 3: posterolateral chains Author and publisher. 2007. ISBN: 9788461170968 21. TRAVEL AND SIMONS Myofascial Pain and Dysfunction. Volume 1: Upper Half Panamericana. 2002. ISBN: 8479035757 22. Travell Myofascial Pain and Dysfunction: The Trigger Point Manual, Volume 2 Panamericana. 2004. ISBN: 9788461316991 23. Txema Aguirre Kinesiology: Theory and Practice Author-Publisher. 2010. ISBN: 9788461409860 Supplementary: 24. Leon Chaitow Muscular Energy Techniques Edinburgh; New York: Churchill Livingstone/Elsevier. 2013. ISBN: 1389874229 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430603 | Final-Year Project | OB | 8 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Final-Year ProjectCódigo: 0430603 Imprimir Year 5. Annual module. Compulsory. 8 credits. Profesores
Objectives •To understand, select and justify appropriate research designs and methods for physiotherapy, taking ethical considerations into account. •To interpret, analyse, summarise and critically evaluate research findings. •Identify the need for research, search for publications related to physiotherapy, and formulate relevant research questions. •Demonstrate skills in independently searching for, critically reviewing and synthesising scientific literature and other relevant information. •To use basic research techniques. •Use scientific language in the health sciences. •To explore a specific area in depth using the scientific method. •Present and defend a final-year project before the University Examination Board, consisting of an exercise in integrating the course content covered and the skills acquired. •Disseminate research findings for relevant critique. Prerequisites Not applicable Competencies Not applicable Learning outcomes RCTFG Presentation and defence before the University Examination Board of a final-year project, consisting of an exercise integrating the course content covered and the competences acquired RODS Develops effective communication, teamwork, analytical thinking, creativity and ethical leadership from a cross-cutting perspective, clearly inspired by democratic principles and values, as well as the Sustainable Development Goals, in order to conduct oneself with integrity in the professional sphere Description of the content Completion of a project applying basic review and research techniques in a specific area of Physiotherapy and presenting it to an examination board, having utilised basic research techniques within the scientific method. In this project, students must demonstrate the ability to: Understand, select and defend research designs and methods appropriate to physiotherapy, taking ethical considerations into account. Interpret, analyse, synthesise and critically evaluate research findings. Identify the need for research, search for publications related to physiotherapy and formulate relevant research questions. Demonstrate skills in the independent search for, critical examination and synthesis of scientific literature and other relevant information. Use basic research techniques. Use scientific language in the health sciences. To explore a specific area in depth using the scientific method. Present and defend a final-year project before the University Examination Board, consisting of an exercise integrating the course content covered and the skills acquired. Disseminate research findings for relevant critique. Teaching activities Expressed in hours of teaching activities and as a percentage of face-to-face teaching P1. – Lectures 1 h 100% P6. Tutorials 8 h 100% P8. – Preparation of the Final Year Project 190 hours 0% P9. – Public oral defence of the final year project 1 h 100% Total hours of teaching activities 200 Assessment system and criteria Participation in seminars and tutorials: 20% Final-year project: 80%. 40% (assessed by tutor) 40% (assessed by examination board) A minimum attendance requirement of 70 per cent for teaching activities within the modules (seminars and tutorials) ASSESSED BY THE TUTOR Assessment of the dissertation Title, Introduction and Objectives Materials and Methods Results Discussion Conclusions References ASSESSED BY THE EXAMINATION BOARD Format of the Paper Introduction Materials and Methods Results Discussion Conclusions References Defence The final-year dissertation must clearly demonstrate that, in addition to the skills required for the specific project, knowledge from other subjects within the degree programme has also been applied. Addendum The Final-Year Project (TFG) must be an original document, for which the student bears full responsibility as the sole author. The use of artificial intelligence (AI)-based tools in its preparation is restricted to auxiliary functions such as grammar checking, the generation of outlines or the search for general information. Any use of AI must be properly cited, specifying the tool used, its specific function and when it was applied. The use of AI to draft substantial content, carry out critical analysis or interpret results compromises the originality and authorship of the project. Checks for plagiarism and/or the use of AI will be carried out using the tool provided on the virtual campus and will be assessed by the tutor to verify the integrity of the work submitted. SE5.—Final Year Project Report 60 60 SE6.- Defence and presentation of the Final Year Project before the assessment panel 40 40 Total 100 100 Bibliography Primary: 1. By Stephen Polgar, BSc(Hons), MSc and Shane A. Thomas, DipPubPol, PhD, MAPS Introduction to Health Sciences Research ELSEVIER. 2021. ISBN: 9788491138488 2.- By Azucena Pedraz Marcos, Juan Zarco Colón, Milagros Ramasco Gutiérrez and Ana María Palmar Santos Qualitative Research ELSEVIER. 2014. ISBN: 9788490224458 3. By Juan Bautista Cabello López; Edited by Juan Bautista Cabello López Critical appraisal of clinical evidence ELSEVIER. 2022. ISBN: 9788491138839 4. By Rosalinda Alfaro-LeFevre, RN, MSN, ANEF Critical thinking, clinical reasoning and clinical judgement in nursing ELSEVIER. 2021. ISBN: 9788491138310 Supplementary: 5.- Arbos Berenguer, Maria Teresa Molina, Mula, Jesus Gonzalez, Trujillo, Antonio Romero Franco, Natalia Bosch, Donate, Elisa Garcia, Carpintero, Blas, Eva Surviving the Final Year Project in Physiotherapy Foundation for the Development of Nursing. 2020. ISBN: 978-84-17034- 6.- M.ª Isabel Orts Cortés; Edited by Loreto Maciá Soler Evidence-Based Practice Elsevier. 2021. ISBN: 9788491137221 https://tienda.elsevier.es/practica-basada-en-la-evidencia-9788491137221.html#description |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 83 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
List of Elective Modules
FIRST FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0430542 | Analysis of sporting strategy and tactics | OP | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Analysis of sporting strategy and tacticsCódigo: 0430542 Imprimir Course 4. Subject: First semester. Elective. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives 1) To understand the difference between tactics and strategy 2) To understand the theoretical concepts inherent in tactics and strategy 3) To analyse game play from a structural perspective (including its components of internal and external logic) and from a functional perspective 4) To analyse and distinguish between individual sports, competitive sports and collaborative-competitive (team) sports 5) To understand the different training methodologies for technique, tactics and strategy according to the different sports 6) Plan a training programme for a specific sport Prerequisites As this is an optional module, it must be chosen by students. Competencies General Competences CG1) To acquire the necessary and specific training for professional practice in the field of physical activity and sport, in accordance with the chosen career path. Specific Competencies CE1) To manage, supervise and evaluate physical activity and sport programmes SE3) Select and know how to use sports materials and equipment appropriate for each type of recreational physical and sporting activity. CE5) Promote and evaluate the development of lasting and independent habits of physical activity and sport amongst the adult population, older people and people with disabilities. SC7) Plan, develop and monitor the training process at its various levels. CE8) Apply physiological, biomechanical and behavioural principles when managing sports training. CE9) Design, develop and evaluate teaching and learning processes relating to physical activity and sport, taking into account the individual and contextual characteristics of participants. Learning outcomes - Demonstrate sufficient knowledge of the various content areas covered by answering theoretical and practical questions. - Carry out assignments and practical work applying the subject matter. - Independently explore any topic through research and personal study. - Be able to apply the principles and models of pedagogical intervention in any educational context. - Make appropriate use of ICT. Course content 1. Conceptualisation and introduction to tactics and strategy. 2. Game play: Structural and functional analysis of game play. 3. Technique, tactics and strategy in different sports. 4. Methodology and training planning in team sports. Training activities 1) Lectures on concepts related to the specific professional specialisation chosen by the student (15 hours). 2) Practical sessions in laboratories and sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually acquire the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making within the field of the specific vocational specialisation chosen by the student (30 hours). 3) Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). 4) Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus, literature reviews, report writing and practical work carried out both individually and in groups, etc.) (45 hours). 5) Oral, written and practical assessment tests (5 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the regular examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT PORTFOLIO – 20% - Assessment of reports on various practical case studies set for resolution by applying the knowledge acquired in the different modules. Application of knowledge in a game-based context. - Submission of practical assignments and the reports detailing their progress, as well as performance in the laboratory whilst carrying out the practicals. Practical dossier. PRACTICAL ACTIVITIES - 30% - Assessments that follow the learning process and capture the skills the student acquires, as well as compulsory and active participation in the seminars and practical sessions. Practical work and presentation on decision-making, theoretical and practical knowledge regarding the portfolio, and attendance at training sessions. FINAL KNOWLEDGE ASSESSMENTS - 50% - Written examinations covering the full range of learning activities carried out in the classroom. Examination held during the standard examination period. NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT - 100% Final examination comprising a practical case study involving problem-solving related to the practical component of the module (100%). Similarly, this exam will consist of a theoretical section, worth 60%, and a practical application section, worth 40% of the total; students must pass both sections to pass the module. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
Reading list Core: 1. García Manso, Juan Manuel; Navarro Valdivieso, Manuel; Ruiz Caballero, José Antonio Sports Training Planning Gymnos. 1996. ISBN: 8480130547 2. Riera Riera, Joan Fundamentals of Learning Sports Technique and Tactics Inde. 2010. ISBN: 9788497292276 3. Sampedro, Javier Fundamentals of Sports Tactics Gymnos. 1999. ISBN: 0084801302167 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430543 | Biomechanics of sports techniques | OP | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Biomechanics of sports techniquesCódigo: 0430543 Imprimir Course 4. Subject: First semester. Elective. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives To analyse the biomechanical parameters involved in the most common sporting movements and techniques, such as those found in the main athletics disciplines. To integrate the laws of mechanics into the study of human movement and their application to sporting techniques. To gain experience in the handling and use of various measurement and analysis tools aimed at improving athletes’ technical execution and performance. To understand the process of assessing sporting technique and the main indicators used to analyse the technical effectiveness of a specific motor skill. Course content TOPIC 1. Introduction to biomechanics - Definition of sports biomechanics - Types of biomechanical analysis TOPIC 2. Qualitative biomechanical analysis - Concept - Observational analysis - Protocols and methods of analysis TOPIC 3. Quantitative biomechanical analysis - Mechanical models - Analysis of kinematic, angular and dynamic variables TOPIC 4. Biomechanics applied to injury prevention - The concept of mobility - Assessment tests - Windlass mechanism - Muscle activation techniques TOPIC 5. Biomechanics applied to strength training - Concept of torque - Applied biomechanical variables - Force-Velocity (F-V) Profile - Fatigue analysis TOPIC 6. Biomechanics of jumping - Types of jumps - Assessment of lower-body strength - Dynamic and biomechanical analysis of jumping TOPIC 7. Biomechanics of running - Phases and technique of running - Spatio-temporal variables - Power-based training - Analysis using wearable sensors (Stryd, RunScribe) TOPIC 8. Biomechanical aspects of sports footwear - Technological developments - Impact of the biomechanical variables of footwear TOPIC 9. Biomechanics of sprinting - Sprint technique - Horizontal force-velocity profile - Force-velocity profile during a change of direction TOPIC 10. Biomechanics of cycling - Basic concepts - Aerodynamics and analysis of angular variables Learning activities The training activities to be undertaken by students throughout the module will be as follows: - Lectures or masterclasses (15 hours). - Practical classes (facilities, laboratory, etc.) (30 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). - Assessment (5 hours). - Students’ independent work (study, e-learning, literature review, etc.) (45 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 80 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- To be eligible for CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT, a minimum attendance of 70 per cent at lectures is compulsory. Furthermore, students must achieve a minimum attendance of 70 per cent and participate in practical sessions. Failure to meet this requirement will result in the loss of the right to Continuous Assessment, and students will be required to sit the final assessment during the official examination periods. Continuous assessment will be distributed as follows: CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT. The assessment system is structured into three components: 1. Final knowledge tests (50 per cent). An individual final theory exam covering the content covered in lectures and practical sessions. It will assess conceptual understanding and the ability to apply biomechanical analysis. 2. Practical activities (30%). Continuous assessment of laboratory and field practical sessions. This will assess the handling of equipment, the correct execution of protocols, the analysis and interpretation of data, and the preparation of technical reports. It will consist of the submission of laboratory practicals carried out in class. 3. Portfolio (20%). An individual compilation of evidence of learning, including technical analyses, reflections and significant activities carried out during the course. This will enable the assessment of the student’s progress, critical thinking skills and autonomy. NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT Should students fail to meet the attendance and participation requirements, they must sit a final theoretical and practical examination, the mark for which will account for 100 per cent of the final mark. The examination will consist of: - Theoretical section (60 per cent): assessment of conceptual knowledge via a written test. - Practical component (40 per cent): solving applied case studies or carrying out a technical analysis of the content covered in the practical sessions. A minimum mark of 5 out of 10 must be obtained in the practical component in order to be included in the average with the theoretical component. Otherwise, the module will be deemed to have been failed. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430544 | Basic concepts of biochemistry | OP | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Basic concepts of biochemistryCódigo: 0430544 Imprimir Course 4. Subject: First semester. Elective. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives 1. To provide students with basic information on the chemical composition of living organisms, paying particular attention to the molecules that make up cells and tissues. 2. To familiarise students with the metabolic processes responsible for generating energy. Description of the content THEORY TOPIC 1: Metabolism: basic concepts and an overview. TOPIC 2: Glycolysis. TOPIC 3: The Krebs cycle. TOPIC 4: Oxidative phosphorylation. TOPIC 5: The pentose phosphate pathway and gluconeogenesis. TOPIC 6: Metabolism of glycogen and disaccharides. TOPIC 7: Metabolism of fatty acids. TOPIC 8: Amino acid breakdown and the urea cycle. SEMINARS SM1: Biosynthesis of macromolecule precursors: steroid hormones. SM2: Immunoglobulins. SM3: Hormonal action. SM4: Transport across the membrane. Training activities 1. Lectures on concepts related to the specific career-oriented training chosen by the student (15 hours). 2. Practical laboratory sessions in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making within the field of the specific vocational training chosen by the student (30 hours). 3. Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). 4. Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work carried out both individually and in groups, etc. (45 hours). 5. Oral, written and practical assessment tests (5 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- To be eligible for CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT, a minimum attendance of 70 per cent at lectures is compulsory (at the time of that assessment). Failure to meet this requirement will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment, and students will be required to sit the final examination during the official examination periods. Continuous assessment will be distributed as follows: Final knowledge tests (60%) Written examinations at the end of the term covering the full range of learning activities undertaken in the module (60%). Practical activities (20%) Practical assignment that brings together the knowledge acquired in the course’s laboratory sessions Portfolio (20%) A project bringing together the theoretical activities carried out in all lectures throughout the semester Non-continuous assessment Final assessments (100%) The final exam mark will be calculated by weighting both parts: Theoretical section: 60% Practical part: 40% To pass the exam, it is essential to achieve at least 5 out of 10 in the practical part. Furthermore, the weighted sum of both parts must result in a final mark of 5 or above. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430545 | Teaching Physical Activity and Sport II | OP | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Teaching Physical Activity and Sport IICódigo: 0430545 Imprimir Course 4. Subject: First semester. Elective. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives 1. To understand and analyse the different approaches to teaching physical activity and sport. 2. To distinguish between the various complexities that arise in the practice of teaching physical activity. 3. To understand the innovations and challenges faced as a professional in the teaching of physical activity and sport. 4. To be able to analyse and implement high-quality innovations in the teaching of physical activity and sport. 5. To be able to analyse the different approaches to teaching physical activity and sport within curricular contexts. 6. Be able to design research and innovation projects in the field of physical activity and sport teaching. 7. Self-awareness as a teacher, coach, participant or counsellor in physical and sporting activities. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been established Learning outcomes Course competences: 1) C.E.57. To study the process of acquiring different motor skills, analysing the factors involved in this process. 2) Learning Outcome 58. Understand and apply the basic principles of teaching Physical Activity and Sport. 3) Learning Outcome 59. Distinguish between existing teaching styles and know how to apply them depending on the context in which we find ourselves. 4) Learning Outcome 60. Understand the current structure of the Spanish education system. 5) Learning Outcome 61. To understand the planning processes in Physical Education and know how to apply them to any year group within the secondary education stage. 6) C.E.62. Be familiar with and know how to apply assessment criteria and tools in different educational contexts, thereby learning to monitor the teaching-learning process. 7) C.E.63. To be familiar with and know how to apply Information and Communication Technologies (ICT) in an educational context. 8) C.E.64. Understand the functioning and organisation of the school. Qualification competences: 1. Learning Outcome 1. To design, develop and evaluate teaching and learning processes relating to physical activity and sport, taking into account the individual and contextual characteristics of participants. 2. Learning Outcome 2. To promote and evaluate the development of lasting and independent habits of physical activity and sport amongst the school population. Learning outcomes The elements that can be used to assess competences in in terms of learning outcomes will include, amongst others, the following: - Demonstrating sufficient knowledge of the various content areas content covered by answering theoretical questions. - Carrying out assignments that apply the concepts covered in class. - Applying, through practical scenarios, to real-life situations what has is covered in class at a theoretical level. - Draw up an annual PE programme for any year group within of secondary education. - Understand how different pedagogical variables influence the teaching and learning process. - Independently develop any topic through research and independent study. - To be able to apply the principles and models of pedagogical intervention in any educational context. - Make appropriate use of ICT. Description of the content BLOCK I: PRINCIPLES IN THE TEACHING OF PHYSICAL ACTIVITY AND SPORT. Topic 1. Reflections on pedagogy, sports coaching and ethical and moral principles. Topic 2. The ethical and political significance of pedagogy and sports coaching. SECTION II: SELF-AWARENESS Topic 3. Experience vs. Effectiveness vs. Excellence in teaching, physical activity and coaching Topic 4. The identity of the teacher, physical activity leader and/or coach SECTION III: THE VARIOUS APPROACHES TO TEACHING PHYSICAL ACTIVITY AND SPORT. Topic 5. Teaching models in physical activity and sport. Topic 6. Analysis of teaching in physical activity and sport. Topic 7. The quality of teaching in physical activity and sports training. SECTION IV: INNOVATION IN THE TEACHING OF PHYSICAL ACTIVITY AND SPORT. PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT Topic 8. Developments in teacher training. Teaching paradigms in physical activity. Topic 9. Criteria for innovation in physical activity and sport. From design to assessment. SECTION V: ASSESSMENT IN PHYSICAL ACTIVITY AND SPORT Topic 10. Assessment in physical activity and sport. Models and trends. Training activities 1. Lectures on concepts relating to the processes of teaching physical activity and sport (15 hours). 2. Practical sessions in laboratories or sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making (30 hours). 3. Individual and group tutorials (4 hours). 5. Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature searches, report writing and practical work carried out both individually and in groups, etc. (40 hours). 6. Written and practical assessment tests (5 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT. The continuous assessment section is organised into three components: Final knowledge assessments, Practical activities and Portfolio. For this module, the weightings established for each section are: • Final knowledge assessments: 60% This section includes the final submissions covering the theoretical content taught in class • Practical activities: 30% Throughout the course, various seminars will be held, with assignments to be prepared and submitted during class time • Portfolio: 10% Submission of all work completed during the course, in a timely and appropriate manner TO BE ELIGIBLE FOR CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT, ATTENDANCE AT BOTH THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL CLASSES IS MANDATORY FOR AT LEAST 70 PER CENT OF THEM. NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT. 100 per cent of the mark will be based on a single theoretical and practical examination. This examination will be divided into two parts: • Theoretical part: 60% • Practical part: 40% It is an essential requirement to achieve a minimum mark of 5 out of 10 in the practical part in order for this to be averaged with the theoretical part. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430546 | Sports equipment and facilities | OP | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Sports equipment and facilitiesCódigo: 0430546 Imprimir Course 4. Subject: First semester. Elective. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives To develop a sufficient understanding of what a sports facility entails: its composition, structure, hierarchy and programme development. To understand the key aspects of the management and administration of sports facilities. To learn how to lead and manage sports facilities. To develop medium-level marketing campaigns for a sports facility. Make informed decisions regarding the equipment and components required for a specific type of sports facility. Develop a business model for a sports facility: SPORTS CENTRE, FITNESS CENTRE, SPORTS EVENTS OR ECONOMIC ACTIVITY RELATED TO THE SPORTS SECTOR Course content description Theory: Structure and hierarchy of sports centres Management and administration of sports facilities. Leadership Commercial marketing for sports centres Improving the financial performance of sports facilities Large-scale facilities Practical: Assignment 1: Development of a business model: SPORTS CENTRE, FITNESS CENTRE, SPORTS EVENTS OR ECONOMIC ACTIVITY RELATED TO THE SPORTS SECTOR Training activities The training activities to be undertaken by the student throughout the module will be as follows: - Lectures or masterclasses (15 hours). - Practical classes (facilities, laboratory, etc.) (30 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). - Assessment (5 hours). - Students’ independent work (study, e-learning, literature review, etc.) (45 hours). Assessment system and criteria The final mark for the module will be out of 10, which can be achieved through continuous assessment throughout the course or by sitting the final assessment (theoretical exam). The assessment process for the Sports Facilities and Equipment module is as follows: Continuous assessment Final knowledge assessments (60%) THEORETICAL EXAMS. A final theoretical exam will be held. This exam will account for 60% of the final mark. To have the result averaged with the other assessments, students must achieve a minimum mark of 5 out of 10 in the exam. Practical activities (30%) Complete an assignment to be submitted by the dates specified by the lecturer. Development of a business model. To receive a mark, a minimum score of 5 is required. Otherwise, it will be counted as 0 Portfolio (10%) Completion of an assignment at the end of each topic. To receive a mark, a minimum score of 5 is required. Otherwise, it will be counted as 0. These assignments must be submitted by the date and time specified by the lecturer. IT IS STRICTLY MANDATORY TO SUBMIT THEM IN PDF FORMAT. Assignments submitted in any other format will not be accepted. Non-continuous assessment If students choose to sit the final examination or forfeit their right to continuous assessment, they must sit the COURSE EXAMINATION IN JANUARY or the SITTING FOR STUDENTS WHO HAVE FAILED. This examination will be both theoretical and practical. The final ‘supplementary’ exam will cover ALL THE THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL MATERIAL COVERED DURING THE COURSE. This exam will be marked out of 10 marks, and the mark achieved will be the grade recorded in the course record; this exam will be divided into two parts: Theoretical part: 60% Practical part: 40% It is an essential requirement to achieve a minimum mark of 5 out of 10 in the practical part in order for this to be averaged with the theoretical part. Addendum COURSE ATTENDANCE To retain the right to continuous assessment, students must attend at least 70 % of face-to-face classes. If absences exceed 30 %, this right will be automatically forfeited, regardless of the reason for the absences. Procedure for justifying absences Evidence of absence must be sent to the lecturer responsible for the module via institutional email or via a message on the virtual campus, within a maximum of two weeks from the date of the absence. Evidence of absence handed in in person or submitted after the deadline will not be accepted. In the event of absence due to ill health, it is essential to provide an official medical certificate. Any absence that is not duly substantiated will not be considered a justified absence. Important: submitting a proof of absence does not automatically mean that the absence will be considered justified. The final decision will depend on whether it complies with the regulations and on the judgement of the teaching team. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430547 | Nutrition | OP | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
NutritionCódigo: 0430547 Imprimir Course 4. Subject: First semester. Elective. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives This module aims to achieve the following objectives: 1- To provide students with a comprehensive overview of nutrition, the physiology of digestion and factors relating to dietary patterns. 2- To teach students the methodology for conducting a proper nutritional assessment and how to interpret the results in relation to a person’s state of health. 3- To familiarise students with the constituent elements of each food group. 4- To encourage students to think critically in order to assess the accuracy of information received regarding nutrition and, thereby, prevent the acceptance and spread of false myths. 5- To develop tools for improving one’s daily diet, as well as greater awareness of the use of food, supplements and other products consumed. 6- To address topics of interest relating to nutrition, providing additional reference material to explore the subject further 7- To spark students’ interest in learning about the nutritional aspects of the various foods they regularly consume and to provide methods for assessing whether these are suitable for achieving their intended nutritional goals. Description of the content Description of the content THEORY Topic 1: Introduction to nutrition Topic 2: Macronutrients: Proteins, Carbohydrates and Lipids. Topic 3: Micronutrients: Vitamins and minerals Topic 4: Dietary fibre Topic 5: Water Topic 6: A balanced diet and the Mediterranean diet. Dietary guidelines Topic 7: Foods of animal origin Topic 8: Plant-based foods Topic 9: Other foods Topic 10: Food safety, food microbiology and good practice in the kitchen. SEMINARS SM1. Food allergies and intolerances SM2. Applying theoretical concepts SM3. Gut microbiota SM4. Clinical cases Learning activities The training activities to be undertaken by students throughout the module will be as follows: - Lectures or masterclasses (15 hours). - Seminars, workshops, etc. (30 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). - Assessment (5 hours). - Students’ independent work (study, e-learning, literature review, etc.) (45 hours). Assessment system and criteria In the course’s virtual classroom, you will be able to view details of the activities you are required to complete, as well as the submission dates, assessment criteria and marking schemes for each one. To be eligible for CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT, a minimum attendance of 70 per cent at both theory and practical classes is compulsory. Failure to meet this requirement will result in the loss of the right to Continuous Assessment, and students will be required to sit the final assessment during the official examination sessions. Continuous assessment will be allocated as follows: Final knowledge tests (60%) -Exams assessing the knowledge acquired from the theoretical concepts studied in class. Practical activities (20%) - Solving practical case studies based on information previously studied in laboratory activities. Students will be set exercises to complete relating to the concepts covered in the session or will be asked to search for scientific articles on a specific topic, to develop critical reading skills. Portfolio (20%) - Compilation of a portfolio in which the theoretical concepts covered in class are applied in a practical manner. Non-continuous assessment will be distributed as follows: Theoretical-Practical Test (100%) - A written examination covering the theoretical knowledge of the subject (60%) - A practical examination assessing the practical skills acquired. It is an essential requirement to achieve a minimum mark of 5 out of 10 in the practical section in order for this to be averaged with the theoretical mark. (40%) The examinations will be multiple-choice, except for the practical cases, which may involve solving a problem similar to those covered in class. Incorrect answers in the multiple-choice examination are marked negatively. In the course/module’s virtual classroom, you will be able to view in detail the activities you are required to complete, as well as the submission dates, assessment criteria and marking schemes for each one. 5.1. Ordinary examination session To pass the course/module in the ordinary assessment period, you must achieve a mark of 5.0 out of 10.0 or higher in the final mark (weighted average) for the course and, in addition: The average mark for all activities in each course/module must be 5.0 out of 10.0 or higher to be included in the overall average with the exam. Similarly, the exam mark must be 5.0 out of 10.0 or higher to be included in the overall average with the activities. 5.2. Extraordinary examination session To pass the module in the resit, students must achieve a final mark (weighted average) of 5.0 out of 10.0 or higher. Students must submit any assignments that were not passed during the ordinary examination period, after receiving the relevant feedback from the lecturer, or any assignments that were not submitted at all. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
Reading list Core: 1. Ángel Gil Treatise on Nutrition 3rd ed. Panamericana. 2017. ISBN: 9788491101956 Supplementary: 2.- Alfredo Martínez Hernández Fundamentals of Nutrition and Dietetics Panamericana. 2011. ISBN: 9788491105251 3. José Matáix Verdú Nutrition and Human Diet Ergon. 2009. ISBN: 9788484736646 4. Marcela Glez-Gross Sports Nutrition: From Physiology to Practice Panamericana. 2020. ISBN: 9788491106036 5. Pablo Veiga Herreros Theoretical and Practical Handbook of Nutrition and Diet Bellisco. 2009. ISBN: 9788495277008 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430633 | Modern Language II | OP | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Modern Language IICódigo: 0430633 Imprimir Course 4. First semester module. Elective. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives To provide an introduction to the specialist English used in the Health Sciences and Physiotherapy. To develop comprehension and expression skills (oral and written), with an emphasis, on the one hand, on reading and understanding texts related to medicine and physiotherapy and extracts from research articles, and, on the other hand, on oral communication with patients and the drafting of certain medical and healthcare texts. Prerequisites Not applicable Learning outcomes Not applicable Learning outcomes RK6 Understand and develop communication theory and interpersonal skills. RC11 Understand the importance of keeping up to date with the knowledge, abilities, skills and attitudes that constitute the professional skills of a physiotherapist RC12 Communicate effectively and clearly, both orally and in writing, with users of the healthcare system as well as other professionals Course description 1. Understand clear, non-specialist speech, in accordance with the language level being studied. 2. Understand texts written in everyday, common language, in accordance with the language level being studied. 3. Produce coherent written texts, in accordance with the language level being studied, on a variety of topics that are familiar to the learner or in which they have a personal interest. 4. Participate orally and spontaneously in conversations on a variety of topics, in accordance with the language level being studied. 5. Understand the grammar and use the vocabulary appropriate to the required language level. Training activities Expressed in hours of training activities and % of face-to-face contact P1. – Lectures 45 h 100% P2. Interactive classes 7 h 100% P4. – Carrying out assignments or projects and solving challenges 8 hours 0% P5. – Independent study, solving case studies or problems, and conducting literature searches. 84 hours 0% P6. Tutorials 3 h 100% P7. Knowledge tests 3 hours 100% Total hours of training activities 150 Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- ASSESSMENT SYSTEM The assessment process will be carried out taking into account the intended learning outcomes. To this end, assessments will be used that follow the learning process and capture the skills the student acquires as they progress. These assessments aim to evaluate the four language skills (reading comprehension, listening comprehension, written expression and oral expression), as well as the lexical and grammatical content necessary to put into practice the functional content to be achieved, in accordance with the level of the foreign language being studied. These tests will consist of several of the following assessment activities, which will enable the degree to which the objectives have been achieved to be determined: ASSESSMENT CRITERIA 1. REGULAR EXAM SESSION 1.1 Continuous Assessment a. A first written test: 35 per cent. b. An oral assessment involving a simulation doctor-patient interview will take place 20%. c. A second written test 35% d. Class participation, attitude in class, class work (5 per cent) e. Teacher’s assessment (5%) The dates of these assessments will be announced by the lecturer in advance. They will take place in the usual classroom, unless the lecturer specifies otherwise at the time. 1.2 Type of assessment 1.2.1 Written assessments Written assessments will include questions on vocabulary, medical terminology, medical abbreviations, reading comprehension exercises, sentence completion, the drafting of medical histories or reports, prescriptions, treatments, etc., in written form, as well as medical questions aimed at identifying pathologies and making diagnoses, grammar, professional expressions and reading comprehension exercises. Note 1: AT THE DISCRETION OF EACH LECTURER, the results of the oral continuous assessment tests may be carried over to the ordinary examination (never the supplementary examination) within the academic term in question. The results of the written tests MAY NOT BE CARRIED OVER UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES FOR ANY OTHER EXAMINATION SESSION. Therefore, both continuous assessment and the ordinary and supplementary examination sessions will have UNIQUE AND SPECIFIC written test results for each session. Note 2: To pass this module through continuous assessment, students must have sat all three required tests during the term. If any one is missed, it will not be possible to pass the module through continuous assessment and the student must sit the ordinary or extraordinary examination session. Note 3: In the case of students with an exemption who do not attend class, marks for class participation and the lecturer’s assessment (5% + 5% respectively) will be awarded depending on whether the student demonstrates an interest in following the course by making REGULAR enquiries to their relevant lecturer. 2. FINAL EXAMINATION (REGULAR EXAMINATION PERIOD WITHOUT CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT AND SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION PERIOD) 2.1 Final exam: Students who have not undertaken the continuous assessment during the term or who have not achieved an average mark of at least 5 across the three assessments (see 1.1) must sit the final exam in the subsequent February or July sitting sessions. The assessment criteria in this case will be as follows: Final exam: 100% This is divided into: Written section: 80% Oral component: 20% Type of examination 2.2.1 Written section The written examination will include questions on vocabulary, medical terminology, medical abbreviations, reading comprehension exercises, sentence completion, the drafting of a medical history or report, prescriptions, treatment, etc., in written form, as well as medical questions aimed at identifying pathologies and making diagnoses, grammar, expressions and reading comprehension exercises. 2.2.2 Oral component Students must prepare a doctor-patient consultation. Further instructions will be provided prior to the examination. Note 1: AT THE DISCRETION OF EACH LECTURER, the results of the oral continuous assessment tests may be carried over to either of the two final examinations in the ordinary and/or supplementary examination sessions, within the academic year in question. The results of the written tests MAY NOT BE CARRIED OVER UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES TO ANY OTHER EXAMINATION SESSION. Therefore, both continuous assessment and the ordinary and extraordinary examination sessions will have UNIQUE AND SPECIFIC written test results for each session. Note 2: Students must achieve a minimum mark of 4 in both the written and oral components in order for their marks to be averaged. If either component is not completed, the module cannot be passed. SE1. Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. – Final knowledge assessments 50 70 SE4. – Portfolio 10 20 Total 60 120 Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
Reading list Core: 1. Martín J. Fernández, Pedro J. Marín, Roda P. Roberts, Santiago Bellido Physiobook. A Practical English Handbook for Physiotherapists Miguel de Cervantes European University. 2016. ISBN: 9788494308130 Supplementary: 2.- Chabner, Davi-Ellen Medical Terminology: A Short Course 9th ed. Evolve. 2022. ISBN: 9780323479912 3.- Evans, V., J. Dooley and S. Hartley Career Paths: Physiotherapy Express Publishing. 2019. ISBN: 9781471562921 4. Glendinning, Eric English in Medicine: A Course in Communication Skills 2nd ed. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1998. 1998. ISBN: 0521595703 5. Milner, M. English for Health Sciences Cengage Learning. 2006. ISBN: 1413020518 6. Prades, C., and A. Hernández ENGLISH FOR PHYSICAL AND SPORTS ACTIVITIES ALTAMAR EDITORIAL. 2019. ISBN: 9788417872021 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430637 | Complementary Therapies in Physiotherapy | OP | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Complementary Therapies in PhysiotherapyCódigo: 0430637 Imprimir Course 4. First semester module. Elective. 3 credits. Profesores
Objectives For students to be able to learn and apply complementary techniques to carry out physiotherapy treatments. General Competencies: - To be familiar with and understand the various alternative therapies. - Assess the patient’s general condition and determine when a therapy should or should not be applied. - To design a physiotherapy intervention plan in accordance with criteria of appropriateness, validity and efficiency. - To understand the importance of keeping up to date with the knowledge, skills, abilities and attitudes that make up the physiotherapist’s competencies. Specific objectives: - To identify the principles and foundations of osteopathy, Chinese medicine and foot reflexology. - To understand and apply the theoretical foundations and the methodological and procedural aspects of each therapy. - Be able to assess the patient’s functional status from the perspective of these therapies, taking into account their physical, psychological and social aspects. - To seek out scientific evidence for these therapies Prerequisites Not applicable Competencies Not applicable Learning outcomes Not applicable Course content 1. Identification of physical abnormalities using various osteopathic tests and assessments. 2. Carrying out a therapeutic assessment of different clinical conditions for the application of osteopathic techniques. 3. Application of basic osteopathic therapeutic techniques. 4. Identifying pathological syndromes from the perspective of traditional Chinese medicine. 5. Identifying and describing acupuncture meridians and points. 6. Identifying and describing foot reflexology points. 7. Apply manipulative techniques to foot reflexology points. 8. Searching for scientific evidence regarding the various complementary techniques in physiotherapy for different pathological conditions. Training activities The number of hours of training activities and the percentage of face-to-face teaching are set out below P1. – Lecture sessions 15 hours 100% P2. Interactive classes 4 hours 100% P3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities 4 hours 100% P4. – Carrying out assignments or projects and solving challenges 6 h 0% P5. – Independent study, solving case studies or problems, and conducting literature searches. 40 h 0% P6. Tutorials 3 h 100% P7. Knowledge tests 3 hours 100% Total hours of training activities 75 Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment system will consist of: oral examinations, written multiple-choice tests, written essay-style tests, the completion and presentation of assignments, tutorial supervision, and attendance and participation in seminars and practical demonstrations. The assessment criteria will be weighted according to the teaching and learning methodology used and the teaching load of each component, in accordance with current legislation. Students must pass each and every one of the assessment criteria and achieve an overall mark of over 5 to be considered to have passed the module. Attendance is compulsory at 70 per cent for theory and 100 per cent for practical sessions and seminars. Failure to comply with these regulations means students will automatically sit the official resit in January or June. There are only four opportunities to pass the module. Students must pass a written test, which accounts for 35 per cent of the final mark and must be above 5 to be included in the average; The exam will consist of questions with four possible answers, where each incorrect answer results in a 33 per cent deduction; in addition, there will be a practical exam worth 45 per cent of the final mark, which will be included in the average if a mark of 5 or higher is achieved, and 10 per cent of the mark will be based on the submission of assignments, seminars and continuous assessment. We have a compulsory activity this year, the AUPARTE project, which will run alongside the proposed seminars; attendance is therefore compulsory and will account for 10 per cent of the mark. Students may sit the continuous assessment exam if they have attended all classes – that is, 100 per cent attendance for practical sessions and seminars – and have submitted at least 4 of the 5 assigned assignments. If they do not meet this requirement, they will have to sit the official exam in January 2026, but will not be eligible for continuous assessment. This year, students will sit a theoretical exemption exam in November; if they pass both the theoretical and practical components in December, they will not be required to sit the final exam for the module in January, provided they have submitted at least four of the five assigned assignments. To pass the module via continuous assessment, you must achieve a mark of 5 in both the theory and practical components; otherwise, you will be required to sit the official examination covering both the theory and practical components. Attendance is compulsory, and if your attendance falls below 70 per cent, you will also be required to sit the final exam and will not be exempted via continuous assessment. Theory or practical marks are not carried over to subsequent exam sessions. Please note that there are only four opportunities to pass the module. The assessment system consists of several components: Assessment system 1: practical activities, case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc., with a weighting of 0 to 30 Assessment system 2: final knowledge tests, accounting for 50 to 70 per cent. Assessment system 3: laboratory practical logbook; in our case, this involves between 5 and 10 submissions to the campus. Assessment system 4: portfolio, accounting for between 5 and 10 this year, including the crane project. SE1. Practical activities (solving case studies, problems and challenges; carrying out projects; oral presentations; debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. – Final knowledge assessments 50 70 SE3. – Laboratory practical workbook 5 10 SE4. – Portfolio 5 10 Total 60 120 Bibliography Core: 1. Andrés Quevedo García Orthopaedic Manual Therapy in the Treatment of Pain Elsevier. 2023. ISBN: 9788413820200 2. Andrzej Pilat Myofascial Induction: An Anatomical Approach to the Treatment of Fascial Dysfunction, Vol. 1: Upper Body. Journal. 2023. ISBN: 9789878452487 3. Andrzej Pilat Myofascial Induction: An Anatomical Approach to the Treatment of Fascial Dysfunction, Vol. 2: Lower Body. Journal. 2024. ISBN: 9789878452715 4. Claudia Focks Atlas of Acupuncture Elsevier. 2022. ISBN: 9788491132769 5. Joaquín Valdivia Tor Chiropractic Radiology: Case Reviews. Self-published. 2020. ISBN: 979-855313428 Complementary: 6. Andrzej Pilat Myofascial Induction McGraw Hill. 2003. ISBN: 8448605594 7. Busquet L Cranial Osteopathy Paidotribo. 2006. ISBN: 9788480193948 8. Busquet L Muscle Chains, Volume 1 Paidotribo. 2007. ISBN: 9788480191098 9. Busquet L Muscle Chains, Volume 3: Pubalgia Paidotribo. 2007. ISBN: 9788480192217 10. Busquet L, Vanderheyden M Muscle Chains, Volume 6: The Visceral Chain Paidotribo. 2012. ISBN: 978-849910165 11. Hoppenfeld, S. Physical Examination of the Spine and Limbs Modern Manual. 2002. ISBN: 9789684260559 12. Kapandji Notebooks on Joint Physiology Medica Panamericana S.A. 2012. ISBN: 9788498354614 13. Keet L The Reflexology Bible GAIA. 2013. ISBN: 9788484453734 14. Kolster B Atlas of Reflexology Libsa. 2012. ISBN: 9788466226561 15. Planas J Specialities in Acupuncture (Academic Materials on Chinese Medicine) European Foundation for Traditional Chinese Medicine. 2011. ISBN: 9788461509478 16. Planas, J Internal Medicine in Acupuncture (Academic Materials on Chinese Medicine) TCM European Foundation for Traditional Medicine. 2011. ISBN: 9788461509485 17. Planas J Acupuncture Techniques: Academic Materials on Chinese Medicine TCM European Foundation for Traditional Medicine. 2011. ISBN: 9788461509508 18. Ricard F Treatise on Osteopathy Medos. 2014. ISBN: 9788494112287 19. Ricard F Treatise on Cranial Osteopathy and the Temporomandibular Joint: A Collection of Osteopathic Medicine Medos. 2014. ISBN: 9788494112225 20. Richter P Trigger Points and Functional Muscle Chains in Osteopathy and Manual Therapy Paidotribo. 2014. ISBN: 9788494104614 21. Rouviere H, Delmas A Descriptive, topographical and functional human anatomy Masson. 2005. ISBN: 9788445815342 22. Sanchez F Meridians and Acupuncture Points 1: Academic Materials on Chinese Medicine MtC European Foundation for Traditional Medicine. 2011. ISBN: 9788461514847 23. Sanchez F Meridians and Acupuncture Points 2: Academic Materials on Chinese Medicine TCM European Foundation for Traditional Medicine. 2011. ISBN: 9788461514854 24. Vinyes, Frederic The Answer Lies in the Feet 17th ed. Integral. 2012. ISBN: 9788415541370 25. Yu Lin Lian Graphic Atlas of Acupuncture: Illustrations of Acupuncture Points H.F. Ullmann. 2013. ISBN: 978-384800319 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430638 | Health Emergencies | OP | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Health EmergenciesCódigo: 0430638 Imprimir Course 4. First semester module. Elective. 3 credits. Profesores
Objectives - To recognise the signs and symptoms of various conditions that may threaten an individual’s life or quality of life. - To be familiar with the recommendations and guidelines for action, so as to choose the most appropriate course of action depending on the situation or case at hand. - To acquire the necessary skills to apply specific techniques that may save or improve the individual’s condition. Prerequisites Not applicable Competencies Not applicable Learning outcomes Not applicable Description of the content 1. Identify a medical emergency. 2. Assess the symptoms and signs that indicate a medical emergency. 3. Apply basic first aid techniques in a medical emergency. 4. Perform basic CPR virtually. 5. Apply the established protocols for medical emergencies. 6. Resolve virtual medical emergency scenarios. 7. Putting together a first-aid kit containing the basic items required for medical emergencies. Training activities Training hours and percentage of face-to-face delivery are specified P1. – Lecture sessions 15 hours 100% P2. Interactive classes 4 h 100% P3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities 4 hours 100% P4. – Carrying out assignments or projects and solving challenges 6 h 0% P5. – Independent study, solving case studies or problems, and conducting literature reviews. 40 h 0% P6. Tutorials 3 h 100% P7. Knowledge tests 3 hours 100% Total hours of training activities 75 Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- Assessment of theoretical and practical content The final mark for the module is calculated by adding the marks obtained for the assessment of the theoretical content (multiplied by 0.6) and the practical content (multiplied by 0.4). In all cases, students must pass both parts separately to pass the module. Attendance, participation in sessions and other activities set by the lecturer may contribute up to a maximum of 1 mark to the final mark. - THEORETICAL ASSESSMENT (60%) Two tests will be held during the term. Each will consist of 30 multiple-choice questions, with four answer options, only one of which is correct. Each correctly answered question will be worth one mark. Each incorrect answer will result in a deduction of 0.33 marks (i.e. three incorrect answers will result in a deduction of 1 mark). Unanswered questions will neither add nor deduct marks. Each test will be considered passed if a mark of 5.0 or more is obtained; marks from one test cannot be used to compensate for marks lost in another. Students who fail the mid-term tests must sit the final exam, covering the material they have not passed, which will take place on the dates set in January for the official exams. The final exam will have a similar structure to the tests (30 multiple-choice questions, with four answer options, only one of which is correct; correct answers will be awarded 1 mark and incorrect answers will result in a deduction of 0.33 marks). To pass the final exam, students must achieve a mark of at least 5.0. - PRACTICAL ASSESSMENT (40%) Attendance at seminars and laboratory sessions is compulsory. The content covered in the laboratory sessions and seminars will be assessed through a practical examination on the skills acquired, which will take place during the final week of classes in the term and will account for 40 per cent of the practical mark, and through four tests to be held throughout the term, consisting of multiple-choice questions with the same structure as the tests in the theoretical assessment. Each of these tests will account for 15 per cent of the practical mark. Students who do not achieve a mark of at least 5.0 points, or who do not have an attendance rate of at least 80 per cent, must sit the final practical examination, which will take place in January on the dates set for the official examinations. SE1. Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) 0 30 SE2. – Final knowledge assessments 50 70 SE4. – Portfolio 10 20 Total 60 120 Bibliography Core: 1. Edited by Juan Carlos Pérez-Alva Cardiology in the Emergency Department ELSEVIER. 2021. ISBN: 9788491137696 2.- By Mario Holgado Basic Manual of Emergency Traumatology ELSEVIER. 2022. ISBN: 9788413820194 3. By Timothy O White, BMedSci, MBChB, FRCSEd (Tr McRae. Traumatology. Treatment of Fractures in A&E ELSEVIER. 2017. ISBN: 9788491131175 4.- Edited by Luis Jiménez Murillo and F. Javier Montero Pérez Emergency and Urgent Medicine ELSEVIER. 2019. ISBN: 9788491132080 5. Luis Jiménez Murillo Compendium of Emergency Medicine ELSEVIER. 2021. ISBN: 9788491134954 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 36 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
SECOND FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0430549 | Physical activity in special population groups | OP | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Physical activity in special population groupsCódigo: 0430549 Imprimir Course 4. Second-term module. Elective. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives • To be able to guide, design, implement and evaluate physical exercise and physical fitness at an advanced level, based on scientific evidence, across different settings, contexts and types of activities for the general population, with an emphasis on specific groups such as: older people (the elderly), people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), taking gender and diversity into account. • To design and implement, with fluency, ease, awareness and consistency, appropriate, efficient, systematic and varied physical exercise and fitness programmes, based on scientific evidence, for the development of adaptation processes and the improvement or rehabilitation of specific abilities in each individual in relation to human movement and its optimisation; with the aim of resolving unstructured, increasingly complex and unpredictable problems, with an emphasis on special populations. • Be able to rehabilitate, retrain and/or re-educate individuals and groups of people with injuries and medical conditions (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor), through physical and sporting activities and physical exercises suited to their characteristics and needs. • Be able to promote, advise on, design, implement and evaluate, from a technical and scientific perspective, appropriate and varied programmes of physical activity, physical exercise and sport, adapted to the individual and group needs, requirements and characteristics of populations with special needs, with an emphasis on older people (the elderly), women and diversity, people with disabilities, and people with medical conditions, health problems or similar issues (diagnosed and/or prescribed by a doctor). Description of the content BLOCK I: The different types of diagnoses according to aetiology, stage of development, chronicity and necessary support. Topic 1.1. Characteristics of people diagnosed with cognitive and sociocognitive impairments. Perceptual difficulties, impulsive behaviour and hyperactivity. Psycho-affective and psychomotor characteristics, and their implications for healthy physical activity aimed at improving quality of life Topic 1.2. Neurological disorders. Aetiologies, characteristics and their impact on physical activity, physical exercise and healthy sport. Topic 1.3. Respiratory and musculoskeletal disabilities. Type, severity and their implications for physical activity, physical exercise and healthy sport. BLOCK II: Definition and diagnosis, prevalence, progression, prognosis, and anatomical and physiological alterations and changes associated with the various conditions affecting people with special needs. Topic 2.1. Factors contributing to the development of the various disabilities or conditions leading to dependency. Topic 2.2. Scientific evidence on the impact of healthy physical activities. SECTION III: Physical activity and healthy physical exercise Topic 3.1. Physical activity and exercise in neurological and degenerative conditions Topic 3.2. Tailoring intervention programmes according to phase or stage of development SECTION IV: Planning physical activity and healthy exercise for people with special needs Topic 4.1. Initial assessment and evaluation of the development of healthy programmes Topic 4.2 Practical sessions based on scientific evidence regarding intervention programmes for groups with special needs. Training activities 1. Lectures on concepts related to the specific career guidance training chosen by the student (15 hours). 2. Practical laboratory sessions, in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making within the field of the specific career guidance training chosen by the student (30 hours). 3. Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). 4. Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work carried out both individually and in groups, etc. (45 hours). 5. Oral, written and practical assessment tests (5 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the ordinary examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will be carried out taking into account the various learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed learning outcomes has been achieved: CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT Final knowledge assessments (60%) - Written examinations covering the range of learning activities carried out in the classroom. Practical activities (30%) - Submission of practical assignments and reports on their progress, as well as performance in the laboratory/gym during the practical sessions. - Assessments that follow the learning process and assess the skills the student is acquiring. - CO1: - Individual assignment on the characteristics of people with special needs - Group project on the different approaches to physical activities, physical exercise and healthy sport CO2: - Practical session on physical exercise for special populations (group work) - Final assignment (written) Portfolio (10%) - Assessment of reports on various case studies set for students to solve by applying the knowledge acquired. NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: This accounts for 100% of the mark and will consist of a single theoretical and practical examination. This examination will be divided into two parts: Theoretical part: 60% Practical part: 40% It is an essential requirement to achieve a minimum mark of 5 out of 10 in the practical part in order for this to be averaged with the theoretical part. Reading list Core: 1. Arráez Martínez, Juan Miguel Motor skills, self-concept and integration of blind children Granada: University: Andalusian Institute of Physical Education. 1998. ISBN: 8433824783 2. Various authors Adapted physical education for primary schools: first cycle Barcelona: INDE, 2003. 2003. ISBN: 8495114666 3. Cati Gómez Lecumberri; Núria Puig Barata; Gaspar Maza Gutiérrez Sport and social integration. A guide to educational intervention through sport INDE. 2009. ISBN: 9788497291552 4. Francisco Javier Hernández Vázquez Inclusion in Physical Education. The keys to success for the inclusion of pupils with different abilities INDE. 2012. ISBN: 9788497293082 5. Rios Hernández, Merche Handbook on Adapted Physical Education for Pupils with Disabilities Barcelona: Paidotribo, 2003. 2003. ISBN: 8480196858 6. Sanz Rivas, David; Reina Vaíllo, Raúl. PHYSICAL ACTIVITIES AND ADAPTED SPORTS FOR PEOPLE WITH DISABILITIES Paidotribo. 2015. ISBN: 9788499101576 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430551 | Nutrition | OP | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
NutritionCódigo: 0430551 Imprimir Course 4. Second-term module. Elective. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives This module aims to achieve the following objectives: 1- To provide students with a comprehensive overview of dietetics and other related sciences. 2- To teach students the methodology for conducting a proper nutritional assessment and interpreting the results in relation to a person’s state of health. 3- To familiarise students with the specific requirements and needs of each stage of a person’s life cycle. 4- To encourage students to think critically in order to assess the accuracy of information received relating to the field of nutrition and, thereby, prevent the acceptance and spread of false myths. 5- To develop tools for improving one’s daily diet, as well as a greater awareness of the use of food, supplements and other products consumed. 6- To address topics of interest relating to nutrition and dietetics, providing additional reference material to explore the subject further 7- Provide the necessary knowledge to correctly assess a person’s diet and make consistent, healthy changes Course content description • THEORY TOPIC 1: Introduction to nutrition TOPIC 2: Nutrition during pregnancy and breastfeeding. TOPIC 3: Nutrition during breastfeeding: preterm newborns, newborns and infants. TOPIC 4: Nutrition in early childhood: 1–3 years, pre-school and school-age children. TOPIC 5: Nutrition in adolescence. TOPIC 6: Nutrition in adulthood. TOPIC 7: Nutrition in older adults. TOPIC 8: Nutrition education. • SEMINARS SM1: Diet planning. SM2: Dietary surveys. SM3: Assessment of nutritional status. SM4: Dietary quality. SM5: Nutrition in chronic non-communicable diseases. Learning activities The training activities to be undertaken by students throughout the module will be as follows: - Lectures or masterclasses (15 hours). - Practical classes (facilities, laboratory, etc.) (30 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). - Assessment (5 hours). - Students’ independent work (study, e-learning, literature review, etc.) (45 hours). Assessment system and criteria In the course’s virtual classroom, you will be able to view in detail the activities you are required to complete, as well as the submission dates, assessment criteria and marking schemes for each one. To be eligible for CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT, a minimum attendance of 70 per cent at both theory and practical classes is compulsory. Failure to meet this requirement will result in the loss of the right to Continuous Assessment, and students will instead sit the non-continuous assessment during the official examination sessions. Continuous assessment will be allocated as follows: Final knowledge assessments (60%) -Exams assessing the knowledge acquired from the theoretical concepts studied in class. Practical activities (20%) - Solving practical case studies based on information previously studied in laboratory activities. Students will be set exercises to complete relating to the concepts covered in the session or will be asked to search for scientific articles on a specific topic, to develop critical reading skills. Portfolio (20%) - Compilation of a portfolio in which the theoretical concepts covered in class are applied in a practical manner. Non-continuous assessment will be distributed as follows: Theoretical-Practical Test (100%) - A written examination covering the theoretical knowledge of the subject (60%) - A practical examination assessing the practical skills acquired. It is an essential requirement to achieve a minimum mark of 5 out of 10 in the practical section in order for this to be averaged with the theory. (40%) The examinations will be multiple-choice, except for the practical cases, which may involve solving a problem similar to those covered in class. Incorrect answers in the multiple-choice examination are marked negatively. In the course/module’s virtual classroom, you will be able to view in detail the activities you are required to complete, as well as the submission dates, assessment criteria and marking schemes for each one. 5.1. Ordinary examination session To pass the course/module in the ordinary assessment period, you must achieve a mark of 5.0 out of 10.0 or higher in the final mark (weighted average) for the course and, in addition: The average mark for all activities in each course/module must be 5.0 out of 10.0 or higher to be included in the overall average with the exam. Similarly, the exam mark must be 5.0 out of 10.0 or higher to be included in the overall average with the activities. 5.2. Extraordinary examination session To pass the module in the resit, students must achieve a final mark (weighted average) of 5.0 out of 10.0 or higher. Students must submit any assignments that were not passed during the ordinary assessment period, after receiving the relevant feedback from the lecturer, or any assignments that were not submitted at all. Bibliography Essential: 1. Alfredo Martínez Hernández Fundamentals of Nutrition and Dietetics Panamericana. 2011. ISBN: 9788491105251 Supplementary: 2.- Ángel Gil Treatise on Nutrition 3rd ed. Panamericana. 2017. ISBN: 9788491101956 3. José Matáix Verdú Nutrition and Human Diet Ergon. 2009. ISBN: 9788484736646 4. Marcela Glez-Gross Sports Nutrition: From Physiology to Practice Panamericana. 2020. ISBN: 9788491106036 5. Pablo Veiga Herreros Theoretical and Practical Handbook of Nutrition and Diet Bellisco. 2009. ISBN: 9788495277008 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430552 | Organisation and planning of sports training | OP | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Organisation and planning of sports trainingCódigo: 0430552 Imprimir Course 4. Second-term module. Elective. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives General Objectives To acquire and master basic theoretical and practical concepts and knowledge relating to the planning, organisation, monitoring and evaluation of the sports training process Specific Objectives To understand and be able to apply the principles of sports training, adapting them to the different situations encountered during the training process To be able to adapt, plan and structure the short-, medium- and long-term training process for the main motor skills Prerequisites None specified Competencies To study the process of acquiring the various motor skills. The main competences related to the subjects covered in this module that students will acquire upon completion are as follows: 1. To know and understand the effects that a training programme has on athletes’ physical fitness. 2. To master the key concepts of the sports training process. 3. To recognise and practise the different systems and methods for training physical qualities (strength, endurance, flexibility and speed). 4. To understand, develop and apply the basic concepts of sports training planning and delivery. 5. To be familiar with the methodology and specific training methods for the chosen sport, organising them into a training schedule. 6. To know how to plan and evaluate training and competition in the chosen sport 7. Critically analyse articles from the scientific literature dealing with various aspects related to the organisation and planning of sports training. Relationship to the degree programme’s learning outcomes This module specifically contributes to the following competences defined for the degree programme as a whole, although there are other competences to which it may also contribute: 1) To plan, develop and monitor the training process at its various levels. 2) Apply physiological, biomechanical and behavioural principles when supervising sports training. Learning outcomes The elements that can be used to assess these competences in terms of learning outcomes include, amongst others, the following: • Demonstrating sufficient knowledge of the various content modules covered by answering theoretical questions. • Apply what is covered in theory in class to real-life situations through practical scenarios. • Plan and periodise a season, or part of a season, in the chosen sport. • Independently develop any content through research and personal study. • To be able to apply the principles and methods of sports training to the development of the various basic physical qualities, taking into account the relevant context. • Apply the technical and tactical knowledge acquired in relation to the chosen sport. • Carry out practical functional assessments of those abilities that can be evaluated through testing (e.g. joint mobility, strength, endurance, speed, etc.). • Make appropriate use of ICT. Description of the content 1. Planning/periodisation of sports training. 2. Tapering (pre-competition preparation). 3. Organisation and planning of sports training for young people. 4. Planning, programming and women. 5. Training monitoring. 6. Training in special circumstances. 7. Training programming in health-oriented fitness programmes. Training activities The training activities to be carried out to ensure that students acquire the intended competences during this module and are able to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: 1. Lectures on concepts relating to sports training, functional assessment of physical and sporting performance, as well as those relating to the technical and tactical aspects applied to sports training (15 hours). 2. Practical sessions in laboratories and sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making within the field of sports training and the functional assessment of physical performance (30 hours). 3. Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). 4. Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work carried out both individually and in groups, etc. (45 hours). 6. Oral, written and practical assessment tests (5 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus.
CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT SYSTEM To pass the module, students must fulfil the following requirements: Final knowledge assessments, practical activities and a portfolio. A. Final knowledge assessments. A final examination comprising open-ended and closed-ended questions will be held. The final mark for the examinations accounts for 60 per cent of the final mark. B. Practical activities. These are compulsory for passing via continuous assessment. Successful completion of the practicals accounts for 20% of the final mark. C. Portfolio. This will be set at the end of the term, in which the student will develop a training programme for a practical scenario. The mark for this work accounts for 20% of the final mark. In any case, in order for the marks from the three assessment methods to be calculated, students must achieve a PASS in each of them. NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT SYSTEM: 100% of the mark will be based on a single theoretical and practical examination. This examination will be divided into two parts: A. Theoretical Part: 60% B. Practical Part: 40%. It is an essential requirement to achieve a minimum mark of 5 out of 10 in the practical part in order for it to be averaged with the theoretical part. Bibliography Core: 1. Bosco, Carmen Muscle Strength Inde. 2000. ISBN: 8495114542 2. García Manso, Juan Manuel High Performance Gymnos. 1999. ISBN: 8480132032 3. García Manso, Juan Manuel Sports Training Planning: Gymnos. 1996. ISBN: 8480130547 4. Issurin, Vladimir Sports Training Paidotribo. 2014. ISBN: 9788499100852 5. Platonov, Vladimir Nikolaievich General Theory of Olympic Sports Training Paidotribo. 2001. ISBN: 8480195711 6. Verkhoshansky, Yury Theory and Methodology of Sports Training Paidotribo. 2002. ISBN: 8480196122 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430553 | Promotion, organisation and development of sporting events | OP | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Promotion, organisation and development of sporting eventsCódigo: 0430553 Imprimir Course 4. Second-term module. Elective. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives 1. To develop a sufficient understanding of the organisation of a sporting event: composition, structure, hierarchy and programme development. 2. To familiarise oneself with the key aspects of the management and administration of sporting events. 3. To learn how to lead, manage, organise and run different types of sporting events. 4. To develop medium-level marketing campaigns for a sporting event 5. Make sound decisions regarding the creation and organisation of a sporting event. 6. To improve the capabilities and revenue of a sporting event. 7. Develop a sports event project that can be implemented in practice. Course content * Theory: 1. Structure and hierarchy in sporting events 2. Organisation and management of sporting events 3. Leadership 4. Marketing applicable to the development of sports projects 5. Skills transferable to a sporting event * Practical: Organisation of a sporting event at UAX in coordination with the University’s sports department Learning activities The training activities to be undertaken by students throughout the module will be as follows: - Lectures or masterclasses (15 hours). - Practical classes (facilities, laboratory, etc.) (30 hours). - Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). - Assessment (5 hours). - Students’ independent work (study, e-learning, literature review, etc.) (45 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities requiring the student’s physical or virtual presence will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The final mark for the module will be out of 10 and may be obtained either through continuous assessment throughout the course or by sitting the non-continuous assessment. CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: Final knowledge assessments (50%). A theoretical and practical examination will be held, which may consist of multiple-choice questions, short-answer or essay questions, or case studies. For multiple-choice questions, correct answers will be marked, bearing in mind that incorrect answers will result in a percentage deduction based on the number of answers provided. The exam will be marked out of 10. To be included in the overall mark alongside other coursework, a minimum mark of 5 out of 10 must be achieved in the exam. Otherwise, the mark will be recorded as a fail. Practical activities (30%) A task to be carried out in accordance with the procedure explained in class by the lecturer. Apply the theoretical framework and organise a sporting event on the UAX campus. To pass this component, a minimum mark of 5 is required. Otherwise, it will be recorded as a fail. Portfolio (20%) comprising an analysis of all practical classes, each of which includes between 1 and 2 practical tasks per week. It is compulsory to achieve a mark of at least 5 in all assessment components; otherwise, the module will not be passed in the ordinary assessment period and attendance at the supplementary assessment period will be compulsory. If students opt for non-continuous assessment or forfeit their right to continuous assessment, they must sit the COURSE EXAMINATION during the REGULAR or SUPPLEMENTARY examination period. NON-CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: If students opt for the final assessment or lose their entitlement to continuous assessment, they must sit the COURSE EXAMS IN MAY OR JULY. Final assessments (100%) Final exam 100%. The theoretical and practical exam may consist of multiple-choice questions, short-answer or essay-style questions, or case studies. For multiple-choice questions, correct answers will be marked, bearing in mind that incorrect answers will result in a percentage deduction based on the number of options in the question. The exam will be marked out of 10 marks. The theoretical section will account for 60 per cent of the final mark. The practical section will account for 40% of the final mark. It is an essential requirement to achieve a minimum mark of 5 out of 10 in the practical section in order for it to be averaged with the theoretical section. EXCUSES FOR ABSENCES Excuse notes for absences may only be submitted within a maximum of two weeks from the date of the absence; after this period, the excuse note will no longer be valid. If a student is absent from class due to illness, they must provide a medical certificate; otherwise, the absence will not be considered justified. Excuse notes must be sent to the lecturer by email or via a message on the virtual campus. Excuse notes handed in person during class will not be accepted. SUBMITTING AN EXCUSE NOTE DOES NOT ALWAYS MEAN THAT THE ABSENCE IS CONSIDERED JUSTIFIED. Addendum BIBLIOGRAPHY 1. Pozas, D. Manual on the Organisation of Sporting Events. Published by Pulsaciones.net. 2. Fernández and Vázquez, J.J. Guide to Protocol and Ceremonial Procedures for the Organisation of Sporting Events. Published by Síntesis. (2005) 3. López de Subijana, C; Martínez Díez, B. Handbook on the Organisation of Sporting Events. Wanceulem. 2010. 4. Desbordes, M; Falgoux, J. Management and Organisation of a Sporting Event. INDE. 2006. 5. Fernández, J.J. Handbook of Sports Protocol and Ceremonial. Paidotribo. 2005 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0430554 | Functional recovery and sports rehabilitation | OP | 4 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Functional recovery and sports rehabilitationCódigo: 0430554 Imprimir Course 4. Second-term module. Elective. 4 credits. Profesores
Objectives 1. To understand and identify the most significant risk factors for sports injuries, as well as the concepts of functional recovery and exercise rehabilitation, as a specialism within the Sciences of Physical Activity and Sport. 2. To be able to design a specific exercise rehabilitation programme for injuries, selecting the most effective training methods for each injury, as well as the most appropriate load and progression. 3. To acquire competence in the practical application of programmes for identifying injury risk and training systems for injured athletes. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been established Learning Outcomes Course competences The main competences related to the subjects in this module which students will acquire upon completion are as follows: 1) To acquire the necessary and specific training for in the field of physical activity and sport, in accordance with the chosen career path. 2) To recognise and practise the various systems and methods of training physical qualities. 3) To understand, develop and apply the basic concepts of sports planning and training, adapting them to injured athletes. 4) Understand and analyse the characteristics of athletes from a physiological and biomechanical perspective. Competencies for the professional profile - To plan, develop and monitor the training process at its various levels. - Apply physiological, biomechanical, behavioural and social principles whilst managing . Learning outcomes - Demonstrate sufficient knowledge of the various content modules by answering theoretical and practical questions. - Carry out assignments and practical exercises applying the subject-specific subject. - Independently explore any topic through research and independent study. - Be able to apply the principles and models of pedagogical intervention in any educational context. - Make appropriate use of ICT. Course-specific learning outcomes: 1. To be familiar with and understand the concept of functional recovery and exercise retraining. 2. To recognise and interpret the phases involved in the functional recovery from injuries. 3. To identify the most significant risk factors for injury in sport. 4. Be able to design a specific exercise rehabilitation programme for injuries. 5. To understand and critically and reflectively evaluate the various methods that can be used in the functional recovery from sports injuries. Course content description TOPIC 01: Theoretical framework. Functional recovery. Sports rehabilitation. Injury epidemiology. TOPIC 02: Multidisciplinary team and phases of functional recovery. TOPIC 03: Physical capacities involved in functional recovery. TOPIC 04: Assessment, monitoring and quantification of functional recovery. TOPIC 05: Functional recovery from short- and medium-term injuries: sprains, dislocations and muscle injuries. TOPIC 06: Functional recovery from long-term sports injuries: groin pain, Achilles tendon and anterior cruciate ligament TOPIC 07: Functional recovery specific to high-performance sport. Planning to prevent recurrence Training activities The training activities designed to enable students to acquire the intended competences during this module and to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: 1) Lectures on concepts related to the specific professional specialisation chosen by the student (15 hours). 2) Practical sessions in laboratories and sports facilities, in small groups, enabling students to gradually acquire the ability to work independently in problem-solving and decision-making within the field of the specific career guidance training chosen by the student (30 hours). 3) Individual and group tutorials (5 hours). 4) Students’ independent work, including study, e-learning (interactive distance learning via the virtual campus), literature reviews, report writing and practical work carried out both individually and in groups, etc. (45 hours). 5) Oral, written and practical assessment tests (5 hours). Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 70 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the ordinary examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. Continuous assessment is organised into three components: * Final knowledge assessments: 50%, covering the content studied in a multiple-choice written test. * Practical activities: 30%, relating to various practical exercises at the time of injury. * Portfolio: 20%, relating to the injury process in a specific case to be determined. Non-continuous assessment will be determined by a single theoretical and practical examination, which will be divided into two parts: * Theoretical part: 60%, covering the content discussed in a multiple-choice written test. * Practical part: 40%, relating to the resolution of a specific case study on a sports injury; it is an essential requirement to achieve a minimum mark of 5 out of 10 in the practical part in order for this to be averaged with the theoretical part. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
*Character: BT: Basic Training, Ob: Required, Op: Optional
The Dual Degree in Sport and Physiotherapy is offered by the Career Services , where we provide you with everything you need to arrange your work placements and contacts with organisations, to foster contact with the professional world right from the start.
UAX has over 100 work placement agreements with top-tier sports clubs and organisations, hospitals and physiotherapy centres:
During your study programme, you'll have exclusive online training content that Rafa Nadal himself and his entire team have worked on, sharing their experiences and revealing the secrets that have led him to success: Toni Nadal, Carlos Moyá, Ángel Ruiz Cotorro, Rafael Maymó, Carlos Costa, Benito Pérez-Barbadillo, Gemma Bes and Maribel Nadal.
You'll access unique content that will help you hone the qualities today's job market demands: effort, cooperation, empathy, leadership, professional ethics, responsibility and commitment, humility and confidence, resilience, discipline, and hard work.
Thanks to the double degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences and Physiotherapy, you will learn in modern facilities equipped with state-of-the-art equipment:
Only UAX includes the compulsory stress test and the full functional assessment report in your entrance exams.
The stress test is indicative of physical fitness, not selective:
Estimated duration 45'.
Functional assessment.
Candidates will receive a personalised report on their physical condition.
Language test, non-selective
Admission process ranking
Academic record: 70%.
Competence test: 20%.
Motivational letter: 5%.
Language test: 5% Language test: 5% Language test: 5% Language test: 5% Language test: 5% Language test: 5% Language test
Only UAX includes in your entrance exams to this university degree the compulsory stress test + full functional assessment report.
As you know, one of the requirements to access the degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences at any private university is to present the results of a stress test signed by a doctor. Normally this certificate can be obtained in specialised centres, but at UAX we save you this procedure, providing you with an exhaustive functional assessment report made up of the following:
Come and take the entrance tests and we will give you the results* together with your letter of admission. This not only saves you time, but also gives you valuable information about your performance and potential to start a career towards professional success.
Are you joining us? Start your admission process now.
*The results report submitted with your admission letter has no legal validity. The official legal certificate signed by the doctor will be given to you when you enrol.
Train with the best professionals
Doctor in Biomechanics and Rehabilitation
Coordinador de cantera y de fútbol base en el CD Leganés SAD. Ex entrenador de fútbol en la Escuela de la Real Federación Española de Fútbol, Real Madrid y Rayo Majadahonda.
Faculty of Health and Sport
Galardón Nacional Industria Fitness en 2007 y 2009. Reconocimiento FEDOMEDE en Docencia y aporte a al Deporte y Salud. Director del Instituto Internacional Ciencias Ejercicio Físico y Salud.
Doctor at Atlético de Madrid. Doctor at the French Swimming Federation and Doctor at the FIFA Centre of Excellence.
Physical trainer specialised in Gymnastics, training for 17 years with the National Rhythmic Gymnastics Team, twice world champion (2013 and 2014) and Olympic runner-up in Rio de Janeiro 2016.
We train professionals under the guidance of experts who are already transforming the world of healthcare and the sports industry, drawing on UAX’s DNA and Rafa Nadal’s working model.
Unas instalaciones sostenibles de más de 2.000m2 con un diseño vanguardista y equipamiento de última generación con las que UAX amplía su campus y refuerza su apuesta por la excelencia en la formación en Salud y Deporte. Find out more
Cutting-edge sports facilities where you can carry out your work placement. Find out more
A unique facility in Spain where you can undergo your training in the most innovative and comprehensive manner. Find out more
A unique, university-level sports club with the best facilities for multi-sport practice. Find out more
With the Double Degree in CAFYD and Physiotherapy you will be able to carry out your professional activity in:
The first step is to contact our team of advisers to determine the best way to start your professional career with us, you can also arrange a personal visit from Monday to Saturday and get to know UAX first hand.
Help us get to know you a little better by starting the admission process. You will need to upload the documents required for the application to our portal.
You will take several tests, including a language test, a knowledge test and a video in which you will answer two short questions. We also need some additional information to complete the registration.
A student who does not wait for someone to offer solutions, but takes the initiative to research, learn and create on their own. Welcome!
At UAX we know that studying is an investment, that's why we provide you with the facilities you need to access our degrees. Find out about some of our scholarships and grants:
It’s not us saying this – it’s those who’ve already experienced it. They’ve been through it first-hand. Now they’re telling you all about it in their own words.
Meet the elite athletes studying at UAX
Subcampeón del mundo de Golf para ciegos. Es el primer español en conseguir este trofeo.
Campeón del Mundo Junior en Judo. 6º en el ranking mundial. Miembro del Equipo Nacional desde 2008. Medalla de bronce en los Juegos Olímpicos de París 2024.
Miembro del equipo nacional de Gimnasia Artística y campeona de España en cuatro ocasiones. Participó en los Juegos Olímpicos de París 2024.
Velocista en los Juegos Olímipicos de 2016 (Río de Janeiro) 200m. Plusmarquista de España Absoluta de 4x100m.
Jugador de Rugby. Internacional español Sub18 tanto de XV como de 7’s.
Judoca Campeona de España Junior. Campeona de España Absoluta, Subcampeona de Europa Junior. Subcampeona del Mundo Junior 5º. Diploma Olímpico de Judo en París 2024.
A track record of success
UAX obtains the highest rating of 5 stars and the overall "Excellent" badge for Employability, Teaching, Academic Development, Facilities, Online Teaching and Good Governance in the prestigious international QS Stars rating.
The prestigious ranking of the BBVA Foundation and the IVIE recognises us as the university with the best job placement in Spain in 2023, consolidating our model focused on the real employability of our graduates.
Forbes ranks UAX as the private university with the most graduates working in its area (nearly 90%), thanks to a unique educational model firmly linked to the labour market through more than 8,800 agreements with companies.
UAX is recognised as the second most innovative university in Spain, the only private university among the top three in the ranking. This recognition highlights our transversal commitment to AI and training in sustainability.
We need to know a little bit about you so that we can provide you with a personalised service.
All fields are required
Other related qualifications
Bachelor Degree in Physiotherapy
In collaboration with:
Start:
September
Length:
4 years
Degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences (CAFYD)
In collaboration with:
Start:
September
Length:
4 years
Degree in Physical Activity and Sport Sciences (CAFYD) + Degree in Human Nutrition and Dietetics
In collaboration with:
Start:
September
Length:
5 years
Bachelor’s Degree in Sports Management
In collaboration with:
Start:
September
Length:
4 años
Enquiries, complaints and claims
We respond to the genuine needs of our students and staff, because we believe in the continuous improvement of our results. That is why we always want to hear whatever you have to say.
If you are already part of UAX, please visit the ‘Customer Service: complaints, suggestions and compliments’ section on thevirtual campus , logging in with your username and password.